Fke May 2011

KERTAS SO ALAN PEPERIKSAAN BERCETAK - SEM. *1 2010/2011 (FKE)SEMESTER U

BIL KOD KURSUS1. SEE 25232. SET 45233. SEM 43334. SEE 32235. SEE 35336. SEM 41537. SEE 3243 / SEE 42438. SEP 40039. SEL 428310. SEM 417311. SEP 4043 / SWB 404312. SEU 305313. SEE 445314. SEE 326315. SEE 444316. SEE 415317. SEP 426318. SEE 102319. SEE 112320. SEE 311321. SEE 411322. SEE 100323. SEE 206324. SEE 205325. SEE 225326. SEL 436327. SEP 424328. SET 454329. SEI 414330. SEL 426331. SET 358332. SEL 453333. SEL 422334. SEI 412335. SEP 425336. SEL 423337. SEI 415338. SEE 413339. SEE 122340. SEE 211341. SET 357342. SET 459343. SEU 203344. SEU 205245. SEL 437346. SEE 446347. SEU 201248. SEE 443349. SEI313350. SEE 343351. SET 453352. SEE 401253. SEE 204354. SEP 412355. SEL 4743

CONFIDENTIAL

UTMUNIVERSITI TEKNOLOGI MALAYSIA

FINAL EXAMINATION SEMESTER II SESSION 2010/2011

COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 2523

ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY

LECTURERS

PROGRAMME

ASSOC. PROF. DR. ABU SAHMAH BIN MOHD SUPAATASSOC. PROF. DR. NORAZAN BIN MOHD KASSIMDR. MOHD HANIFF BIN IBRAHIM DR. MUHAMMAD RAMLEE BIN KAMARUDIN DR. NOOR ASNIZA BT MURAD MRS. FAREHA BT ABDUL RAHMAN

SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET / SEW / SWB

SECTION

TIME

DATE

01-05/10

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

04 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE : ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.THREE (3) QUESTIONS FROM PART A AND ONE (1) QUESTION FROM PART B.

THIS EXAMINATION BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 10 PAGES INCLUDING THE FRONT COVER

SEE 2523

2

PART A

Ql(a) With the aid of a model of four point charges and the definition of electric field potential difference, derive an equation to determine the energy stored in a system of charge.

[5 marks]

(b) A coaxial cable has an inner radius a and an outer radius c. Assume that both cylinders are perfectly conducting. The inner and outer cylinders contain charges of +Q and -Q respectively. When oriented along the z axis, the relative permittivity for first dielectric material (a < r < b) is sri and the relative permittivity for second dielectric material {b < r< c) is sr2 assuming that a<b <c. Determine:

(i) the electric field intensity in regions r<a>a<r<b and b < r <c; [6 marks]

(ii) the absolute electric potential in regions r<a, a<r<b and b < r < c; and

[6 marks]

(iii) the electric energy per unit length in each of the dielectric materials. [3 marks]

State clearly any assumptions made.

(c) Referring to the same coaxial cable mentioned in question 1(b) above, let a = 1.0 cm, b = 1.75 cm and c = 2.8 cm. Assume that the first dielectric is Teflon and the second dielectric is Polystyrene. Using information given in Table Ql(c) below, determine the maximum voltage that can be applied to the coaxial cable.

Table Q 1(c)

Relative PermittivitySr

Breakdown electric field (V/m)

Mica 5.4 200 x 10b

Polyethyline 2.26 47 x 106

Polystryene 2.56 20 x 10b

Teflon 2.1 60 x 106

Explain what will happen with regards to the maximum applied voltage to the coaxial cable if Teflon is being replaced with Mica. [5 marks]

SEE 2523

3

Q2 (a) Explain clearly what is the Uniqueness theorem.

[3 marks]

(b) Consider two potential solutions which in terms of cylindrical coordinate system are given by:

V, = 90/b;

and

V2 = (100b-10r)/rb

where b is a constant.

(i) Show that both solutions satisfy Laplace’s equation.

[4 marks]

(ii) Show that both solutions yield the same potential at r = b.

[2 marks]

(c) A parallel plate capacitor consists of two conductors are located at z = 0 and z = 0.01 m respectively. Each conductor has surface area of 1.5 m2.The lower conductor is grounded, meanwhile the other conductor is at a potential of 10 V. The relative permittivity in the region between the conductors varies as a function ofz and is given by sr = 1 + z. Assuming that the potential only depends on z and the fringing is ignored, find:

(i) The electric potential in the region between the two conductors; [6 marks]

(ii) The surface charge densities on the two conductors; [3 marks]

(iii) The capacitance; and [4 marks]

(iv) Show that the total bound charge is zero for this capacitor. [3 marks]

SEE 2523

4

Q3(a) A coaxial cable centered along the z axis is shown in Figure Q3(a). The inner conductor at r < a is carrying current IA in +z direction while the outer conductor b < r < c is carrying current IA in - z direction. The region a < r < b is a magnetic material with relative permeability p.r of 2.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

Obtain the magnetic field intensity in all the regions. [6 marks]

Find total magnetic flux in the region a < r < b and 0 < z < 1 [4 marks]

Determine the magnetized surface current on the surfaces of the magnetic material. [3 marks]

Find the inductance per meter of the coaxial cable

Find the magnetic energy per meter stored in the cable

[2 marks]

[2 marks]

(b) (i) Referring to Figure Q3(b), find the magnetic force per unit length along filamen current I2 [5 marks]

(ii) How would the magnetic force behave if both currents are in the same direction.

[3 marks]

Current Ij current I-

distance d

Figure Q3(b)

SEE 2523

5

Q4(a) With the aid of a suitable diagram and assumption, derive the mathematical expression of boundary condition of two magnetic materials if the magnetic field propagates from one magnetic material with permeability ju2to another magnetic material with

permeability//,. [8 marks]

(b) A magnetic field intensity in a region defined by y -x - 2 < 0 is Hx = 2x-6y + 4z A/m.

The permeability of the magnetic material of the region is given by //, = 5jua. Determine:

(i) Magnetization vector M, and magnetic flux density 5,. [2 marks]

(ii) Magnetic field intensity H2, magnetic flux density B2, magnetization vector M2 in region y-x-2 > 0 with relative permeability 2.

[10 marks](iii) Magnetized surface current density Jsm at the boundary.

[5 marks]

SEE 2523

6

PARTS

Q5(a) About 20 KM from Madinah Munawwarah, there is a mountain called Jabal of Magnetism. Normally, the tourist guide will bring the tourists to this place either by buses, vans or cars. The miracle happens at the valley of the mountain is that the bus, car or van will be pulled by some force (maybe Magnetic Force) in a certain direction where the speed can reach up to 120 Kmph. As a researcher, you have been given the task to investigate the emf induced by the force. You may use galvanometer, loop or any relevant measurement setup. Please state clearly any assumptions made in order to obtain the induced emf. [5 marks]

(b)The loop shown in Figure Q5(b) is inside a uniform magnetic field B = 0.1 ay Tesla. If side DC of the loop cuts the flux lines at the frequency of 100 Hz and the loop lies in the yz-plane at time t = 0, find

(i) The induced emf at t = 2 ms; [7 marks]

(ii) The induced current at t = 4 ms ; [3 marks]

State clearly any assumptions made.

(c) Repeat Q5(b) (i) and (ii) above for B = 0.02/ ax T and R = 1 ohm. [10 marks]

(You may 'use-. a6 = — sin 0 ax 4- cos 0 ay)

z

Figure Q5(b)

SEE 2523

7

Q6(a) By applying suitable assumptions and equations, show that the wave attenuation and phase constants are depicting equal formulation for the case of propagation in good conductors. [5 marks]

(b) An electric field of E(x,t) = 5 sin (2.5 x 109t +24°) az V/m, is excited into a copper sheet as shown in Figure Q6(b). If the crC0pper = 5.8 x 107 S/m, find the phase and amplitude at a depth of 0.1 mm, 2 mm, 5 mm and 10 mm. Sketch the electric field magnitude versus propagation distance inside the copper sheet. [8 marks]

Figure Q6(b)

(c) Light propagation in rectangular optical waveguide structure (Figure 6(c)) can be regarded as a uniform plane wave propagation. The waveguide material is assumed to have the following parameters: er = 80, fj.r = 1, o = 0.4 S/m. Laser pulse is then coupled into the waveguide structure at the position z = 0, in which +z direction is considered to be the direction of propagation. As a result, the following magnetic field value has been measured at z = 10 m.

H(10,t) = 20 cos (2u x 103t + 15°) ay mA/m

(i) Determine the general formulations of E(z,t) and H(z,t) [10 marks]

(ii) Find the time-average power of the propagated wave at z = 20 m. [2 marks]

Figure 6(c)

SEE 2523

8

ELECTROSTATIC FIELD MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD

Coulomb’s Law E= f——aR Biot-Savart Law H= {—■■■* ffi- J 4nR

Gauss’s Law ($D■ ds=Oen Ampere Circuital law (^H-d =Jen

Force on a point charge F=EC Force on a moving charge F = Q(u x 5) Force on a current^Ptemeftt F = /5T x ~B

Electric field for finite line charge

E =-^—(sina, + sina)+-(coso:3 -cosaOf 47Z£0lrv 'rK lJ

Magnetic field for finite current

H =------ (sin a2 + sin a,4m-

Electric field for infinite line charge

£= A r 2 7te0r

Magnetic field for infinite current

H = — l2 7vr

Electric flux density D = sE Magnetic flux density B=/JHEl ectric flux y/E =Q = (^D- ds ' Magnetic flux <ym = B ■ ds

Divergence theorem cj>D • ds= J (V • D^dvs v

Stoke’s theorem c}>H-d = J (V x H)• ds i ,t

Potential difference VAB = - \ E ■ d\B

Absolute potential V = I , ~K J 4 tus0R

Gradient of potential E = -V V Magnetic potential, (A) —» B = V x AEnergy stored in an electric field

■wc~\ 1(5-1)*^ V

Energy stored in a magnetic field

Wm=l\(BW)h^ V

Total current in a conductor' /= \j- ds where J = crE

Polarization vector P =D—eÊ Magnetization vector M = %mH where Zm =M-

Bound surface charge density Psb=P-h

Volume surface charge density A*=-V-?

Magnetized surface current density

Magnetized volume current density Jm=VxM

Electrical boundary conditions and -E^-E^

Magnetic boundary conditions B\n = An an<3 t—Js

Resistance J? = —as *■*#-

Capacitance C- —âb

Inductance L = y where A=

Poisson’s equation V2V =£

Laplace equation VJF = 0Maxwell equation V •£)=/?„ ^ Vx£ = 0 Maxwell equation V ■ B = 0, V xH = J

SEE 2523

9

TIME VARYING FIELDMaxwell equation V-D=pv

V x i = - ~

V - B = 0

V x H = J + — dt

Gauss’s Law for electric field

Faraday’s Law

Gauss’s Law for magnetic field

Ampere Circuital Law

Characteristics of wave propagation in lossy medium (crÔ)ju=/^jl.is=s^sr)

Electric field, E (z, t) = cos (cot - ftz)x— E

Magnetic field, H(z,t) = jje~a:cos(o}t-/3z + 9)ym

Attenuation constant a = co1

1 ( VIISJl+ —i] -1

U \cosJ

Phase constant (5=0)1

f \2

j1 +

<y+ 1

2 \COSJ

Intrinsic impedance 77 = 7— w h e r e t a n 2d„ = •[ l + / cosf J

M-iSkin depth 8=\la

Poynting theorem (E x Hy ds = J

cos

-£E2+-+lH2 12 2 .

iv- foE2dv

Poynting vector @=ExH

Average power

SEE 2523

10

Kecerunan “Gradient”

' «df *df «df Vf = x— + y— + z— dx dy dz

.df 0 df \df Vf = r — +—~ + z — dr r d<f> dz

vf = ?&+!L'L+JL-K.dr r d$ r sin 6 d<f>

Kecapahan “Divergence”

_ -j dA x dA v 5A. V-A =—- +—- +—-

dx dy dz

V-A =-

V-A =■

d(rAr)dr

1 cL4, dA.+---------- — + —-

r d<j> dz

1 \d(r'A,y 1H---------

d(Ae sin 0)r1 dr. rsin# L de J + -

1 dA, r sin (9 dfi

Ikal “Curl”

VxA=x

V x A = r

V xA = ■

' dA. dAv} JdAr dA.\-jfdAr dA: N

dy dz

r d(/> dzA /

+ </>.

dz dx

dAr dA: dz dr

f\ dAs dA^ f** ^*'-A N

\z

J

+ •

rsin#d(A4 sin 6) 8Ae N

d6 d<j>& + — r

dx dy

d(rA,) dAr d</>dr

1 dA, d(rA4)'sin# d<j> dr r

'd{rAe) dA,)dr dd )

Laplacian

J dx2 dy2 dz2

V2f =l_d_ r dr

df) + ±dV + 5Vr1 df dz2

rk dr;

V2 f =—r— J r2 dr

1 d(,df~\ .1 d f&dr

+ -r2 sin# d&

sin# I.de

+i

r2 sin2 9

CONFIDENTIAL



SET 4523

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

PROF. DR. ABU BAKAR BIN MOHAMMAD ASSOC. PROF. DR. SEVIA MAHDALIZA BT IDRUS

SET

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

05 MAY 2011

ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


COURSE CODE :

COURSE NAME :

LECTURERS :

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE :

-2-SET 4523

Ql. (25 Marks)

(a) Discuss the two main reasons why optical fiber is a favored communication channel for long-

haul communications compared to copper channels. (4 marks)

(b) Consider a step index fiber;

(i) Determine the cutoff wavelength to exhibit single mode operation when the core

refractive index and radius are 1.46 and 4.5 |im, respectively, with the relative index

difference being 0.25%. (2 marks)

(ii) Calculate the fiber core size if using different source at 1320 nm and 1550 nm. (4 marks)

(iii) Discuss the result obtain in (b) (i). (2 marks)

(c) As a design engineer, you have been assigned to analyze a proposed optical link as illustrated

in Figure Ql. However the task is limited by the information given below.

- An optical source in the transmitter module has an rms spectral width of AX nm.

The optical fiber which is a step index fiber with a core refractive index 1.35 and relative

refractive index difference of 1%.

Length: 15 km

Figure Ql

By making reasonable assumption(s), estimate the value of AX, if the maximum achievable

bit rate of the link is 1 Mbps. (13 marks)

-3-SET 4523

a) Describe how dispersion limits the bandwidth of a silica optical fiber link. (5 marks)

b) Suggest three methods to increase the transmission bit rate of a single mode silica optical fiber

link.

(5 marks)

c) An optical link is required between two cities of 100-km apart. The link is intended for the

distribution of broadband digital signal to 10 premises connected to the receiving node of the

link.

i) Draw a possible layout of the system indicating components chosen. (5 marks)

ii) Explain the reasons in deciding on the choice of the components. (5 marks)

iii) Estimate the minimum bit rate of the digital signal delivered to each premise. (5 marks)

Q2. (25 Marks)

-4-SET 4523

(a) Atoms and molecules in the atmosphere scatter light in the same way that atoms in glass scatter

light in an optical fiber. The shorter the wavelength, the stronger will be the scattering. Where

do you think the sky gets its blue colour and justify your answer? (4 marks)

(b) You need to design a digital link to connect two points of 50 km apart. The bit rate needed is

40 Mbps with BER = 10‘12 indicated in Figure Q3.

Determine whether the components listed are suitable for the link in terms of;

(i) Power budget (7 marks)

(ii) Rise time budget, assuming NRZ is used. (7 marks)

Q3. (25 Marks)

Source and detector connector: 2dB per connector

Dispersion 1 ns/km

Figure Q3

(c) Estimate the link signal to noise ratio (SNR) if the load resistor, Rl given is 7kfL (7 marks)

-5-SET 4523

(a) Explain how light is generated in a light emitting diode (LED). (5 marks)

(b) Discuss in detail the reasons why an LED is not suitable for a broadband optical link. (5 marks)

(c) You are required to analyze the capability of a 25-km high bit rate optical link. It uses a

suitable optical fiber as the channel. The available components are as given in Table Q4.

(i) Estimate the bit rate of the link. (8 marks)

(ii) Calculate the maximum link length if the data rate is not critical. (7 marks)

Q4. (25 Marks)

Table Q4 Photodiode and Laser Specification

Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typical Max UnitPhotodiodeWavelength X — 1250 — 1620 nm

APD Responsivity R-apd X =1550 nm — 10 — A/WX=1310 nm — 8.5 —

Sensitivity P rmin — — -34 — dBmRise time tdet — 0.1 ns

Dark current Idark — 20 nA

Laser diodeOutput power Pout — 0.5 mW

Wavelength range X — 1520-1580

nm

Spectral width AX — 3 nmRisetime tsource — 0.5 ns

-6-SET 4523

Q5. (25 Marks)

(a) Provide and explain the source of attenuation in a silica optical fiber with regard to the

wavelength used. (5 marks)

(b) Consider a 300km telephone system as shown Figure Q5 below, with splice every 10km with

loss of 0.1 dB. The cable has an attenuation of 0.25dB/km at 1550nm. It links two east coast

cities, Kuantan to Kota Baru, in a step index single mode fiber carrying a single wavelength

at 2.5Gbps. The links uses two optical amplifiers placed 100km apart with each having gain

of 30dB. Both switching offices and optical amplifiers are connected with 1 dB connector

termination at each end. Assuming that the chromatic dispersion of the fiber is specified at

3ps/nmkm at 1550nm. Both transmitter and receiver have similar rise time of lOOps and the

PIN photodetector sensitivity is at 40dBm.

300 km single mode fiber with 2.5 Gbps one wavelength■4---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ►

Kota Bharu Switching

Office30dB

KuantanSwitching

Office

Figure Q5

(i) Estimate the system power margin if coupled 0 dBm light source. (10 marks)

(ii) Estimate the system rise time budget in considering Fabri Perot laser with line width of 1 nm

and Distributed Feedback laser of 0.1 nm. (10 marks)

-7-SET 4523

General

NA = na sin 6a - w, (2AY2; A =ni

Appendix

«(r) =

V = —NA\VC =2.405A G

Mg =a

or + 2a"2 ;*7c-g«w = 0.5 NA2;tjc_S! = NA:

A Vc Dispersion Du =122(l-AmM)

(',-'.)/i = AM72ni|5r = 0.2/<x

«,a2z,

Tr = (2 , 2 l>2 cr„ + cr

Optical Sources/Detectors A = (l.24/£s)

P 7 J, /• ^C/Pin, = ^7ini ~ ¥ = 7in, “7e ex.n = (r^/vXi/e)=r„JiEt

i„ = (p.„/p)=>i(e,/v)

r„, = P„Mh'x7

B = f / s l 2

f-W/^ =i/Vi+W2 1

r = Ll = T*lP0 he

E = hf = he/ /I tr=2A9R,Cd

C =^- J wBm =

1

drift

1-2AU;

\r <a

n, (l - 2 A)05 =n2;r>a

NA„2=n,(2 &f'f / \ 2

1-r

V Ka y yAttenuation r„=l. 7(0.85/2)'

=4.4x10_3^2A2^5

P* =5.9x10-2d2Xam

i10.5

Noise

ff! = M/P+/D)i

v^y

,. = R.P=miphe

1.24 7̂3

Rl

CT = C , + C „

SNRpm =

. 2 . . .’ vr I Vamp

AKTBFnR,

B =2 nRLCT

2 sB{l p +1 d ) +4 KTBFn

*L

SNR APD

2eB{lP+Id)M: +4 KTBFn

RlM‘

7-w=i.i(rs2+7-F

!+r0!+r/)

p, =p„+cl + m„ + dl

BER = 0.5 erfc

Zn,A

/SNR05^

2V3

5TS = CConstantBoltzman Constant, /C=l .38x1 O’23 J/K Electron Charge, e=1.6 xlO'19C Planck's Constant, h=6.66xl0’34 JsT=27°C =300K

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEM 4333

COURSE NAME MECHATRONICS SYSTEMS DESIGN

LECTURERS PROF. MADYA DR. ROSBI BIN MAMAT

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEM

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

28 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER ANY FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


-2-

SEM4333

SI.

a) Jelaskan dengan ringkas satu (1) faedah dan satu (1) keburukan pendekatan mekatronik di dalam membangunkan sesuatu produk.Briefly describe one (1) advantage and one (1) disadvantage of mechatronic approach for developing a product. [6 MARKAH/marAs]

b) Satu motor arus terns dengan kawalan angker boleh diwakili oleh litar elektromekanik yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S 1.1. Voltan masukan va(t) akan

menghasilkan daya kilas T(t) yang berkadar terns dengan arus angker i (t):

A DC motor with armature control can be represented with an electromechanic circuit as shown in Figure Sl.l. The input voltage va(t)will produce a torqueT(t) which is proportional to the armature current i (t):

m=Ktia{t)

Daya kilas ini seterusnya menghasilkan sudut putaran aci 9(t) manakala pusingan aci pula menghasilkan voltan balik di dalam litar angker:The torque will produce a rotational angle 8{t) of the shaft while the shaft rotation will produce reverse voltage in the armature circuit:

vb(t) = Kb9(t)

i) Dengan menggunakan analogi galangan, dapatkan hubungan va,vb,ia di dalam litar angker. Unsur pasif sistem putaran mekanik diberikan di dalam Rajah S1.2. Using the impedance analogy, determine the relations between va,vb,ia in the armature circuit. The passive elements for mechanical rotational system are given in Figure SI. 2. [5 MARKAH/marfcs]

ii) Jika nilai aruhan (La) di dalam litar elektrik dan geseran (B) boleh diabaikan, tunjukkan bahawa rangkap pindah bagi motor arus terns dengan kawalan angker diberikan oleh: [6 MARKAH/mar&s] If the inductance (La) in the electric cicuit and the friction (B) can be ignored, show that the transfer function for the armature control DC motor is given by:

0{s) Kt

Va(s) s(RaJs + K(Kb)

iii) Tuliskan rangkap pindah bagi motor arus terus ini jika motor ini mempunyai parameter-parameter berikut:Give the transfer function for the DC motor if the motor has the following parameters: [2 MARKAH/marta]

Ra = 20Q, K, = IN.mA"1, Kb = SV.s.rad-1, J = 2N.m.s2.rad~1.

-3-

SEM4333

iv) Lukiskan gambarajah blok penyelakuan bagi motor arus terns dengan parameter yang diberikan di dalam bahagian iii) di atas jika blok-blok penyelakuan yang ada hanyalah blok-blok yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah SI .3.

Draw the simulation block diagram for the DC motor with given parameters as in part iii) above if the only available blocks are as shown in Figure SI. 3.

[6 MARKAH/marfo]

Ra La

Elektrik Mekanik

Rajah Sl.l: Motor arus terus dengan kawalan angker Figure Sl.l: Armature control DC motor

InertiaT( t ) = J 6 ( t )

T daya \d\asl torque J inersia/inertia

B

01

Peredam/

02> Damper

T{t) = B(ei(t)-62(t))T daya kilas/torque B pemalar likalJviscousity constant

Rajah S1.2: Unsur pasif sistem putaran mekanik Figure SI. 2: The passive elements for mechanical rotational system

Penjumlah/Summer Pengamirllntegral Gandaan/GainRajah S1.3: Blok-blok penyelakuan yang ada

Figure S1.3: Available simulation blocks

-4-

SEM4333

S2.

a) Jelaskan perbezaan cara kerja di antara pengekod-pengekod digital berikut yang digunakan sebagai penderia pengesan kedudukan:Explain the difference in the working of the following digital encoders used for position sensors. [8 MARKAH/marfa]i) Pengekod mutlak (Absolute encoder)ii) Pengekod menokok (Incremental encoder)

b) Satu pengekod menokok dengan cakera optik yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S2.1 digunakan untuk mengesan halaju putaran satu motor arus terns. Isyarat yang diperolehi dari pengekod tersebut juga ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S2.1. Kirakan halaju putaran motor tersebut di dalam unit putaran per minit (rpm).An incremental encoder with optical disc shown in Figure S2.1 is used to measure the speed of rotation of a DC motor. The signal obtained from the encoder is also shown in Figure S2.1. Calculate the speed of rotation of the DC motor in revolutiion per minutes (rpm). [7 MARKAH/marfcs]

0.2 saat

Rajah S2.1: Cakera optik dan isyarat keluaran pengekod menokok Figure S2.1: Optical disc and output signal from an incremental encoder

c) Rajah S2.2 menunjukkan sebahagian dari pemacu motor arus terns jenis L298 di dalam konfigurasi tetimbang-H yang digunakan untuk kawalan dwihala motor menggunakan isyarat bermodulat lebar denyut (PWM).Figure S2.2 shows part of DC motor driver type L298 in the H-bridge configuration which is used for bidirectional motor control using pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal.

i) Pin manakah pada pemacu L298 ini yang perlu disambungkan kepada isyarat PWM ? [4 M A R KA HI marks \Which pin/pins on the L298 driver are required to be connected to the PWM signal ?

ii) Terangkan hubungan di antara halaju motor dengan lebar denyut isyarat PWM tersebut. [6 MARKAH/marto]Explain the relation between the speed of motor with the width of the PWM signal.

-5-

SEM4333

Inputs FunctionVen — H C = H;D = L Forward

XIIQ_JIIOReverse

o II o Fast Motor Stop

3 II r~ o II X o 11 X Free Running

Motor Stop

. = Low H = High X = Don't care

Rajah S2.2: Pemacu motor L298 Figure S2.2: L298 Motor Driver

-6-

SEM4333

S3.

a) Terangkan satu (1) faedah dan satu (1) keburukan menggunakan PC terbenam seperti PC 104 sebagai pengawal terbenam di dalam satu pencetak wama harga rendah. [4 MARKAH/marfcs] Explain one advantage and one disadvantage of using embedded PC such as PCI 04 as the embedded controller in a low cost color printer.

b) Satu penderia tekanan yang menghasilkan voltan keluaran berbanding dengan tekanan yang diukur mempunyai ciri seperti yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S3.1.A pressure sensor which produce output voltage with respect to the pressure measured has a characteristic as shown in Figure S3.1.

i) Cari julat dinamik bagi penderia tekanan ini. [4 MARKAH/marfcs]Find the dynamic range for this pressure sensor.

ii) Penderia ini akan digunakan untuk mengukur tekanan bagi julat 20 - 75 kPa. Dapatkan rangkap pindah penderia ini yang menghubung voltan keluaran (Volt) dengan tekanan (kPa) yang diukur menggunakan ciri biasa (TYP).This sensor will be use to measure pressure in the range of 20 - 75 kPa. Determine the transfer function for the sensor which relates the output voltage (Volts) and the measured pressure (kPa) using the typical characteristic (TYP).

[6 MARKAH/wifl^s]

ID ui a vu a o o w o uj o o wT - C M C M ( O C O T t ^ i i 3 i n 0 ( D s N o O O O O ) O > O O

Pressure (ref. to sealed vacuum) in kPa Rajah S3.1: Plot Ciri bagi satu penderia tekanan

Figure S3.1: Characteristic plot for a pressure sensor

CM

-7-

SEM4333

c) Satu penukar analog ke digital jenis 8 bit dengan julat masukan skala penuh 0-5 volt digunakan untuk membaca keluaran penderia tekanan yang dinyatakan di dalam bahagian b) di atas.An 8-bit analog-to-digital converter with full-scale input range of 0-5 volts is used to read the output of the pressure sensor described in part b) above.

i) Kirakan perubahan voltan minimum yang dapat dibaca oleh penukar analog ke digital ini.Calculate the minimum voltage change that can be read by the analog-to-digital converter. [3 M A RKA HI marks]

ii) Kirakan perubahan tekanan (kPa) minimum yang dapat dibaca oleh penukar analog ke digital ini jika keluaran penderia tekanan itu disambungkan secara langsung kepada penukar analog ke digital.Calculate also the minimum pressure change that can be read by the analog-to- digital converter if the sensor output is directly connected to the analog-to-digital converter. [3 MAR KA HI marks \

iii) Rekakan satu litar penyesuai isyarat yang sesuai untuk membolehkan penukar analog ke digital ini dapat membaca tekanan bagi julat 20 - 65 kPa dengan skala penuh 0 - 5 V.Design a suitable signal conditioning circuit such that the analog-to-digital converter can read the pressure for the range of 20 - 65 kPa with full-scale input ofO-5V. [5 MARKAH/ma/Tu]

SEM4333

S4.

Sudut pergerakan satu lengan robot boleh dimodelkan oleh rangkap pindah berikut, di mana 6 ialah sudut pergerakan lengan dan V ialah voltan masukan kepada motor yang mengawal lengan tersebut:The angle of movement for an arm robot can be modelled by the following transfer

functiion, where 6 is the angle of arm movement and V is the input voltage to the motor that controller the arm.

pKS) V(s) s(s2 +13s + 40)

a) Rekakan satu pengawal terbitan berkadaran bagi mengawal sudut pergerakan robot tersebut yang memenuhi prestasi berikut: peratus lajakan PO < 5%, dan tiada ralat keadaan mantap. Gunakan kaedah londar punca. Tunjukkan langkah rekabentuk anda dengan jelas. Rangkap pindah bagi pengawal terbitan berkadaran adalah seperti berikut:Design a proportional derivative controller for controlling the angle of movement for the arm robot which satisfies the following performance: percentage overshoot PO < 5%, and no steady-state error. Use the root locus method. Show your design steps clearly. The transfer function for the proportional derivative controller is:

[14 MARKAH/warfa]Gc(s) = Kc(l + Tds)

b) Jika pengawal terbitan berkadaran di dalam bahagian a) di atas hendak dijadikan pengawal digital secara perisian dengan tempoh persampelan T = 10 milisaat, dapatkan persamaan pembeza yang memberikan algoritma pengawal digital tersebut. If the proportional derivative controller in part a) above is to be converted into a digital control software with a sampling period of T = 10 miliseconds, determine the diiference equation that gives the algorithm for the digital controller.

[11 M A RK AH/mflrAv]

-9-

SEM4333

S5.

Satu sistem elektromekanik menghasilkan keluaran seperti yang ditunjukkan oleh Rajah S5 apabila diberikan satu masukan langkah (Am = 0.8volt) di dalam keadaan gelung terbuka. Satu pengawal kamiran berkadaran (PI) perlu direka bagi sistem elektromekanik ini. Rangkap pindah bagi pengawal PI diberikan oleh:An open-loop electromechanical system produced output as shown in Figure S5 when given a step input (Au = 0.6 volts). A proportional integral controller (PI) is to be designed for this electromechanical system. The Transfer function for PI controller is given by:

Gc(s) = Kc( 1+-L)Tts

Di mana Kc,Ti adalah parameter pengawal PI yang perlu dicari bagi sistem elektromekanik ini.Where Kc,Ti are PI controller parameters to be determined for this electromechanical system.

Rajah S5: Sambutan masa sistem elektromekanik dengan masukan langkah Figure S5: Time response of the electromechanical system with step input

-11-

SEM4333

Lampiran 1: Ukuran Prestasi Sistem Terkawal Attachment 1: Controlled System Performance Measures

Bagi sistem terkawal dengan sambutan masa sistem tertib kedua:For a controlled system with second order time-response:

G ) „C ( s ) _ ______________R ( s ) s2 + 2ga>ns + co2

Masa Menaik (Rise Time): Tr1.8

bagi 0.5 < £< 0.7

Masa Puncak (Peak Time)'. T = n

CD

Masa Mengenap (Settling Time): Ts

steady state error) 2%

bagi ralat keadaan mantap (for

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0c

Hubungan peratus lajakan (PO) dengan nisbah redaman g The relation between percentage overshoot (PO) with damping ratio C

Lampiran 2: Rumus Penalaan Pengawal PI Attachment 2: PI Controller Tuning Formula

K.Model Process: Gn (s) =-------- —

P v + 1Pengawal: Gc(s) = Kc (1 + ~)

TlS

2.5rPI: Kc=----------------------- p-

KP

II

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 3223

MICROPROCESSOR

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. HARUN BIN ISMAIL DR. IZZELDIN IBRAHIM MOHAMED

ABDELAZIZMR. KAMAL BIN KHALIL

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEE / SEL / SEM / SET / SWB

01-02/10

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

08 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE THERE ARE 2 SECTIONS IN THIS SCRIPT: SECTION A (COMPRISING OF QUESTION 1,2 AND 3) AND SECTION B (COMPRISING OF QUESTION 4, 5, AND 6).ANSWER ONLY TWO (2) QUESTIONS FROM EACH SECTION (A TOTAL OF FOUR QUESTIONS).CANDIDATES ARE ALLOWED TO BRING INTO THE EXAM HALL THE FOLLOWING HARDCOPY:THE MC68000 16-/32 BIT MICROPROCESSOR PROGRAMMING REFERENCE CARD.


-2-SEE 3223

QUESTION 1 (SECTION A)

u.

in.

IV.

VI.

Vll.

Would you agree the terms ‘CPU’, ‘Processor’ and ‘Microprocessor’ in modem terms refer to the same entity?

Yes No

(1 marks)Please indicate below, would you use a microprocessor or a microntroller in each of the application below?

PDAHome Appliance

(2 marks)

In 68000, what does programmer’s model refer to? Please tick in appropriate box.

1. The complete instruction set2. The 68k internal resources available

for programming3. The external resources

(3 marks)

The important thing that makes programming powerful and interesting is the ability to provide decision making and branching. Name three instructions that provide the in the 68K instruction set that provide the capabilities?

(2 marks)

v. Name the programming language for 68000 that is taught in class?

(2 marks)

What is required in order to convert the source code into the object code or machine code?

(2 marks)

Label the signals that are used in memory control logic shown in Figure Q1 (a)

—0°—R/W*

UDSh

>LOWR*

(3 marks)Figure Q1 (a)

-3-SEE 3223

Vlll.

IX.

Indicate in the Figure Q1 (b) below how you would divide the 68000 addressable memory spaces into 8 equally sized blocks.

74138

Figure Q1 (b)

State the type of address decoding technique used in question (viii) above.

(4 marks)

(2 marks)

x. What is the size of each block of memory defined in question (viii) above.

(2 marks)xi. Whenever a subroutine is used, an area in memory is allocated. Name the area

allocated and in what device it is implemented?

(2 marks)

-4-SEE 3223

The content of some registers and memory locations are shown in Figure Q2. Preceding execution of instruction has effect on subsequent execution of instruction. Write down your answers in the spaces provided. Remove these pages and insert in your Answer Book.


RegisterD5 0000 3000D6 0000 0004D7 9999 7777AO 0000 3000A1 0000 3002A2 0000 3004A7(SP) 00FF FFFE

Memory MemoryAddress Contents Address Contents$003000 1234 00FF FFF0 1122$003002 5678 00FF FFF2 5566$003004 9101 00FF FFF4 3245$003006 1213 00FF FFF6 6798$003008 1415 00FF FFF8 ABCD$00300A ABCD OOFF FFFA DEED$00300C 1B1C OOFF FFFC 7532$00300E EF10 OOFF FFFE 9367$003010 AABB 0100 0000 4465

Figure Q2

a. Determine the content of the registers indicated below.

(4 marks)MOVE.L ( S P ) + , D 7

D7A7

b. Determine the content of memory location affected following the execution of the instruction below.

(6 marks)MOVEM.W D5-D7/A0-A2, -(SP)

Address Contents

-5-SEE 3223

c. What is the content of registers after the execution of the instruction below(6 marks)

MOVE .L (SP)+, D0-D1/A3

Registers ContentsDODIA3A7

d. The following instructions are executed in sequence, determine the corresponding affected registers?

___________ (5 marks)SWAP DO DOEXG D1,D5 D5EOR D0,D7 D7NEG D7 D7NOT D5 D5

e. Determine the content of the destination after the execution of each of the following instruction and also the addressing mode of the source operand.

(4 marks)

Content of Destination

Addressing Mode of Source

MOVE.W (A2),D0MOVE.B 1(A1),D5MOVE.W 2(A2,D6.W),D7MOVE.W -(SP),D6

-6-SEE 3223

a. Trace the execution of each of the instruction in the program below, and answer the questions that follow. (10 marks)


ORG $400START LEA FIRST,A0

LEA DEST+(LEN*2),A1MOVE.W #LEN,DO

ULANG MOVE.W (A0) +, -(A1)SUB. W #1, DOBNE ULANGBRA ★ORG $1000

FIRST DC. W 100,200,300,400,500,600LEN EQU (*—FRIST)/2DEST DS.W LEN

END START

i) What is the address of the label START?ii) State the address of the label FIRST

iii) What is the value of LEN transferred to DO?

iv) What is the content of DO at the end of the program execution?

v) Determine the address and the content of the location DEST when the program terminates.

0000100C p

b. Given the assembly listing below, trace the following program by filling theaccompanying Table Q3. Write your answer in the boxes provided so remove these pages and insert in your Answer Book. Assume initial content of all registers are zero, the SP = $01000000 and [SP] = FF FF FF FF.

(10 marks)00001000 1 START ORG $100000001000 43F9 00003000 2 LEA DATA.A100001006 45F9 00003008 3 LEA ANS,A20000100C 3229 0002 4 MOVE.W 2(A1),D100001010 3F01 5 MOVE.W D1,-(SP)00001012 4EB9 00001020 6 JSR FIRST00001018 3480 7 MOVE.W D1,(A2)0000101A 103C0009 8 MOVE.B #9,DO0000101E 4E4F 9 TRAP #15 I00001020 1000001020 302F0004 11 FIRST MOVE.W 4(SP),D100001024 COCO 12 MULU D1.D100001026 4E75 13 RTS00001028 1400003000 15 ORG $300000003000= 000A 0014 001E 0028 16 DATA DC.W 10,20,30,4000003008 17 ANS DS.L 10000300C 19 END START

7-SEE 3223

TraceNo.

PC before Execution

Next Instruction PC after Execution

A1 A2 DI SP [SP]

Initial condition 00000000 00000000 00000000 01000000 FFFFFFFF1 00001000 lea data ,a l 00001006 00003000 00000000 00000000 01000000 FFFFFFFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Table Q3

(Remove this page and insert in your Answer book).

-8-SEE 3223

c. A 64 bit value can be created by concatenating two 32 bit register pairS such as D1:D0. Show by writing a short program code, how this 64 bit value can be divided by the value 4. (Note: Unsigned number is assumed)

(5 marks)

-9-SEE 3223

a. i) To initiate system initialization (system reset) for a 68000 system, two linesmust be held low for specified period of time. What are they?

(1 mark)

ii) What is the minimum period of time specified in question i) ?(1 mark)

iii) What is the signal used to notify the 68000 when there is a problem with the current bus cycle?

(1 mark)

iv) The HALT* line is bidirectional. If the line is driven by an external device to its active state, what will happen to the 68000?

(1 mark)

v) If the HALT* line is activated prior to the BERR* becoming activated, what will be the action taken by 68000?

(1 mark)

vi) If the HALT* line is not activated prior to the BERR* becoming activated, what will be the action taken by 68000?

(1 mark)

vii) If, during a normal bus cycle, the VPA* input is activated, what does this indicate to the 68000?

(1 mark)

viii) Determine the state of the asynchronous bus signal when the following instruction is executed:

(1 mark)ADD.B DO,$2003

b. Given the memory map of a certain 68000 microprocessor system (figure Q4),determine the boundary addresses and the size of device space as required below.

(7 marks)000000

QUESTION 4 (SECTION B)

Figure Q4

Device A

Device B

0FFFFF

13FFFF

AFFFFF1 x 8 bit switch 2 x 8 bit leds

- 1 0 -SEE 3223

i) State the type of device used for device A.

ii) State the chip number and the number of chips required to implement device A space.

iii) What is the starting address for device B?

iv) State the type of device used to implement device B.

v) State the chip number and the number of chips required to implement device B space.

vi) What is the starting address of the I/O devices space?

vii)If the I/O devices are placed at odd addresses and each I/O device only requires 1 address, what is the end address of the I/O devices space?

c. Given the following program code, trace the code and show the bus activity for instructions at line 2 to line 7, by filling Table Q4 given below. Bus activity for bus cycles 1 and 2 are given.

(10 marks)

00001000 1 START ORG $100000001000 41F9 00002000 2 LEA DATA,A000001006 43F9 0000200C 3 LEA TARGET,Al0000100C 3328 0002 4 MOVE.W 2 (A0 ) , -(A1)00001010 3011 5 MOVE.W (Al),DO00001012 D159 6 ADD. W DO, (Al) +00001014 30E1 7 MOVE.W -(Al), (A0) +00001016 103C 0009 8 MOVE.B #9,DO0000101A 4E4F 9 TRAP #1500002000 10 org $200000002000= 000A 0014 0028 0032 11 DATA DC.W 10,20,40,5000002008 =00000004 12 LEN EQU (*-DATA)/200002008 =0000200C 13 TARGET EQU * + LEN00002008 14 END START

- 1 1 -SEE 3223

Bus cyc le 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

a[23:0] 00001000

00001002

d[15:8] 41 00

d[7:0 ] F9 00

LDS* 'L' 'L '

UDS* 'L' 'L '

R/W* 'H' 'H'

Bus cyc le 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

a[23:0]

d[15:8]

d[7:0 ]

LDS*

UDS*

R/W*

Table Q4

- 1 2 -SEE 3223

Suppose an MC68000 program contains the instruction TRAP#3. And suppose that after assembly this instruction is located at memory address $044000. Just prior to execution of this instruction

[SSP] = $00016030 [SR] = $0504

a. Execution of the TRAP #3 instruction causes the processor to jump to an exception service routine. At what address does the processor find the address of the exception service routine?

(3 marks)

b. Was the processor in supervisor mode or user mode before the exception occurred?

(2 marks)

c. Execution of the TRAP instruction causes a context save that is the same as the context save for hardware interrupts. Complete the following table of the supervisor stack following the context save, but before the beginning of the exception service routine. Indicate which address SSP points to. Note that each location corresponds to a word whose value you should indicates in hexadecimal notation. If the content of a certain location cannot be determined from the given information, indicate this using "XXXX"


Address Contents$16028$1602A$1602C$1602E$16030$16032$16034$16036$16038

(10 marks)

d. At what address will the processor resume operation after RTE instruction of the exception service routine?

(2 marks)

e. Suppose the next instruction to be executed after the exception service routine complete is BLT instruction. Will the branch be taken?

(2 marks)

- 1 3 -SEE 3223

What levels of hardware interrupt could cause the TRAP #3 exception service routine to be interrupted, given the above conditions? Note that the execution of the TRAP instruction has no effect on the interrupt mask.

(3 marks)

Assume that a vectored device supplies vector number $44 to the 68000 processor during an interrupt acknowledge cycle. At what address does the processor find the address of the ISR?

(3 marks)

- 1 4 -SEE 3223


A dot matrix display can be constructed using conventional LEDs driven by 74LS374 latches to a 5x7 character pixel. A column of the pixel consists of 7 LEDs and can be driven by one 74LA374 latch. A column pattern can be enabled by writing to the address of the latch location. Thus a 5x7 led display will be driven by 5 latches at different address locations (consecutive). A panel of 3 5x7 display will be driven by 15 latches. Taking the base address of the panel display as $B00000 and using partial address decoding, suggest an address decoding circuit for the intended display.

(14 marks)< 5 ►

oooo ®ooo®OOOO 90009

Ll

oooo ®ooo® oooo #ooo® oooo o« .L15

Figure Q6.

b. In order to display a certain text or message, the appropriate column pattern for the intended text or message has to be defined prior to the actual display. For the word in Figure Q6 above, create the definition for the column patterns for each of the letter in the word FUN, using the DC.B directive.

(4 marks)

For the definition created in part (b). above, write the appropriate program code to display the word to the respective dot matrix display using the address decoder designed in part (a), above.

(7 marks)

Appendix

- 1 5 -SEE 3223

Oetal Transparent Latch with 3-State Outputs;Octal D-iype Flip-Flop with 3-State Output

The 5N74LS373 cctBlJts of flight laitfces wllh 3-stats outputs Esr tus oigsntad system application!. Th? ll^s-Ekps appear transpircnl 1d the da? (data dangss asj^dtnnouily) whan Latch Enabtii |LET| Is HIGH. Wbsn LE Is LOW, tha data Chit: mat! tho srtip times Is latdisd. Data appears ca tte bus wtno tbs Output Enable (OE) Is LOW. WhonQElsHrCKthtbus Duljiut tsln tha high Impedirce state.

Tha SK7JLS74 Is ab(gtv5p«ri,low-pnvtiirOctalD-tjpe Fllp-Fiip fm Hiring xaparate D-typs Iqiils fbc tath flip-flop and 3-stain outputs for bus ottanlsd application. A buffered Oocfc (CP) ail Output: Enable (OE) Js common In all flJp-Baps. Tha SN71LS&74 Is manu&dutBd using advancad l^wFcmwSitoUkjrlichmbj}- arid Is cornpattbfc' wtlh all QN'JwmtixaduclwTTL Eimliias.

SN74LS373 SN74LS374

CONNECTION DIAGRAM S P (TOP VIEW)

SN?«LS373

*H 5i D; Ct 0| % ft fc 04 LE

LijljjljjljjljjljjljjljjljjLitjVE 0, D| D, 0, O j D j D j C > 3 C »

PIN MAKES D|-D[< CttblrfJfi UE LakhEiafete$teteHISH! bfil& cut(^stKnôx€^m\BiOi-O) OUpJs H0TC5:

TTL IHtlxti {U.L|*4©|iAH»U nftlOK.

SN74L5174

NOTE:

TtB Ftoipat wrWi hBtftasnafftwfe Mansion Btacpsiltt teMkvltaRacbcp.

% % Di ot o* c* Q| 0* cp

nsin»iriiinrimran7iri3inrirni

TiiEijiiiii^mEnrarLiCiis”H E O | D | O i D ) « % ^ I b l l j W

LQADWS [Haft 3gHIGH LOW

05IU. tUSULOSUL. D-&UL05 ILL R35ULasm. m\\LESUi. 1SU.L

TRUTH TA B LELS373 LS3T4

□n LE <5E On

H H I H

L H L L

X L L Qa

X X H r

Dn LE er Gh

H _r L H

L _i- L L

X X H 2*

H-MWH V-akaaprLirflri L*LCW VWa^LwwJ Xi iiMlwUI Z«l-tîh*F*4inDi"IMk Ctfiwterfl^tefi fftKtodbyttmKiiiaaltt»O»yut:CMfci»i>yut03^l.

- 1 6 -SEE 3223

TlWf HfiMSlX «HHSf-«iS!it SiM dspsfKfer'S <Siithe eonditktfii «t tha rtria binary Mtea 4npwti and tfw shrw «NW» (npMfc Tw* KttaMow *nd era *«t»Ns in*•Mi ntitm ft* «Mt *wr «xt«r«*1 3#1«s os Inwrtwl wJiW* topwling. A 24MIn» <teaotf*r e*n bt imgtenMttci without MWff** feftrtsrti tn$ * 32-»i<* dMOdftr ttQuittt «ftty *«* fevtntr. Aft ■WHfef* Input «« N laws at « a*?* ins;;? for <S*n'«mpl*Kii^ spalioniftm,

.■BLOCK DIAGRAM

■ Ri f t ARHANGEMEMT

^FUNCTION table

H;M»> le*«l, t i tow i*«ri. X; hwtews*“; (•?. * a C s n

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 3533

COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES

LECTURERS DR. DAVID IAN FORSYTH DR. MOHD HAIZAL BIN JAMALUDIN DR. NADIATULHUDA BT ZULKIFLI DR. NOORASMAWATI BT SAMSURI MR. ALIAS BT MOHD

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE

SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET / SEW

0 1 - 0 5

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011



2 SEE3533

(a) (i) With the aid of a diagram, briefly discuss how a communication system is

organized. (5 marks)

(ii) Define what noise is and state two effects of noise. (3 marks)

(b) Noise power can be modelled using Thevenin equivalent circuit. For an electronic

device operating at a temperature of 27°C with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a 100 Q

load resistance, determine:

(i) the thermal noise power in dBm. (2 marks)

(ii) tht signal-to-noise ratio (SNRde) if the signal voltage is 10 V. (3 marks)

(iii)the noise voltage if there are two additional resistors connected in series to the

existing one. Assume Ri = 50 Q and R2 = 75 Q. (2 marks)

(c) A three cascaded amplifier (A, B and C) for a radio receiver system is indicated in the

Figure 1.

ABC

Figure 1

(i) Determine the minimum power at the input of the receiver, S, operating at a T, =

150K, so that the SNR0 is not less than 30 dB. Assume the bandwidth is 10 MHz

and the environmental temperature is 290K.

(7 marks)

(ii) In order to minimize the effect of noise, a suitable configuration of the cascaded

system needs to be identified. In your opinion which one of these amplifiers

should be placed at the 1st stage and why?

(3 marks)

3SEE3533

(a) A modulating signal, Vm(t) of Figure 2 (a) with time period of Tm is transmitted from

Faculty of Electrical Engineering to Kolej Perdana using AM Double Side Band Full

Carrier (AM-DSBFC) technique. The signal carrier’s frequency is 1000 times greater

than the modulating signal’s frequency. If the carrier’s amplitude, Ec is equal to 20 V,

determine the followings:

(i) Equations of the modulating, carrier and modulated signals. (6 Marks)

(ii) Modulation index, m. (2 Marks)

(iii) Sketch the frequency spectrum of the modulated signal. (4 Marks)

Vm(t)

Figure 2 (a) Modulating signal

(b) A Single Sideband Suppressed Carrier (SSBSC) is an alternative to send the

information signal in Figure 2 (a).

Figure 2 (b)

(i) State the advantages of SSBSC compared to other AM techniques. (4 Marks)

(ii) From the generation circuit in Figure 2 (b), prove that only lower side band signal will be generated. (9 Marks)

4SEE3533

(a) A carrier voltage given by Vc(t) = 10 sin (2nl06t + n/2) is frequency modulated by a

signal with voltage given by Vm(t) = 2 cos (2nfmt) where fm is in the range between 50

to 200 Hz and sensitivity factor, Kf =0.05 KHz/V.

(i) Determine the modulation index and sketch the spectrum when fm is at the

minimum. Repeat for the situation when fm is at the maximum. (6 Marks)

(ii) Discuss the influence offm on FM bandwidth and spectrum. What is the minimum

required bandwidth? (5 Marks)

(b) Figure 3 shows an end-to-end frequency modulated communication system from

transmitter to the receiver.

(i) Draw a suitable block diagram to represent A that utilizes a crystal oscillator.

(5 Marks)

(ii) Discuss the impact if the mixer stage is removed from the system (3 Marks)

(iii) Sketch waveforms at points 1, 2 and 3 if input information is a monotone

sinusoidal signal. (6 Marks)

LocalOscillator

Vjt) A1 .......... ~ 1 Ji

Frequency |/v pYJ Frequency J Filler I 1

Multiplier, nj y S Multiplier, n2 ; (bpf)

Transmitter

! ddt

31 Envelc -e-Detector

Receiver

Figure 3 FM Transmission System

5SEE3533

(a) Describe all three main processes in an analog to digital (A/D) conversion. (3 Marks)

(b) An analog signal contains an information signal, Vm (t) is a perfect sinusoidal signal

with a time period, T- 30s and peak-to-peak voltage of 40 V. Within this time period,

the signal is then multiplied with a pulse signal Vd(t) in order to get the sampled signal

of Pulse Amplitude Modulation(VpAM)-

(i) Assuming the pulse width, of Is, sampling time period, êquals to 5s, amplitude

of 20 V and the first pulse starts at t = 2s, sketch the Vm(t), Vd(t) and VPAM(t) signals

in time domain.

(6 Marks)

(ii) Using the Vpam(0 graph, predict the amplitude for the first six samples.

(5 Marks)

(iii) Assuming the A/D converter uses 3 bits-PCM. Calculate:

a. Quantization level, L (1 Mark)

b. Quantization interval, AV (1 Mark)

c. Based on the graph plotted in b(i), predict the quantization value for each

sample. (4 Marks)

d. From the calculation, prove that the sampling process follows the Nyquist

sampling theorem (2 Marks)

(c) Sketch the output signal of the code “110101” using

(i) NRZ-L (1 Mark)

(ii) RZ unipolar (1 Mark)

(iii) RZ-AMI (1 Mark)

6SEE3533

(a) A binary data stream of bit period of 1 |is is to be transmitted on a radio link at fixed

frequency of 5 MHz using PSK modulation method.

(i) Sketch waveforms of the data stream and modulated signal at the original carrier

frequency for a bit stream of 101010. (4 Marks)

(ii) Discuss the suitability of ASK and FSK to replace the PSK in the above system if

the requirement of carrier’s frequency does not change. (4 Marks)

(iii) Briefly compare noise and bandwidth performances of ASK, FSK and PSK.

(4 Marks)

(b) Figure 5 shows a communication system that deploys multiplexing techniques. The

central office accepts traffic from four edge nodes where each node is assigned a

unique frequency and connected to 100 Basic Units (BU).

(i) State the multiplexing techniques involved in the system. (2 Marks)

(ii) Determine the transmission rate of links 1, 2 and 3. (9 Marks)

(iii) Label the time slots of frames originating from link 1. (2 Marks)

Vm,,fma>=4 KHz

Vm2Jmm=4 KHz

Vm3,fmax=8 KHz

Information 1

Information 31

Information 1 to 31: 16 Kb/s each/ \

J ^Link 3 Central

> ExchangeV /

Figure 5 Communication System utilizing Multiplexing

APPENDICES

A) Boltzman’s Constant = 1.38 x 10'23 J!K

B) Trigonometry Identities

7SEE3533

oucos(/?sin<un/) = J o { P ) + '251Ji>>(P)cos2n(0»t

/7=1

sin(^ sin coj) = 2]T J2n+] (/?)sin(2« +1 )coj

sin2 x + cos2 x = 1

cos2 x - s i n 2 x = cos2x

cos2 x = ~(l + cos2x)

sin2 x = -^-(l -cos2x)

sin(x ± y) = sin x cos y ± cos x sin y

cos(x ±y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y

sin x sin y = [cos(x - y) - cos(x + y)\

cos x cos y = ~ [cos(x - y) + cos(x + _y)]

sin x cos y = ~ [sin(x - y) + sin(x + _y)]

C) BESSEL TABLE

8SEE3533

Modulation index

P @ mf

Coefficient

Jo

Sidebands(Jalursisi) - J„

r1 2nd -> id J 4 th 5‘" 6 l" ■y 1 Ii

8 lh gill

0.25 0.98 0.12

0.5 0.94 0.24 0.03

1.0 0.77 0.44 0 . 1 1 0.02

1.5 0.51 0.56 0.23 0.06 0.01

2.0 0.22 0.58 0.35 0.13 0.03

2.4 0 0.52 0.43 0.20 0.06

3.0 -0.26 0.34 0.49 0.31 0.13 0.04 0.01

4.0 -0.40 -0.07 0.36 0.43 0.28 0.13 0.05 0.02

5.0 -0.18 -0.33 0.05 0.36 0.39 0.26 0.13 0.05 0.02

6.0 0.15 -0.28 -0.24 0.11 0.36 0.36 0.25 0.13 0.06 0.02

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEM 4153

ROBOT TECHNOLOGY FOR AUTOMATION

LECTURERS PROF. DR. SHAMSUDIN BIN MOHD AMIN

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEM

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE : ANSWER ANY FOUR (4) QUESTIONS.


QUESTION 1

2SEM 4153

Figure Ql(a) shows a two-robot work cell for assembling fire extinguishers. The work cell

consists of 4 welding machines, input and output gravity actuated part feeders, complete with a

press and marriage station (as shown in Figure Ql(b)).

The fire extinguisher is assembled comprising of 4 parts namely neck, upper tank, lower tank

and skirt as illustrated in Figure Ql(c).

The robots used in the assembly task are 6 degree-of-freedom revolute robots as shown in

Figure Ql(d). Taking the robot base as the reference point (0, 0, 0), the necks of 1 pound

weight each, are located at (0.5, 2, 1), the upper tanks weighing 4.5 pounds each, at (2.5, 2, 1)

and Sub Assembly 1 at (2, 0, 2). All dimensions in feet. The robot speeds are as follow:

Straightline motion without load = 4 feet/sec

Straightline motion with load = 2 feet/sec

Jogging motion without load = 10 feet/sec

Jogging motion with load = 7 feet/sec

(a) Sub Assembly 1 is for assembling of the upper part of the fire extinguisher, carried

out at Station 1. Describe the detailed step by step activities of the robot (for RTM

computation). (6 marks)

(b) By using the RTM method, compute the cycle time to assembly the upper part of the

fire extinguish. Table Ql shows selected RTM symbols and value. (14 marks)

(c) What would you recommend to reduce the cycle time by 30 percent ?

(5 marks)

3SEM 4153

Table Ql: Selected RTM Symbols and Values

Element Symbol Element time, s Parameters

1 R1 S / V + 0.40 forS>K/2.5

0.40 for S'<F/2.5

S = distance moved (ft)V = velocity (ft/sec)This is used for short moves

2 Ml For payloads of less than 1.0 lb S/F+0.40 for 5 >K/2.5 S = distance moved (ft)

V = velocity (ft/sec)0.40 for S < V ! 2.5 This is used for short moves

For payloads S I V + 0.60 f o r S > V / 2.5

0.60 for S < V ! 2.5

of between 1 and 5.0 lb S = distance moved (ft)V = velocity (ft/sec)This is used for short moves

For payloads S / V + 0.90 for5>F/2.5

0.90 for 5 < K / 2 . 5

of between 5 and 15 lb S = distance moved (ft)V = velocity (ft/sec)This is used for short moves

4.1 SE1 0.1K V = previous velocity (fit/sec)

7.1 GR1 0.1 Assumed to be independent of any parameters

8 RE 0.1 Assumed to be independent of any parameters

9 T T T = robot delay time

10 D D D = process delay time

QUESTION 2

4SEM 4153

(a) What are the five main benefits of using robotic spray painting as compared to a manual

process?

(5 marks)

(b) Explain the advantages of using the inverter based welding power supply as compared to

the one using silicon-controlled-rectifier, in a welding process?

(5 marks)

(c) A two-storey robotic arc welding work cell comprising of eight industrial robots is used

to weld car bodies as illustrated in Figure Q2. You are required to describe the

appropriate robotic arc welding system for this work cell in terms of:

i. Suitable features of the arc welding robots

ii. The technology of appropriate arc welding process (please provide the schematic

diagram of the arc welding set-up)

iii. The factors that affect the control of the welding quality.

(9 marks)

(d) You are required to set-up the implementation of synchronized motion between robot arc

welding gun and a two-axis robot-positioner unit for a robotic arc welding application.

Detail out the controller unit used, and the way synchronization will be carried out. You

may additionally illustrate it with a flow chart with appropriate explanation.

(6 marks)

QUESTION 3

5SEM 4153

(a) Discuss the comparative advantages and disadvantages of the different technologies for

vehicle guidance in automated guided vehicles (AGV).

(9 marks)

(b) The Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS) includes load station 1 where raw parts

enter the system for delivery to any of three production stations 2, 3 and 4. Unload station

5 receives finished parts from the production stations. Load and unload times at stations 1

and 5 are each 1.5 min. Productions rates for each workstation are indicated by the

delivery requirements in Table Q3. A complicating factor is that some parts must be

transshipped between stations 3 and 4. Vehicles move in the direction indicated by the

arrows in Figure Q3.

(i) Determine the average delivery distance, Lj.

(4 marks)

(ii) If the vehicles operate according to the following scheduling rule to minimise the

distances the vehicles travel empty: Vehicles delivering raw work parts from

station 1 to stations 2, 3 and 4 must pick up finished parts at these respective

stations for delivery to station 5. Determine the empty travel distances associated

with each delivery and develop a From-to Chart.

(8 marks)

(iii) Suppose the AGVs travel at a speed of 40m/min, and the traffic factor = 0.90,

delivery distance = 103.8m, (a) determine the value of Le for the layout based on

your table, (b) how many automated guided vehicles will be required to operate

the system? Assume availability A = 100% and efficiency E = 1.0.

(4 marks)

6SEM 4153

Table Q3: From-To Chart showing flow rates,

load/hr (value before the slash mark) and travel distances, m

(value after the slash mark) between stations in a layout

To 1 2 3 4 5From 1 0 10/X 8/Y 5/Z 0

2 0 0 0 0 9/A3 0 0 0 0 4/B4 0 0 0 0 7/C5 0 0 0 0 0

7SEM 4153

QUESTION 4

A robotized work cell used to assemble name initial cards is shown in Figure Q4. An AGV

equipped with two-level conveyors is used to retrieve parts to be assembled, from an

Automated Storage and Retrieval System (ASRS) and transports to the robotic assembly

station.

(a) With the aid of sketches, compare the relative advantages of the different lighting

techniques in a robotic vision system.

(6 marks)

(b) For the set-up in Figure Q4, propose an appropriate vision set-up for inspection of the ID

cards.

(5 marks)

(c) Describe the controller architecture for the various cells consisting of SCARA robot for

assembly, Cartesian robot for automated screwing, an automated product inspection by

machine vision, and the multiple-flow conveyor.

(8 marks)

(d) Design the overall hierarchical levels of management of information flow for the set-up,

specifying the specific functions of each level. Please provide details of the type of

equipment involved if you were to implement the design.

(6 marks)

8SEM 4153

(a) An interlock gate is used to provide safety guard for a robot system with a turn-off time of

4.5 seconds. The gate, with a height of six-foot-high requires an approach speed of 2500 mm

per second and an additional distance of 0.6 meters is needed. Determine the minimum

distance from the interlocked gate to the closest part of the robot work envelope.

[3 marks]

(b) A robot in a work cell has to be replaced. The work cell has the added distance for the safety

system is set at 1.5 feet, and a standard mechanical interlocked gate that is 3.5 feet from the

closest edge of the robot work envelope. Determine the minimum stopping time for the new

robot for the current guard conditions (assume K=8.2 ft/s for worst case situation).

[5 marks]

(c) A robot work cell deploys a guard device in the form of a proximity laser scanner (PLS).

The articulated robot arm has a maximum work envelope, including the gripper, of 8.5 feet,

and the response time of the robot system is 2.5 seconds. Determine the safety zone radius

required for the system with a 50 percent safety factor. Use the PLS sensitivity in Figure Q5

(below) to determine the value for C, the additional distance. Also calculate the early

warning zone radius so that a minimum warning of 2.5 seconds would be provided before

the safety zone is entered.

[11 marks].

(d) The robot selected as the replacement in the previous problem cannot meet the maximum

stopping-time specifications. Describe two other design options, including hardware

specification, which would not require relocating the guard fence and gate.

QUESTION 5

[6 marks]

9SEM 4153

Figure Ql(a): Two Robot Fire Extinguisher Assembly Work Cell

Safety fence

Upper tank conveyor

□Neck

Skirt

□Lower tank conveyor

Sub Assembly 1 2

W1STATION 11

Circumferential weld 1 2

□Preweld assembly

f STATION 21

Robot Controller 1

□TT

u

f -r-Tl

~

□

€rSTATION 31

Outpu conveyi >r

Robot ------Controller 2

10SEM 4153

Figure Ql(b): Layout from the rear entry perspective

Upperpart

Lowerpan

Neck

Upper tank

Lower tank

Skirt

Figure Ql(c): Part of Fire Extinguisher

Figure Ql(d): Yaskawa Motoman K30 Revolute Robot

11SEM 4153

Figure Q2: An arc welding work cell for car body assembly, showing a four robot arrangement

12SEM 4153

3Proc A lit.

AGV <d-J>

ProcAut

-+H-40

30

10

Direction I ofVehiclemovement

1°<------ pU-

AGV Guide Path

40

ProcAut

V 1

25

40

f10

t"

Unld Load_▼

Man 1 Man

35

Figure Q3: AGVS Layout for production systemKey: Proc = processing operation

Aut = automated Unld = unload Man = manual operation Dimensions in meters (m)

Figure Q4: A Computer Integrated Manufacturing Robotic Cell

14SEM 4153

Scanning range Safety zone radius Early warning zone radius

Surveyed area radius

4 m (13 ft) 15 m (48 ft)

50 m (164 ft)

Object sensitivity 70 mm (2.75 in.) at 4 m scanning range (variable at closer range)

Response time Less or equal to 80 mm safety zone. Less or equal to 40 mm safety zone

Safety category Single component failure detectability; EN 954, Category 3

Figure Q5: PLS specifications

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEE 3243 / SEE 4243

COURSE NAME DIGITAL SYSTEMS

LECTURERS DR. MUHAMMAD NASIR BIN IBRAHIM

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEM / SEW

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

11 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN PART A. ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS IN PART B.


-2-SEE 3243/SEE 4243

PART A

Ql. (25 MARKS)(a) A K-map for a function F is shown in Figure 1(a)

1 1 0 0

1 1 T 1

E 0 E I

E 0 0 0

Figure 1(a)

(i) Obtain a minimum SOP expression for the function F [5 marks](ii) Realize the equation using a 16:1 MUX with E as entered variable

[5 marks](b) A K-map for a function G is shown in Figure 1(b)

0 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

1 1 i 1

0 0 0 0

Figure 1(b)

(i) Obtain a minimum POS expression for the function G [5 marks](ii) Realize the equation using a 4 to 16 decoder and other basic gate

[5 marks]

(c) Transform the circuit in Figure 1(c) into an equivalent circuit using NAND gates only.[5 marks]

Q2. (25 MARKS)(a) A and B are two 4-bit 2's complement numbers. Design a comparator circuit which has

two outputs, G and L, where the output G = 1. L = 0 if A > B, G = 0, L = 1 if A < B, and G =0, L =0 if A = B. The output G =1, L = 1 should never occur. Use bit slice technique.

(i) Draw in detail a block diagram which shows how the bit slices are connected to produce the output as specified. Label the inputs and outputs of the bit-slice. All bit slices must be the same. [10 marks]

(ii) Produce a complete truth table for the bit-slice [6 marks]

(b) The 74163 1C, shown in Figure Q2 is a standard binary counter. Design a circuit based on 74163 1C to produce a counter which counts according to this sequence:

3, 4, 5, 6,7, 8, 9, 10, 3, 4, 5,.... etc.[9 marks]

- 3 -SEE 3243 / SEE 4243

74x163

— >ctx

—0 OR--- 0 LD— EMP— EOT---- A Qa---- 8 Qfi___ C QC

DRCO -----

Figure Q2

PART B

-4-SEE 3243 / SEE 4243

Q3. (25 MARKS)(a) Answer the following questions:

(i) Draw the block diagram of a Moore machine. [2 marks](ii) Draw the block diagram of a Mealy machine. [2 marks](iii) Draw the excitation table for J-K Flip flop, D-Flip flop and T flip-flop.

[6 marks]

(b) Given the following state diagram (Figure Q3):

Figure Q3

(i) Determine whether it is a Moore or Mealy machine. [2 marks](ii) Determine the state table. [5 marks](iii) Determine Boolean Expression of the Next State logic circuit using D Flip-flop.

Also, determine Boolean expression of the output.[8 marks]

♦

-5-SEE 3243/SEE 4243

Q4. (25 MARKS)

Design the FSM of a Mealy machine for a clocked synchronous sequential circuit having a single input x and a single output z such z=l if and only if the current input and the previous three inputs correspond to either of the sequences 0110 or 1001. The 1 output is to occur at the time of the fourth input of the recognized sequence. Outputs of 0 are to be produced at all other times. The sequences are allowed to overlap, thus the circuit is not required to reset upon the occurrence of the fourth input.

The circuit is to be implemented using JK flip-flops with the following state assignments: 8=111, b=110, c=010, d=101, e=001, f=011 and g=100. The state of the input x, the output z and the circuit state should be indicated using LEDs and a master reset R should be used to reset the flip=flops to the initial state 'a'.

(a) Draw the state machine. [12 marks]

b) Draw the state table. [13 marks]

Figure Q5 shows a sequential circuit based on JK flip-flop.

clock

-6-SEE 3243/SEE 4243

Q5. (25 MARKS)

"D30—

J1 Ql>

Ki Ql

>2 q2>

k2

Figure Q5

The excitation equation for a JK flip-flop is:

Q+= JQ + KQ

(a) You are supposed to use formal method to get the state transition diagram of the circuit.

(i) Draw K-maps for each bit of next states, and the output[6 marks]

(ii) Draw the state transition diagram[7 marks]

(b) The circuit is to be re-designed by replacing the JK flip-flops with D flip-flops.(i) Get the equation for the D input of each flip-flop, as well as the output.

[6 marks]

(ii) Draw the complete circuit diagram.[6 marks]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEP 4003

COURSE NAME

LECTURERS

PHYSIOLOGY & INTRODUCTION TO MEDICINE

DR. ADEELA AROOJ

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

3 HOURS

30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE SECTION A : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS. SECTION B : CHOOSE & LABEL TWO (2) DIAGRAMS ONLY.SECTION C : ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2SEP 4003

1. Structure that can be observed with the naked eye is calledA. gross anatomyB. microscopic anatomyC. macroscopic anatomyD. cytology

2. Which type of feedback loop will result in a self-amplification response in the same direction, rather than leading to a corrective effect?

A. Negative feedback loopB. Positive feedback loopC. Homeostatic control mechanismsD. Equilibrium balancing loop

3. In eukaryotic cell, two structures that are surrounded by a double unit membrane areA. nucleus and ribosomeB. nucleus and mitochondriaC. nucleus and cytosolD. nucleus and smooth ER

4. Transitional epithelium can be found in theA. urinary systemB. respiratory systemC. digestive systemD. reproductive system

5. The integrative functions of the nervous system are performed mainly byA. afferent neuronsB. efferent neuronsC. neurogliaD. intemeurons

6. A myelinated nerve fiber can produce action potentials only in specialized regions calledA. nodes of RanvierB. intemodesC. synaptic knobsD. axon hillock

7. Some neurotransmitters can have either excitatory or inhibitory effects depending on the type of

A. receptors on the postsynaptic neuronB. synaptic vesicles in the axonC. synaptic potentiation that occursD. postsynaptic potentials on the synaptic knob

SECTION A (40 MARKS) (1 hour)

3SEP 4003

8. The parasympathetic nervous system affects all of these organs EXCEPTA. heartB. pupillary smooth musclesC. salivary glandsD. adrenal glands

9. The point at which an impulse is transmitted from one neuron to another neuron is calledA. dendriteB. glial cellC. synapseD. terminal plate

10. Which of the structure below is caudal to the hypothalamus?A. ThalamusB. Corpus callosumC. Cerebral aqueductD. Pituitary gland

11. The primary motor area of the cerebrum is the_________gyrus of the frontal lobeA. precentralB. centralC. postcentralD. acentral

12. Cerebrum can be divided into these lobes EXCEPTA. frontalB. distalC. occipitalD. insula

13. Serum is a blood plasma withoutA. sodium ionsB. calcium ionsC. clotting proteinsD. globulins

14. Production process of all blood formed elements is calledA. hemodialysisB. hemopoiesisC. hemoglobinD. erythropoiesis

15. Which of these is a granulocyte?A. MonocyteB. LymphocyteC. MacrophageD. Eosinophil

16. Which structure is related to the blood flow from the right atrium to the right ventricle?A. Pulmonary valveB. Tricuspid valveC. Bicuspid valveD. Aortic valve

17. The cardiac conduction system includes all of the following EXCEPTA. SA nodeB. AV nodeC. chordae tendineaeD. purkinje fibers

18. All statements are TRUE about muscle tissue EXCEPTA. I-band is more darker than A-bandB. Z-disc anchor the thin filaments and elastic filamentsC. sarcomere is a functional contractile unit of a muscle fiberD. tropomyosin blocks the active sites of G actins

19. When you are lifting a box, your muscles are in_______________contractionsA. isometric and concentricB. isometric and eccentricC. isotonic and concentricD. isotonic and eccentric

20. Choose the ONLY lymphatic organ which has both afferent and efferent lymphatic vessels.

A. SpleenB. Lymph nodeC. TonsilD. Thymus

21. Accessory structures of the skin DOES NOT includeA. epidermisB. nailC. hairD. exocrine glands

4SEP 4003

SEP 4003

22. The appendicular skeleton includesA. sternumB. skull bonesC. vertebraeD. femur

23. Angular movements areA. limb rotationB. head rotationC. including supination and pronationD. including flexion and extension

24. Given these parts of the small intestineI. Ileum

II. DuodenumIII. Jejunum

Choose the arrangement that lists the parts in the order food encounters them, as it passes from the stomach through the small intestine

A. I, II, IIIB. Ill, II, IC. II, I, IIID. II, III, I

25. Which of the following statement is INCORRECT about liver?A. It is the largest blood reservoir in bodyB. It has left lobe larger than the rightC. It regulates metabolism of carbohydrate, protein and lipidD. It contains Kupffer cells

26. Which one is NOT a part of gastric juice composition?A. MucusB. Hydrocloric acidC. Intrinsic factorD. Trypsinogen

27. Which of the photoreceptor cells is NOT correctly matched with its function?A. Rods - light sensitiveB. Cones - color visionC. Rods - clear imagesD. Cones - fast and sharp images

5

6SEP 4003

28. The fibrous tunic of the eye includes theA. scleraB. conjunctivaC. irisD. choroid

29. Which statement is FALSE regarding the ear physiology?A. Auditory ossicles act as levers to amplify movement and soundB. Membranous labyrinth contains endolymphC. Inner ear function is to maintain equilibriumD. Optic nerve is involved in hearing

30. A TRUE statement about taste buds isA. stimulate by tastantsB. can be found on larynxC. have highest threshold for bitter substancesD. can adapt in taste within 10 minutes

31. Based on the chemical structure, which one is NOT a protein hormone?A. Hormones of anterior pituitaryB. Hormones of pancreasC. Sex hormonesD. Hormones of hypothalamus

32. The plasma volume is approximatelyA. two third (2/3rd) of the total body waterB. one third (l/3rd) of the total body waterC. three fourth (3/4th) of total body waterD. one fourth (l/4th) of total body water

33. Which hormone is NOT correctly matched to its function?A. Oxytocin - milk ejectionB. Thyroid hormones - increase metabolic rateC. Aldosterone - maintains homeostasis by regulating Na+ & K+D. Insulin - increases blood sugar level

34. A TRUE statement about pituitary isA. lies above hypothalamus

B. anterior lobe (adenohypophysis) is attached to hypothalamus through nerve fibresC. secretes prolactin hormoneD. does not lie in hypophyseal fossa of sphenoid bone

7SEP 4003

35. Smaller cartilage of the larynx includesA. epiglottisB. arytenoidC. thyroid cartilageD. cricoid cartilage

36. Principal muscle for normal quiet breathing DOES NOT includeA. intercostal muscles.B. diaphragmC. muscles of abdomenD. elasticity recoil of the ribs and lungs

37. Which one is incorrectly matched regarding lung volumes and capacities?A. Ttidal volume - volume of air in one breath

B. Residual volume - amount of volume left after expiratory reserve is expelledC. Vital capacity - inspiratory capacity+ tidal volumeD. Total lung capacity - vital capacity + residual volume

38. Which of following is NOT a component of urinary system?A. UretersB. Urinary bladderC. UretheraD. Adrenal gland

39. TRUE statements about kidney areI. removal of waste products

II. osmosis regulationIII. acid base balance regulationIV. renin-angiotensin

A. IB. I, II & IIIC. I & IID. All of the above

40. Which is a FALSE statement regarding female reproductive system?A. Ovary is an internal genital organB. Fallopian tube is an external genital organC. Ovary secretes estrogen and progestogensD. Union of sperm and ova usually takes place in fallopian tube

SEP 4003

SECTION B (20 Marks) - Choose and label only 2 out of 4 diagrams

Question B1 (10 Marks) (30 minutes)

Figure B1

Question B2 (10 Marks)

10SEP 4003

Question B3 (10 Marks)

Figure B3

1.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6.----------------------------------

2 . 7.----------------

3 . 8 .----------------

4 . 9.----------------

5 . 10.--------------

11SEP 4003

Figure B4

1.------------------------------------------------------- --6.-

2 . -- 7. -

3 . -- 8. -

4 . ---9. -

5 . ---10.

12SEP 4003

SECTION C (40 Marks) - Answer only 4 out of 6 questions (1 hour 30 minutes)

Question Cl

a. The Human autonomic nervous system (ANS) can be divided into sympathetic and parasympathetic division. List 5 important points that differentiate both divisions.

[5 Marks]

b. Briefly explain the physiological mechanism of the visceral reflex arc in maintaining the blood pressure homeostasis.

[5 Marks]

Question C2

Figure Cl

a. Figure Cl shows the cardiac muscle action potentials process. Discuss and elaborate what happens during :

i. Aii. B

iii. Civ. Dv. E

[10 Marks]

13SEP 4003

Question C3

a. Some of the functions of muscular tissue are related to movement, stability, communication, control of body openings and passages, and also heat production. Discuss 5 important characteristics of muscle tissue which are related to the activities above.

[5 Marks]

b. Human muscle tissues can be divided into skeletal, smooth and cardiac muscle. List 5 parameters to distinguish between skeletal muscle tissues and smooth muscle tissues.

[5 Marks]

Question C4

a. Oogenesis and spermatogenesis are process of gamete formation in females and males respectively. List down the differences between these two processes?

[5 Marks]

b. Menstrual cycle comprises a series of changes occurring in the endometrium of the uterus. Briefly outline the phases of female menstrual cycle.

[5 Marks]

Question C5

a. Swallowing of food consists of three different phases. Briefly discuss these different phases of swallowing mechanism.

[10 Marks]

Question C6

a. Inner ear is responsible for sense of hearing and equilibrium. Describe briefly 2 main divisions of the inner ear (labyrinth).

[5 Marks]

b. Sound amplification is the function of the middle air. Enumerate different factors and structures involved in sound amplification.

[5 Marks]

9

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE : SEL 4283

COURSE NAME : ANALOG CMOS DESIGN

LECTURERS : PROF. DR. ABU KHARI BIN A’AIN

PROGRAMME : SEW

SECTION : 01

TIME : 3 HOURS

DATE : 25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE : PART A: ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.PART B: ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS ONLY.

PLEASE REFER TO PAGE 7 FOR POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE (Vdd) AND PROCESS PARAMETERS.


2SEL 4283

PART A

Ql.[18 marks]. Please refer to Figure 1 which shows an amplifier system. Assume all transistors are in saturation region. Do not ig tore body effect but the body effect transconductance, gmb can be ignored. Use Table 2 and solve the followings:

a) Calculate the size (W/L) of transistor Mi and transistor M3. [3 marks]b) Calculate the minimum size (W/L) of transistor M2. [5 marks]c) Calculate the mid band gain, Avoi (Vouti/Vjn) in dB. [2 marks]d) Calculate the pole location at Vouti- [2 marks]e) Calculate the mid band gain, Avo2 (V0ut2Aîn) in dB. [2 marks]f) Calculate the pole location at Vout2- [2 marks]g) From part c) to f) sketch the total frequency response of the system Avo in

dB vs. frequency. Clearly show the locations of the poles, and the fsdB frequency. [2 marks]

Vdd

Figure 1

SEL 42833

Vdd

Q2.[12]. Please refer to Figure 2. All transistors are in saturation region.

Ignore body effect. Given that Ci = 35 fF, C2 = 10 fF and C3=5 fF. Calculate

the followings:

a) The output resistance at node V„i. [2 marks]

b) The output resistance at node V02.. [2 marks]

c) The total capacitance at node Voi, taking Miller effect into

consideration [3 marks]

d) The total capacitance at node V02, taking Miller effect into

consideration. [3marks]

e) Estimate the f3dB frequency. [2 marks]

4SEL 4283

PART B

Table 1

Sml §m2 Rl Tdsl r<is23 mmho 400 (o.mho 200 Q 250 kQ 50 kQ

Figure 3a

Q3. [10] .Please refer to Figure 3 a and Table 1. Given that the effective transconductance of the circuit is Gm. Gm is eqm l to:

Gm =gm\

1 + gmlRL(1)

As a result of equation (1), the mid band voltage gain of circuit in Figure 3a is given as:

Vout/V jn Gmrout

Vjn (7\j\

VBP

(2)VDD

Figure 3 c

Apply the above concept and answer the following questions. In all cases, do not approximate your calculations.

Q3.a) Please refer to Figure 3b). Calculate the output resistance,b) From part 3a) calculate the mid band voltage gain, Ay.c) Please refer to Figure 3c). Calculate the output resistance,d) From part 3c) calculate the mid band voltage gain, Ay.

5SEL 4283

rout- [3 marks] [2 marks]

rout- [3 marks] [2 marks]

Q4.[10 marks]. Please refer to Figure 4 and Table 2.

a) Figure 4a) shows a simple common gate amplifier. Determine the operating region of the transistor and calculate its drain current.

[3 marks]b) From part a) calculate the mid band gain, Vout/Vm. [2 marks]

c) Figure 4b) shows a simple common drain amplifier. Transistor Mi is operating in linear region. Calculate its bulk voltage. [3 marks]

d) From part c), choose the correct location of Vout and calculate the mid band gain, Vout/Vjn. [2 marks]

Vdd Vdd

Figure 4a) Figure 4b)

6SEL 4283

Q5.[10 marks]. Please refer to Figure 5a), 5b) ard Table 2.

a) From Figure 5a, calculate the range of Vin which keeps transistor Mi in saturation region. Ignore body effect. [3 marks]

b) From part a), determine the range of drain current, Id. [2 marks]c) Repeat part a) for Figure 5b. Include body effect. [2 marks]d) From part c), determine the range of drain current, Id [2 marks]

'DDVp

Rd 2 k Q

^ IN

Vin

_youT

-1 V

Ml? Rs 5/i 2ka

V VFigure 5b

7SEL 4283

FORMULAE

All Vdd has 3 V voltage supply

Table 2

KP VTO 2 <p YNMOS 150 n 0.5 0.4 0 . 6 0 . 0 1

PMOS 50 |i -0.5 0.4 0 . 6 0 . 0 2

Id = f^(j Vg s | - | Vt [)2 (l + X \ Vd s |)

Id = Vg s \ - \ Vt |)(j Vd s |)

Vt = Vro+y(j(2cp+\VBs\) -J2<p)

Vt = Vto-y(j(2(p+\VB.^) -

fCJVT/gm —--------------------------- VdsL

K W n s t/ \gds ----------- (Vgs - Vf)

(1) -Drain current saturation region

(2 ) - drain current linear region

(3) - NMOS threshold voltage

(4) -PMOS threshold voltage

(5) -transconductance saturation region

(6 ) -drain source small signal resistance saturation region

(7) --transconductance linear region

(8 ) -conductance linear region

You can simplify the equations whenever necessary

SEL 42838

Simplified method to calculate output resistance

rout I"ds 1 1 rdsRL

Vin -cM]

Rt

(1 ■ —IL M |

Tout

n Mi

Tout —{gml + gds l)

rds\ + Rl

1 + gmWdsl

CONFIDENTIAL

gJUTMUNIVERSITI TEKNOLOGI MALAYSIA


SEM 4173

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

DR. MOHD FAUZI BIN OTHMAN

SEC / SEM / SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

26 APRIL 2011

THIS EXAM PAPER CONSISTS OF 4 QUESTIONS. YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER ANY 3 QUESTIONS (25 MARKS EACH). TOTAL MARKS FOR THIS EXAMINATION ARE 75%. YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ATTACH THIS EXAM QUESTION TO YOUR ANSWER BOOKLET. ALL EXAM REGULATIONS MUST BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO DURING THIS EXAMINATION.


COURSE CODE :

COURSE NAME :

LECTURERS :

PROGRAMME :

SECTION :

TIME :

DATE :


Question 1

-2-SEM4173

a. Draw a biological neuron and label all its main components. Discuss the

activity that takes place in the neuron at each of the components by

emphasizing on the flow of the telectrochemical signals from input to

output.

(4 marks)

b. Explain the two major classes of learning paradigms: supervised learning and

unsupervised (self-organised) learning. Give three examples for each

network.

(8 marks)

c. What are the problems with using a perceptron as a biological model? How

does the perceptron learn?

(4 marks)

d. i. Give two main problems related to the back-propagation learning algorithm.

ii. How can learning be accelerated in multilayer neural networks?

iii. Define the generalised delta rule.

(5 marks)

e. Three-neuron Kohonen network is given as follows:

Input vector X: X= [0.52; 0.12]

Initial weights: wi= [ 0.27; 0.81],

w2= [0.42; 0.70],

w3= [0.43;0.21],

Use a=0.2. Find the winning neuron and its updated weight.

(4 marks)

-3-SEM 4173

Question 2

a. i. What is a folly connected multilayer perceptrons?

ii. Describe in details on how multilayer perceptrons learn.

(10 marks)

b. What is a self-organising feature map? Describe with a diagram the feature-

mapping Kohonen model. (5 marks)

c. Demonstrate multilayer network learning of the binary logic function

Exclusive_OR with the following initial weights and threshold levels:

wi3=0.5, wi4=0.9, w23=0.4, w35=-1.2, w45=1.1, 03=O.8, 04=-O.l and 65=0.3.

Assume a=0.1.

(10 marks)

-4-SEM 4173

Question 3

a) Define the term Artificial Intelligence. Why fuzzy logic can lead to more human intelligent machines?

(5 marks)

b) Give one difference between a crisp set and a fuzzy set?(2 marks)

c) Define fuzzy inference. What are the main steps in the fuzzy inferenceprocess? (5 marks)

d) For the given membership function as shown in Fig. Q3(d) determine the defiizzified output value by these methods.

i) weighted average methodii) mean-max method

Fig Q3(d)(5 marks)

e) Discuss how you would design any two of the following products to have fuzzy inference in a real world environment(i). Autofocus Camera(ii). Rice cooker(iii). Washing machine(iv). An Inverted Pendulum

In your discussion, include the following aspects/factors:- -A practical choice of the fuzzy input and output variables

- A practical number of quantizations and choice of linguistic labels- Draw and indicate a reasonable number of membership functions for each fuzzy variable-Indicate practical values of the universes of discourse -Three examples of rules-The most practical choice of defuzzification technique-Some advantages you would expect from the fuzzy logic product comparedwith a conventional product

(8 marks)

Examine the fuzzy sets as illustrated in Fig. Q4 and solve the following questions:

-5-SEM 4173

Question 4

1.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

* j •

B

/

_z_

/

/

X'

/

o 1 8 9 10

Figure Q4

a. Write down the mathematical equations of the membership functions of fuzzy

sets A, B and C.

(7 marks)b. Based on the fuzzy sets of Fig. Q4, calculate the following:

(i). DIL(A)

(ii). (a)0 3 n CON(B) (subscript 0.3 denotes alpha cut set)

For questions (a) and (b),use only discrete elements in the universe, u (e.g., 0,

1, 2, 3, etc.) and membership values, fj. that to be obtained from equations in

question 3a.

(7 marks)

c. Using triangular waveforms, proof the following distributivity property of

fuzzy sets is true (show your answers step by step using several graphs).

A u ( B n C ) = ( A k j B ) c \ ( A uC)

(6 marks)

d. Supposing: X = {xi ,x2 }, Y ={yi y2 y3} and Z ={z3 ,z5 }

Given two "fuzzy relations" P(X, Y) and Q(Y, Z) as

-6-SEM 4173

P(X, Y) = 0.3 0 0.7 Q(Y, Z ] = 0.5 10.8 1 0.4 0 0.9

0.2 0.6

Will the fuzzy relation holds? Prove by using the following fuzzy

composition:

(i). "max-min”

(ii). "min-max”

(5 marks)

-7-SEM4173

Attachment

Table of Summary of Fuzzy Set OperatorsFuzzy set operations Operator expressions

Equality u g UUnion /orallueU

Intersection ^rUw)=mH^(4Mw)} /orallusU

Complement VA(u) = \-nA(u) u e UNormalization V- norMa) W = ^ (u)) u gU

Concentration M' con[a) (w) = (i1 a (w)) u gU

Dilation u e U

Intensification

Algebraic product

Bounded sum

Bounded product

Drastic product

Algebraic Sum

U L\Jûa(u))2 f°r0 ̂ Ma(u) ^ 0.5 !N7i'A^ 1—2(l-uA{ujf for0.5 < uA(u) < 1

UA»e&) ~ UA (M)«'6'b(^)}

uA(BB(u) = min(l, uA (u) + uB(u)}

uAeB(u) = max[0 ,uA(u)+uB(u) -1}

uA(u) for i4u) = 1

(u) = \uB(u) foruA(u) = \

0 for uA(u), uB(u) < 1

MAis (M) = Ma (“)+Mb (u ) * Ma (u )Mb (“) V u e U

foraWw gU

/orallueU

ybrallu gU

w

Fuzzy Logic HedgesVery F CON(F)More or Less F DIL(F)NotF 1-F

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEP 4043 / SWB 4043

CLINICAL ENGINEERING

LECTURERS MR. LUKMAN HAKIM BIN ISMAIL MR. SYED MOHD NOOH BIN SYED OMAR

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

09 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWERS FIVE (5) QUESTIONS ONLY.


-2-SEP 4043

Question 1 [10 Marks]

a. Explain the 3 main application of an infusion device.[3 Marks]

b. An ICU department in the hospital that you are working with is preparing to purchase volumetric infusion pumps. As the Head of Biomedical Engineering Department, you are required to develop a short report on the purchasing considerations for the new pumps. Elaborate the features of a smart infusion pump that need to be considered by the ICU department.

[7 Marks]


a. Define what is “nosocomial infection” and list 2 various forms of it.[3 Marks]

b. In MS 2058, user is required to decontaminate medical device before it can be sent for maintenance or repair. Describe the 3 important steps in decontamination process for surgical instrument set.

[7 Marks]


a. Before performing any electrical safety test on a medical device, a few general checks and tests need to be done first. Using MS IEC 60601-1 standard as a basis, describe in detail these checks and tests.

[6 Marks]

b. What are the consequences that may occur if the general checks and tests are not performed?

[4 Marks]

-3 -SEP 4043


a. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) can cause disturbance that interrupts the function of medical devices by disruptive electromagnetic energy that is transmitted from one device to another. Discuss on how this energy can be transmitted and give examples for each answer.

[3 Marks]

b. A company has developed a magneto-cardiography and short wave diathermy equipment for use at therapy centres in residential areas. Referring to CISPR classification, determine the class and group for BOTH equipments. Provide justifications for your answer.

[3 Marks]

c. Explain what is meant by RF immunity value for medical devices in critical care unit and discuss on how to resolve electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) problems in such area.

[4 Marks]


a. Differentiate between electrical microshock and macroshock.[2 Marks]

b. Referring to electrical conduction in the human body, majority of the body resistance is in the skin. Describe the advantages of dry skin, in the event of electrical shock and how can these advantages be diminished?

[3 Marks]

c. A build up of static electricity in an operating theatre may be hazardous. Give two reasons why and explain each reason. To avoid above hazard, describe precautions that are used in an operating theatre to prevent accumulation of static discharge.

[5 Marks]

-4-SEP 4043


a. Explain the following terms with examples:

i. Scheduled maintenance program.ii. Unscheduled maintenance program

[4 Marks]

b. What is preventive maintenance and corrective maintenance? How would good maintenance practice impact patient care?

[6 Marks]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEU 3053

COURSE NAME ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

LECTURERS MS FARID AH BT HUSSIN

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SPE

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ALL STUDENT ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER:

PART A: COMPULSORY.PART B: ANSWER THREE (3) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2SEU 3053

PART A

Ql. (i) Sketch, label and state clearly each of the following electrical quantities for star,

(Y) and delta, (A) configurations:

a. Phase voltage , Vp

b. Line voltage, Vl

c. Phase current, Ip

d. Line current, II

[4 marks]

(ii) Verify for both star and delta connected systems, an expression for the total

average power, P for a balanced load is given by:

P = V3 V l I l c o s6

Where, Vl, II and cos 0 are line voltage, line current and power factor

respectively.

[4 marks]

Q2. Explain briefly any 2 (two) of the following items:

(i) Permeability

(ii) Flux density

(iii) Magnetic field

(iv) Magnetic field strength

[4 marks]

Q3. Briefly explain the types of losses that occur in a single phase transformer.

[5 marks]

Q4. (i) What are the significant differences in terms of operation between motor and

generator?

[4 marks]

(ii) Answer one (1) from the following items:

(a) Describe the basic structure of electric machines.

(b) Explain the construction of induction machines.

[4 marks]

3SEU 3053

PART B

Ql. (a) A balanced three phase system with a line voltage of 400 V is supplying a

balanced star connected 15 kW load at lagging power factor of 0.85.

i) Find the magnitude of phase and line current.

[3 marks]

ii) Calculate the per-phase load impedance.

[2 marks]

(b) A balanced three-phase, delta connected load is connected to a three phase

supply. The line voltage is 400 V. The load impedance per phase is (10.8 + J5.23)

Q. Phase sequence is positive and Vry is taken as a reference,

(6 marks)

[3 marks]

i. Determine the phase currents (magnitude and phase angle)

ii. Sketch phasor diagram for voltage and phase current.

iii. Determine the line currents (magnitude and phase angle)

(3 Marks)

iv. Calculate the apparent power (S), average power (P) and reactive power (Q)

absorbed by the 3-phase load

(6 Marks)

v. Determine complex power in the rectangular and polar form

(2 marks)

Q2. (a) State four methods that can be used to increase the electromagnetic flux in the

Figure Q2(a).

[4 marks]

4SEU 3053

(b) A core made of cast steel is shown in Figure Q2(b-i). The core’s magnetization

curve is given in Figure Q2 (b-ii). The flux in the center limb is 3.6 x 1CT4

Weber, the cross sectional area is 2cm x 2 cm and the left limb is wound with a

wire of 300 turns.

(i) Draw the magnetic equivalent circuit for the core.

[5 marks]

(ii) Determine total flux produced by the magnetizing coil

[9 marks]

(iii) Calculate the current, / needed to produce the flux in part (ii)

[7 marks]

L------- 8 cm ------------------------6 cm —

Figure Q2(b-i)

SEU 30535

B-H Curve

H (AT/m)

Figure Q2(b-ii)

Q3. (a) Briefly describe the transformer on no load condition with the aid of suitable

diagram.

[10 marks]

(b) A single phase transformer rated at 15 kVA, 480/230 V, 50 Hz has resistances and

leakage reactances as follow:

Primary winding: resistance 1 Q; reactance 5 Q

Secondary winding : resistance 0.025 Q; reactance 0.05 Q

The iron core loss resistance and magnetizing reactance referred to primary,

winding are 400 Q and 360 Q respectively.

6SEU 3053

(i) Determine all the parameters referred to the high voltage side

[4 marks]

(ii) Draw the approximate transformer circuit

[2 marks]

(iii) If the transformer is supplying full load at power factor of 0.85 lagging at

secondary winding with the secondary terminal voltage of 240 V, determine the

supply voltage and efficiency of the transformer in this condition.

[9 marks]

7SEU 3053

Q4. (a) (i) Explain briefly two purposes of using transformer in power transmission

system

[3 marks]

(ii) Describe basic structure of a transformer.

[3 marks]

(b) Open circuit and short circuit tests are done to a single phase 20 kVA, 230/2300

V, 50 Hz transformer. The results are as follows:

Open circuit test

(reading taken on low voltage side)

Short circuit test

(reading taken on high voltage side)

V = 230 Volt V= 230 Volt

1 = 4.5 A I = 8.7 A

P = 350 W P = 500 W

Based on the results, determine:

(i) All the transformer parameters referred to the low voltage side. Then draw

the approximate equivalent circuit.

[11 marks]

(ii) The voltage regulation at full load condition with unity load power factor,

and the secondary terminal voltage is fixed at 2300 V.

[8 marks]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 4453

POWER SYSTEM CONTROL

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMMAD YUSRI BIN HASSAN

PROGRAMME SEE

SECTION 01

TIME 2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

DATE 25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


-2-SEE 4453

Ql.(a) You have been assigned as a project engineer to build a new power

plant. What are the factors that you should consider in order to generate

the power at minimum cost? Discuss briefly.

(5 marks)

(b) A system consists of two plants, Plant 1 and Plant 2 are connected by a

transmission line. A load is located at Plant 2. Data for the loss equation

indicate that 100 MW transmitted from Plant 1 to the load results into a

loss of 10MW. Find the required economic generation for each plant and

the power received by the load when incremental cost for the system is 6

RM/MWh. Assume that incremental fuel costs for Plant 1 and Plant 2

can be approximated by the following equations:

Xi=0.007P,+4.1 RM/MWh

A,2=0.014P2 + 4.6 RM/MWh

( 1 2 marks)

(c) Find the monthly saving for economic dispatch to serve a load of 200

MW between the plants of Ql(b) compared .with equal share. Neglect

line loss.

( 8 marks)

-3-SEE 4453

Q2. (a) Discuss briefly any one of these trading arrangements.

i) Single Buyer

ii) Pool Trading

iii) Bilateral contract

(5 marks)

(b) Consider 4 generators, G], G2 , G3 and G4 , operating in the single buyer

trading model with loads, Li and L2 as shown in Figure Q2(b). Each

generator has a declared capacity with capacity and energy prices as

indicated in Table Q2(b). The transmission elements are assumed to be

lossless. Each of the line has a transmission limit of 300 MW.

L| =500 MW L2=1000 MW

Figure Q2(b) Single Buyer Operation

Table Q2(b) Generator Capacity and Prices

Generator Declared

Capacity (MW)

Capacity price

(RM/MWmonth)

Energy Price

(RM/MWh)

G, 650 36000 1 2 0

g2 2070 36000 140

g3 2 1 0 0 36000 160

g4 440 36000 180

-4-SEE 4453

(i) Design a competitive market based on pool trading for

unconstrained dispatch and determine the hourly income of each

generator. LOLP is assumed to be 0. State any assumptions.

( 6 marks)

(ii) Discuss the pros and cons of both single buyer and pool trading

model in term of generator income adequacy.

( 6 marks)

(iii) Determine total generator incomes in Q2b(i) for (n-1)

constrained dispatch.

( 8 marks)

-5-SEE 4453

Q3. (a) State four (4) basic requirements for successful operation of power

system.

(5 marks)

(b) A 210 MVA synchronous generator operates initially at 3000 rpm, 50

Hz. A 75 MW load is suddenly applied to the machine and the steam

valve to the turbine commences to open after 1 sec due to the time lag in

the governor system.

(i) Calculate the frequency to which the generated voltage drops

before the steam flow commences to increase to meet the new

load. The value of the stored energy for the machine is 5 kW-s

per kVA.

(ii) What will happen if the turbine commences to open after 2 sec

instead of 1 sec?

( 6 marks)

(c) Two synchronous machines operate in parallel and supply a total load of

300 MW. The capacities of the machines are 150 MW and 300 MW and

have generator droop characteristics of 4% and 3% from no load to full

load respectively.

(i) Calculate the portion of the load taken by each machine,

assuming free governor action.

( 1 0 marks)

(ii) What is the new load portion taken by 300 MW machine if the

droop characteristic of this machine is changed to 4%?

(4 marks)

-6-SEE 4453

Q4. (a) Show how the scalar voltage difference between two nodes in a network

shown in Figure Q4 (a) is given approximately by:

AV =RP + XQ

V

(10 marks)

(b) A 60 MVA, 69.3 kV, three phase synchronous generator has

synchronous reactance of 15 Q/phase and negligible armature resistance.

(i) The generator is delivering rated power at 0.8 power

factor leading at the rated terminal voltage to an infinite

bus. Determine the magnitude of the generated emf per

phase and the power angle 5.

(4 marks)

(ii) If the generated emf is 36 kV perphase, what is the

maximum three phase power that the generator can

deliver before losing its synchronism?

(2 marks)

(iii) The generator is delivering 48 MW to the bus at the rated

voltage with its field current adjusted for a generated emf

of 46 kV per phase. Determine the armature current,

reactive power and the power factor. State whether the

power factor is lagging or leading?

(9 marks)

-7-SEE 4453

Q5. (a) Discuss briefly the role of converters and thyristor valves in the HVDC

system.

(6 marks)

(b) Smoothing reactor is connected in series with HVDC converter for two

reasons. State these reasons.

(4 marks)

(c) A HVDC link with 6 valve bridge connected converters comprises a line

of loop 5 £2 and is connected to transformers giving secondary voltage

of HOkV at each end. Each transformer has a per phase leakage

reactance of 15 Q. The rectifier is operated at a = 10°. The inverter

operates on constant 8 control with a 8 = 15° and y = 20°.

(i) How much direct current and DC power is being transmitted

from the rectifier end?

(ii) What is the maximum direct current that can be transmitted from

the rectifier if the inverter operates on constant P control?

(iii) Draw the complete equivalent circuit of this HVDC link.

(15 marks)

V.

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 3263

ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS

LECTURERS MR. ISMAIL BIN ARIFFIN

PROGRAMME SEE / SEE / SEI / SEM

SECTION 01


DATE 28 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER 4 (FOUR) QUESTIONS ONLY.


QUESTION 1

(a) Define the linear regulator and the switching regulator. [4 marks]

(b) A regulator has a no-load output voltage of 18 V and a full-load output of 17.8 V

at a load current of 50 mA. Determine the voltage regulation as:

(i) a percentage change from no-load to full-load [3 marks]

(ii) a percentage change from each mA change in load current. [3 marks]

(c) An IC voltage regulator shown in Figure Ql(b) is able to operate with much more

higher of output current, IL. If VEBi(on) = VEB2(on) = 0.7 V, Io(max) = 1A and Pi=15,

(i) state the function of transistors Qi and Q2, [2 marks]

(ii) determine Ici and IQ when RL = 100 Q. [3 marks]

2' SEE 3263

Figure Ql(a)

(d) Figure Ql (b) shows a serial voltage regulator with Q2 as the feedback path.

Given (3j= P3 = 100 for transistor Qi and Q3 p2 = 50 for transistor Q2 and VBe(on)

= 0.7V for all transistors.

(i) Determine the value of resistors R3, R2, Rsc. [6 marks]

(ii) Calculate the maximum power dissipation by Qi and Q2. [4 marks]

3SEE 3263

Figure Ql(b)

QUESTION 2

(a) Figure Q2 shows the transformer-coupled class A power amplifier circuit.

(i) State two advantages of using transformer-coupled compared to RC

coupling class A power amplifier. [2 marks]

(ii) Sketch and label the DC and ac load lines. [9 marks]

(iii) Calculate the maximum power efficiency. [5 marks]

'' Vcr - •' 22 V

4SEE 3263

Figure Q2

(b) A power transistor with thermal resistance, 0JA = 12 °C/W dissipates a power of

25 W at ambient temperature, TA = 25 ° C. If the maximum junction temperature,

Tjmax = 200 ° C,

(i) Show that the transistor will be superheated (over heat). [3 marks]

(ii) If the cooling system is used, calculate the ambient temperature, TA

needed to prevent overheating. [3 marks]

(iii) If the heat sink is used to prevent overheating at ambient temperature of

25 ° C, calculate the required junction to ambient thermal resistance, 0JA,

[3 marks]

QUESTION 3

(a) Define an oscillator. [2 marks]

(b) Specify the conditions for oscillation to occur. [2 marks]

(c) Figure Q3 (a) is a Wein-bridge oscillator with two loop feedbacks; the positive

loop feedback and the negative loop feedback.

(i) What are the purposes of both feedback loops? [2 marks]

(ii) Explain the function of resistor, R3. [2 marks]

(iii) Determine the value of R2 for oscillation to occur. [2 marks]

(iv) Determine the value of the close-loop gain, Acl at the beginning of

SEE 3263

(v)

oscillation.

Find the oscillation frequency, fQ, for the circuit.

[2 marks]

[2 marks]

D, D,

Figure Q3(a)

(d) Figure Q3(b) is a multivibrator circuit using a 555 timer.

(i) What are the reference voltages at both comparator circuits in the 555

timer internal circuitry if the supply voltage is Vcc = +10 V? [2 marks]

(ii) Determine the oscillation frequency, fo, for the circuit. [2 marks]

(iii) Find the value of capacitor, Ci to produce the oscillation frequency,

fo = 25 kHz. [2 marks]

(iv) If the resistor, Rj is changed to 3.3 kfl determine the value of R2 to

produce a 75% duty cycle. [3 marks]

(v) Give one suggestion on how the circuit could be re-designed to produce a

50% duty cycle. [2 marks]

6SEE 3263

Figure Q3(b)

QUESTION 4

(a) (i) State the general definition of a filter. [1 mark]

(ii) State ONE advantage of active filter over passive filter. [1 mark]

7SEE 3263

(b) Figure Q4 shows an active filter circuit. Please refer to Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3

in Appendix for Question 4 on page 10 if necessary.

(i) Determine the damping coefficient (a), the response type and the filter type for

each stage. [3 marks]

(ii) Calculate the cut-off frequency, the centre frequency, the gain and the quality

factor Q for the filter circuit in Figure Q4. [5 marks]

(iii) Draw and label the frequency response for the filter circuit shown in Figure Q4.

[3 marks]

C,

(c) Design a Bessel response, Sallen-Key equal component, low pass active filter to fulfill

the following specifications:

The 3dB cut-off frequency is 1.2 kHz.

At frequency of 10 kHz, the gain drops by 54 dB from the pass band gain.

Use capacitor value, C = 0.033 pF in designing this active filter and ignore the effect

of biasing current. Please refer to Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3 in Appendix for

Question 4 on page 10 if necessary. [12 marks]

QUESTION 5

(a) Briefly explain the following SCR characteristics:

(i) Forward Break-over voltage, Vbr(f)

(ii) Gate triggering current, Igt

(iii) Holding current, IH

[6 marks]

8SEE 3263

(b) Refer to Figure Q5. Given VBr for Schockley diode is 20 V while VGt of the

SCR is 2 V.

Obtain,

(i) the required value of Vr2 for SCR to trigger [2 marks]

(ii) the conduction angle, 0C [4 marks]

(iii) the average voltage (Vave) at the load, RL. [3 marks]

(iv) the ac power at the load, Rl [4 marks]

(v) the waveforms of Vr2, VL and VAk [6 marks]

QUESTION 6

(a) For each of the following statement, state the type of analogue to digital converter

whether it is of type digital ramp, SAC or Flash:

(i) Faster conversion technique.

(ii) Require a very complex circuit.

(iii) Produce a step ladder signal.

(iv) Has a constant conversion time and does not depending on analogue input

(Va) time.

(v) Does not require a digital to analogue converter (DAC).

(vi) Use analogue comparators.

[6 marks]

9SEE 3263

Figure Q6(b)

(b) Refer to Figure Q6(b).

(i) Explain the function of Vin(+) and Vin(-)

(ii) Explain the function of INTR

(iii) Explain the function of pin Vref/2

[6 marks]

(c) The LM 35 in Figure Q6(b) is a linear temperature sensor IC that is designed to

produce a 10 mV output for every degree Celcius. For example, at 25 °C, the

sensor produces an output of 250 mV and at 50 °C it produces an output of

500 mV. The analogue input voltage, Vm, at full scale is fixed at 2.56 V

V(i) What is the voltage value required to be set at pin ? [3 marks]

(ii) Calculate the required resistor value, RP2 to be varied. [3 marks]

(iii) Obtain the resolution for this ADC. [3 marks]

(iv) Determine the output value of D7-D0 when temperature is 100 0 C

[4 marks]

10SEE 3263

APPENDIX FOR QUESTION 4

Table 1

Filter Type____ ;_________________Transfer Function

A

11SEE 3263

First order, low pas H(s)s + coc

A. sFirst order, high pass H(s) = —-—

S + CGc

, ---------_ A o(®c)2 order, low pass H(s) =s +(roc/Q)s + (fflc)

A c2■>nd u:„l_________ u/„\ -2" order, high pass H(s) =

s +(<bc /Q)s + (goc)

2nd order, band pass H(s) = —:—ôô^Q)-----------s +(<d0/Q)s + ((d0)

2nd order, band stop H(s) = ô(s + (tDo) )s2 + (®o / Q)s + (®0)

H(s) is in terms of Ao, coo, fflc, and Q.

Table 2NORMALIZED POLYNOMIALS DEFINING THE BUTTERWORTH POLES

Order________ Normalized Denominator Polynomials

1 (s + 1)

2 (s2 + 1.414s + 1)

3 (s + l)(s2+s +1)

4 (s2 + 0.765s + l)(s2 + 1.848s +1)

5 (s + l)(s2 + 0.618s+ l)(s2 + 1.618s + l)

6 (s2 + 0.518s + l)(s2 + 1.414s + l)(s2 + 1.932s+ 1)

12SEE 3263

Table 3

FilterOrder

Stage Bessel Butterworth 1 dBChebyshev

2 dBChebyshev

3 dBChebyshev

2 1 a 1.732 1.414 1.054 0.886 0.766kip 0.785 1 1.238 1.333 1.390

31 a - - - -

kip 0.753 1 2.212 3.105 3.3442 a 1.447 1 0.496 0.402 0.326

kip 0.687 1 1.098 1.095 1.091

42 a 1.916 1.848 1.275 1.088 0.929

kip 0.696 1 1.992 2.146 2.2572 a 1.241 0.765 0.281 0.224 0.179

kip 0.621 1 1.060 1.057 1.052

5

1 a - - - -kip 0.642 1 3.571 4.484 5.617

2 a 1.775 1.618 0.714 0.578 0.468kip 0.619 1 1.577 1.602 1.628

2 a 1.091 0.618 0.180 0.142 0.113kip 0.549 1 1.040 1.037 1.034

6

2 a 1.959 1.932 1.314 1.121 0.958kip 0.621 1 2.881 3.115 3.355

2 a 1.636 1.414 0.455 0.363 0.289kip 0.590 1 1.364 1.375 1.385

2 a 0.977 0.518 0.125 0.0989 0.0782kip 0.523 1 1.023 1.024 1.025

a - damping coefficient

kip - low frequency correction factor

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEE 4443

COURSE NAME POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHD WAZIR BIN MUSTAFAASSOC. PROF. DR. AZHAR BIN KHAIRUDDIN

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEE

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

26 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE THIS PAPER CONSISTS OF FOUR (4) QUESTIONS. ATTEMPT THREE (3)QUESTIONS INCLUDING QUESTION FOUR (4).

ALL ANSWERS TO NEW QUESTION SHOULD START ON A NEW PAGE.

ALL CALCULATIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS MUST BE CLEARLY STATED.


Question 1

(a) (i) Explain briefly how outcomes from solution of load flow study can aid engineers

in two aspects of power system operation.

[4 marks]

(ii) Using suitable mathematical representations, describe load flow analysis using

Gauss Siedel technique.

[10 marks]

(b) In a five-bus system, the elements of admittance matrix are given as follow:

Y2,=Y23 = 0

Y22 = 7.146Z-84.60 p.u.

Y24 = 2.490Z95.10 p.u.

Y25 = 4.980Z95.10 p.u.

Knowing that only Bus 2 is a load bus with P2 - jQ2 = -2 + j0.7 p.u., and using flat start,

determine voltage V2 after second iterations using Gauss Siedel method.

[10 marks]

(c) Given data for a three-bus system as in Table Q1 (c):

-2-SEE4443

Table Ql(c)

Bus no. Bus type Voltage(p.u.)

Generated

Real Power

(p.u)

GeneratedReactive

Power(p.u.)

RealPower

Demand(p.u.)

ReactivePower

Demand

(p.u.)1 Slack 1.05Z00 Unknown Unknown 0 0

2 Voltage -

controlled1.02ZS 1.0 Unknown 0 0

3 Load Unknown 0 0 1.5 0.9

The bus admittance matrix (YbUS) for the system arranged in sequential manner similar to

number assignment of the buses is given as follows:

-3-SEE 4443

Ybus

54Z - 68° 22/AW 31Z1080 22Z116° 58Z - 63° 33Z1070 p.u.

l31Z108° 33Z1070 67Z-67°

(i) Derive the functions for all elements of Jacobian matrix in terms of

relevant variables of the system.

(ii) Calculate the Jacobian elements that correspond to reactive power at Bus 3

(Q3) for initial iteration in the load flow analysis. Use flat start values for

unknown parameters.

[11 marks]

Question 2

(a) Develop the expressions for analysing symmetrical fault in a large power system in

systematic manner using Z-Bus matrix.

[10 marks]

(b) The busbars of a power system shown in Figure Q2(b) are in two sections, P and

Q, separated by a reactor X. Each per unit value of components in the system is

based on its’ component’s ratings. Using bases of 10 MVA and nominal voltage,

determine the maximum short-circuit MVA with which circuit breaker at point F

has to deal if symmetrical fault occurs at that point.

[10 marks]

-4-SEE 4443

Ga Gb Gc15MVA 15MVA 8 MVA

12% 12% 10%

Figure Q2(b)

(c) The per unit bus impedance matrix for a 4-bus power system is given in sequential

order of bus numbers as follow:

0.150 0.075 0.140 0.1350.075 0.1875 0.090 0.09750.140 0.090 0.2533 0.210

0.135 0.0975 0.210 0.2475

By assuming that the system is operating at nominal voltage, calculate the bus

voltages during fault if the following cases occur:

(i) A bolted symmetrical fault at Bus 2.

(ii) A three-phase fault through a fault impedance of jO.0025 per unit at Bus 4.

In both cases, can you calculate the fault currents in the lines of the system? Give

reason for your answer.

[15 marks]

Question 3

(a) Explain what is symmetrical components of an unbalanced three-phase system.

[8 marks]

(b) What is the magnitude of the neutral-to-ground impedance ZN for a Y connected

generator in a zero-sequence diagram. Explain why?

[7 marks]

(c) A four bus power system is shown in Figure Q3(c). The equipment ratings are given

in Table Q3.

-5-SEE 4443

Table Q3System

ComponentMVA kV X”(P«) Xi(pu) X2(pu) Xo(pu) Aground

Generator G| 500 13.8 0.2 0.2 0.10

Generator G2 750 18 0.18 0.18 0.09

Generator G3 1000 20 0.17 0.17 0.09 0.028 Q

Transformer T, 500 13.8 A/500 Y 0.12 0.12 0.12

Transformer T2 750 18 A/500 Y 0.10 0.10 0.10

Transformer T3 1000 20 A/500 Y 0.10 0.10 0.10

Each line 50 Q 50 a 150 Q

G, T, 1

Y<SH<£>

AYLine 1

Lin e.

Line 3

3 T3 G,

4 T2 Gj

Figure Q3(c)

Assume that the prefault voltage is 1.0 per unit and prefault current neglected.

(i) Find all the positive, negative and zero sequence parameters value in per unit on a

1000 MVA, 20 kV base in the zone of generator G3.

(ii) Draw the positive, negative and zero sequence network diagram. Write all the

parameters values on the sequence network.

(iii) If a single line to ground fault occurs at Bus 3, find the subtransient fault current in

ampere.

(iv) If the Y connection of transformer Ti is grounded, repeat part (iii).

[20 marks]

- 6 -SEE 4443

- 7 -SEE 4443

Question 4(a) Write the swing equation and define all abbreviations used.

[6 Marks]

(b) A synchronous generator is supplying a real power of 1.0 pu to an infinite bus as

shown in Figure Q4. A temporary three phase fault occurs in Line 2, at one-tenth the

distance from the infinite bus end.

(i) What is the rotor angle when the generator is operating synchronously?

[6 Marks]

(ii) What are the generator output, accelerating power, and acceleration when the

fault occurs?

[6 Marks]

(iii) If the fault is cleared after 10 cycles, by opening of the faulted line, compute

the rotor angle, decelerating power, and deceleration immediately after the

faulted line is opened. Assume the power frequency to be 50 Hz and the

inertia constant of the generator to be 3.5 MJ/MVA. All values in the circuit

diagram are in per unit on a common base.

[6 Marks]

(iv) Plot rotor angle versus time for duration of 0.5 seconds. Take the180 f

constants = ^ (At)2 and time step At=0.05 seconds.

[6 Marks]

Figure Q4

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

LECTURERS PROF. DR. JOHARI HALIM SHAH BIN OSMAN

PROGRAMME SEE / SEI / SEM

SECTION 01


DATE 29 APRIL 2011



-2-

SEE 4153

if

(a) An automobile wheel is 60.96 cm in diameter and the rim has four (4) equally spaced spokes. The car is in motion and is being filmed with a camera that takes 24 frames per second. At what speed do the spokes first appear to rotate backward ? [5 marks]

(b) A circular potentiometer is used to measure shaft position. As the shaft rotates, the potentiometer produces a saw tooth output voltage. In a computer controlled system, the potentiometer output is sampled every T seconds. Calculate the longest value of T that can be used without introducing ambiguity of position measurement if the maximum shaft velocity is 100 rad/s'. [5 marks]

(c) The signal F(s) = --------- --- -------- is being sampled by an ideal sampler with a0 + l)Cs + 5)2

sampling period T = 0.5 s. Evaluate its pulse transform function F*{s).[75 marks)

QUESTION 1

QUESTION 2

(a) Given the following difference equation, find the solution y ( k ) if the initial conditions are _y(0) = l, >>(-l) = 0, and the input u ( k ) is the discrete impulse function. [10 marks]

y ( k +1) - 6 y ( k ) + 6 y ( k - 1) = u ( k )

(b) Figure Q2 illustrates a discrete-time control system in some supervisory control configuration with sampling period T = Is. Determine the closed-loop pulse transfer function for the system. [15 marks]

Figure Q2 : A Discrete-Time Control System

Dr/2011

-3-

A discrete-time control system with a sampling period T = 0.2 s is shown in Figure Q3 where a zero-order-hold (ZOH) is used to convert the discrete-time signal into a continuous-time signal. Answer the following question :

(a) Determine the closed-loop pulse transfer function of the system; [10 marks]

(b) Obtain the steady-state error as a function of the gain K if the input to the system is a unit step function. Comment on the size of the error as K varies from0 to oo. [7 marks]

(c) Determine the range of the gain K for which the closed-loop discrete-time system is stable. [8 marks]

SEE 4153

QUESTION 3

Figure Q3 : Discrete-time Control System

Note : If needed, the transfer function for ZOH is given as : G70H (s) =-------------------- =-------s s

QUESTION 4

Consider the system as shown in Figure Q4. If the sampling period for the system is0.1 second (T = 0.1 s),

(a) Obtain either the root locus plot OR the Bode plot for the system. [20 marks]

(b) Determine the closed-loop system stability. [5 marks]

Figure Q4 : A Discrete-time Control System.

DrJ2011

-4-

Consider the position servomechanism in Figure Q5.

(a) Obtain the Bode plot for the unconpensated system. [14 marks]

(b) Design a phase-lead controller D(z) such that the compensated system’s phase margin is increased to 40°. [11 marks]

SEE 4153

QUESTION 5

Digital Phase-leadController Servomotor

Figure Q5 : The Position Control Servomechanism.

DrJ2011

SEE 4153TABLE OF COMMONLY USED Z-TRANSFORMS

Laplace Transform,F(s)

Time Function, f ( t )

Number Sequence, { f ( k ) }z-Transform, F(z)

~ {1} z / ( z - l)

~ {*} z / ( z - \ f

~z ( z + l)

( z - l f

~ Mz

z - a

~ { k a k }a z

( z - a ) 2

~ {sin a k }zsina

z2 -2zcosa + l

~ {cos a k )z(z - cosa)

z2 -2zcosa + l

~ [ a k cosM:}z2 - a z cos b

z 1 - 2 a z cos b + a 2

1 5 { t ) = impulse function 11

su ( t )

z

z -1

1

s2t

Tz(2-i y

2

s3t 2

T2z(z + l)

( z - i y1

e ~ a lz

5 + a z — e~aT

al - e ~ a l

z ( l - e ~ ° T )s(s + a)

1t e - a t

Tze~aT

(s + af ( z - e - ° T fa \ - e - a ‘

t --------------a

Tz [ l ~ e ' o T ) zs2(s + a) (z-l)2 a(z-\)[z - e ~ a T )

a sin (at)z sin(<3r )

2 2 s +a z2 -2zcos(ar)+l

s cos (at)z(z - cos(aT))

s2 +a2 z2 -2zcos(ar)+l

1— e ' ° ‘ sin(bt) b V ’

1 ze~aT sin(6r)(s + a)2 + b2 b z2 -2ze~aT cos(bT) + e~2aT

s + ae~m cos(bt)

z2 - ze~aT cos(&!T)(y + tf)2 +b2 z2 - 2ze~aT cos(bl)+ e~2aT

DrJ20U

Z-TRANSFORMS & INVERSE Z-TRANSFORMS THEOREMS

-6-

SEE 4153

Theorem Time Function, /(t),t = kT

z-Transform, F(z)

Definition of z- transform m

f(z)=£ /(*?>-* or*=0

residue ofat the poles of F(^)

i) F{s) Has k Simple Poles at s = S n i

k N(s„) 1

«=iwhere

D(s) ds

ii) F(s) With Multiple-order Poles £,, s2, • sk, with

multiplicity, m,, m2, 7^, respectively :

d”-'

a?"-' \ - es=s-sn ,z=e

K^-^^(s-sS~F(s)

or for a pole at s = sn with multiplicity of mn (>1) :

1 dm- m, -1

{m„~ l)!^m"-’(s~s„)m" F{s)

\-e‘szTs -1

Definition of the Inverse z- transform

F(z)/-'dz2ttj Jr

= '£ residue of F{z)zk~1 at poles of F(z)

i) simple pole at z = a :{residue) ,=a = (z -<3)F(z)z*_1

ii) a pole at z = a with multiplicity m :

{residue) z=a =1

(m -1)!

dz

j m - 1 r

— [(z-a)"F(z)24-i

F{z)

DrJ2011

PROPERTIES OF THE Z-TRANSFORMS

-7-

SEE 4153

Property Time Function, f ( t ), t = k T z-Transform, F(z)

Addition and Subtraction

+i = Fi(z) + F2(z)

Multiplication by a Constant of it) = aF(z)

Real Translation (Shifting - right) Rt-nT) = z-F(z)+ f;/(rn7>-("+m)

m ^ - n

Real Translation (Shifting - left)

Rt + nT) = z” f ( z ) - £ f ( k T ) z - ‘L 4=0 J

ComplexTranslation

<1+ = F(ze±al)

Initial-Value /(0) = lim/(«lk->0- lim F(z) 2—>00

Final-Value Y \ m f ( k T )k-><x> = lim(l -z~l)F(z)

z—^1

Partial-Differentiation ^\Rt,aj\

m=1^(2, a)

da

Real Convolution Z A(nT)f2(kT-nT)«=o

- F 1 ( z ) F 2 ( z )

ComplexConvolution MOfiiO

2?gJr 4

DrJ2011

-8-

SEE 4153

MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF SAMPLING USING IDEAL SAMPLER

Domain of Expression Input-Output Transfer Relations of the Ideal Sampler

Representation as an Impulse Train in the Time Domain :

k=0

Fourier Transform

(Frequency Domain):= 7 Z F ( s + J n a > s )

■* «=S—QO

Laplace Transform (as an impulse train) : my

mk=o

Laplace Transform [F(s) has k simple poles]:

tT D’(^) l-e-ns^

m=

D'(£) =

D(Z)

dD(®d£ £=£,

where £,n is the «th simple pole of F(<%), n = 1 ,2 ,k.

Laplace Transform [F(s) has k poles with multiplicity mn> 1] : *■*(*) = £ I

n=1 /=1 ( m n - i ) \ <%m"~ ~Ts

K.. = — F ( $ )(z -1)! dsl

OR

m„-\1 dm°m-1K-!)!£"■

il-e -T(s-,f)

residue ofat the poles of Z7^)

F(Z)1

(l_e-*w>)

DrJ20U

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME BIOMEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING

LECTURERS DR. NASRUL HUMAIMI BIN MAHMOOD

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE THERE ARE FOUR (4) QUESTIONS, ATTEMPT ALL. READ QUESTIONS CAREFULLY. ORGANIZE YOUR WORK AND WRITE LEGIBLY.


2SEP4263

a) In medical image processing, an example of quantization involves representing

a grayscale image with 8 bits per pixel. What is the purpose of the quantization

process? [3 marks]

b) Explain why arithmetic mean filter (sometimes commonly known as an averaging

filter), will not perform well on an image distorted by salt-and-paper noise.

[5 marks]

c) Figure Ql is a 4 bits/pixel image of size 5x5.

i. What is the difference between global and local enhancement? [3 marks]

ii. Sketch and label the histogram of the whole image. [4 marks]

iii. Write the negative image of the whole image. [4 marks]

iv. Find the output of 3x3 mean, median, min and max filters computed

at the center pixel denoted with a circle only. [6 marks]

QUESTION 1

3 4 12 11 13

2 1 14 10 15

3 5 © 8 12

12 11 13 9 14

13 14 12 13 10

Figure Ql

3SEP4263

a) The identification of objects within an image can be a very difficult task. One way to

simplify the problem is to change the grayscale image into a binaiy image, in which

each pixel is restricted to a value of either 0 or 1. One of the techniques used on these

binaiy images is morphological image processing.

i. With the aid of mathematical operation, describe the dilation and erosion in

terms of its morphological operation. [6 marks]

ii. Erode the image in Figure Q2a with the following structuring element.

[4 marks]

QUESTION 2

0 1 0

0 1 0

0 1 0

Structuring element

0 0 1 0 1

1 1 0 1 1

0 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

1 0 0 0 0

Figure Q2a

4SEP4263

The aim of Otsu’s thresholding method is to find the threshold value where the sum of

foreground (brighter pixels) and background (darker pixels) spreads is at its

minimum. Figure Q2b is a 6x6 image with the histogram for the image is shown next

to it. If the threshold value is 3,

i. Calculate the weight (Wb), mean (nb) and variance (cs\) for the

background. [6 marks]

ii. Calculate the weight (Wf), mean (|if) and variance (o2f) for the

foreground. [6 marks]

iii. Find the value of within class variance (a2w)- [3 marks]

Figure Q2b

5SEP4263

a) State four types of physical signals arising from the patient in medical imaging

modalities. [4 marks]

b) The beauty of medical imaging is that we can see inside the human body in ways that

are less invasive than surgery or endoscopy. Describe briefly the basic principles of

the following medical imaging modalities.

i. Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) [5 marks]

ii. Computed Tomography (CT-Scan) [5 marks]

iii. Nuclear Medicine [5 marks]

c) Ultrasound imaging systems are comparatively inexpensive and completely

noninvasive at the low imaging intensities typically used. Therefore, these systems

are widespread and in common usage and offer several imaging modalities. Explain

the following modalities of ultrasound.

QUESTION 3

i. A-mode and B-mode imaging

ii. Doppler Imaging[3 marks]

[3 marks]

6SEP4263

a) Medical image registration is one of the important tasks in medical imaging.

i. Give a brief description of medical image registration and why it is

needed in medical imaging. [5 marks]

ii. State and explain what factors make the registration is hard to do? [6 marks]

iii. Assuming that we have two images of the same object, a structural image

and a functional image. Propose a strategy on how you can register

these two images. [6 marks]

iv. What algorithm/method that minimize the difference between two

clouds of points? [2 marks]

b) Briefly describe what the biological effects and safety procedures are for:

i. Magnetic Resonance Imaging

ii. Computed Tomography

QUESTION 4

[3 marks]

[3 marks]

“END OF QUESTION SHEET”

CONFIDENTIAL


COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

LECTURERS


SEE 1023

CIRCUIT THEORY

PROF. DR. ZAINAL BIN SALAMASSOC. PROF. DR. NIK RUMZI BIN NIK IDRISDR. SHAHRIN BIN MD AYOBDR. NOR ASIAH BINTI MOHAMADDR. NORHAFIZAH BINTI NGAJIKINMR. ABD. JAAFAR BIN SHAFIEMR. ALIAS BIN MOHD YUSOFMS. ZANIAH BINTI MUDA

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SET / SEW / SWB

01 - 07,10

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

30 APRIL 2011

ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.ALL WORKING NEED TO BE SHOWN CLEARLY.DRAW NEAT DIAGRAMS WHEREVER NECESSARY.


2SEE 1023

Ql. (a) Referring to Figure Ql(a), use Norton’s theorem to determine the resistance Rl

so that current flow through it is 2 mA. [ 8 Marks ]

1 kQ r—WV

12 V 2kQ

Figure Ql(a)

(b) (i) For the circuit in Figure Ql(b-i), find the value of Rl for maximum

power transfer to the load. [ 3 Marks ]

20V 3Q— — W v —

3 Q---- W V

6jz:

2 O ■AAAr

Rl

Load

Figure Ql(b-i)

(ii) For the circuit in Figure Ql(b-ii), find the maximum power that can be

transferred to load Rl. [ 14 Marks ]

Rl

3SEE 1023

Q2. (a) For the circuit in Figure Q2(a), determine:

. (i) the impedance Zl for maximum average power transfer and [ 2 Marks ]

(ii) the value of the maximum average power transferred to Zl- [ 6 Marks ]

(b) Three loads are connected to a voltage source, 240Z00 V(rms) as shown in Figure Q2(b). Load 1 absorbs 16 kW and 28 kVAR, Load 2 absorbs 10 kVA at0.6 power factor lead and Load 3 is an impedance (4.6 + j3.5) Q.

(i) Find the impedance that is equivalent to the three parallel loads.[11 Marks]

(ii) What value of capacitance placed in parallel with the terminals A-B will raise the power factor to 0.95 lagging. The frequency of supply voltage is 50 Hz. [ 6 Marks ]

240Z00 Vn

Figure Q2(b)

4SEE 1023

Q3. (a)

(b)

(c)

For a series resonant circuit, show that the half-power angular frequencies, coi^

are given by:

°>1'2 + 2L + ' v 2 Lj1

LC

where R, C and L are resistor, capacitor and inductor respectively.[ 7 Marks ]

A series resonant circuit has R = 10 Q, L = 100 mH, C = 10 |j.F and a voltage

source, Vs = 10 Z0° Vnns- Determine:

(i) Half-power angular frequencies. [ 2 Marks ]

(ii) Magnitude and phase angle of current, I at half-power angular frequencies.[ 4 Marks ]

(iii) Magnitude and phase angle for:

a. Vr at lower cut-off angular frequency and

b. Vl at upper cut-off angular frequency.[ 5 Marks ]

The networks shown in Figure Q3(c-i) and Q3(c-ii) have the same impedance as

seen from the terminals a-b.

(i) Show that the equivalent parallel network (RP,XL) in terms of the series

network (Rl, Xl) are given by:

R,2+cd2L2D R l

2 +02 L 2 j v Rp =—-------------- and Xp =■

R, coL

(iii) Hence, prove that Quality factor, Q for Figure Q3(c-i) equals to Q of

Q3(c-ii).

[ 7 Marks ]

Xp

Figure Q3(c-i) Figure Q3(c-ii)

5SEE 1023

Q4. (a) Give three types of response for a parallel RLC circuit and their relationship to the

circuit parameters. [ 4 Marks ]

(b)

(c)

A source-free parallel RLC circuit is described by the voltage second-order

differential equation as follows:

d2v cdv —- + 2.5 — + v = 0 dt dt

Find the following:

(i) The characteristic equation of the circuit. [ 1 Marks ]

(ii) The type of response of the circuit and the value of C and L if R = 2 Q.

[ 5 Marks ]

Figure Q4(c-i) shows an RLC circuit containing a voltage source and a switch

which has been closed for a long time. The switch is then opened at t = 0 s. The

response of the voltage across the capacitor is shown in Figure Q4(c-ii).Vc(V)

Figure Q4(c-i) Figure Q4(c-ii)

(0

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

What is the type of response for this second-order circuit? [ 1 Mark ]

What are the values of the voltage sources, Vsi and VS2- What is the initial

voltage of the capacitor, Vc and the inductor current, i]_ at t = 0?

[ 5 Marks ]Write down the expression for vc(t) for t > 0. [7 Marks ]

What should be the value of resistor, R] in order to change the type of

response to critical damped. [ 2 Marks ]

6SEE 1023

Q5. (a) Given that two two-port networks represented by network A consists of

transmission matrix, \Ta ] and network B consists of admittance matrix, \Yb ].

(i)

(ii)

How these two networks can be connected in cascade. [ 2 Marks

Sketch and label clearly the block diagram showing the cascade

interconnection of these two networks. [ 3 Marks ]

(iii) Show that the resultant matrix of the cascade interconnection of the

individual two-ports can be represented by [Tt ] = [Ta ] + \Tb ].

[ 5 Marks ]

(b) (i) Consider the circuit in Figure Q5(b-i). Find the admittance parameters.

[ 10 Marks ]

(ii) If terminals A-B of Figure Q5(b-i) is connected with resistor 1 Q. in

series with vP and terminals C-D is terminated with a 0.5 Q load resistor

as shown in Figure Q5(b-ii), find —. [ 5 Marks

2 0

i a VW-

AO co-

B D—o o—Two-Port Network

+

V0

Figure Q5(b-i) Figure Q5(b-ii)

0.5 a

7SEE 1023

Conversion of two-port parameters

y z h T

yy11 y12

y21 y22

Z22 ' Z12

Az A z

" z2i zn

a2 az

1 -h12

hn hn

^21 A h

hn hn

T22 - A t

T Tx12 12

— 1 T ___ Jn

.^12 T12

z

y22 -y,2

A Ay y

-y2i yn Ay A y

zn z12

Z21 Z22

Ah h12

h22 h22

-h21 1

h22 h22

Tn At

T T*21 21

1 T1 22

^21 T21

h

1 ~ y 12 yti yn

ZlLyn yn

Al IlL Z22 Z22

— z21 1

Z22 Z22

hn h ]2

h21 h22

^12 A t

T T 1 22 I 22

-1 T___ 21

T T1 22 22

T

-y22 -1 y2i y 21

_Ay -yny2i y2i

£li Al Z21 Z21

^ Z22

Z21 Z21

-Ah -hn

h2i b2 ]

- h22 -1

h2 ] h21

T T•Ml A12

T T21 22

Ap Pi 1P22 ■ P12P21

Nota: Parameter T = transmission Parameter

' A B' ~ T ■Mi T12

C D T 21 T 22 _

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 1123

INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENT

LECTURERS DR. TAN CHEE WEIDR. MUHAMMAD ABU BAKAR SIDIKDR. NOURUDDEEN BASHIR UMARDR. RASHID AH BT ARSATDR. NORHUDAH BT SEMANDR. LEOW PEI LINGMR. LIM CHENG SIONG

PROGRAMME SEC / SEE / SEI /SEL/ SEM / SEP / SET / SEW

SECTION

TIME

DATE

0 1 - 0 7

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

05 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A:ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS (25%)

PART B:ANSWER THREE (3) QUESTIONS ONLY (75%)


2SEE1123

PART A: MULTIPLE CHOICES AND TRUE FALSE. (25%)

(Indicate your answers for PART A by using the answer sheet provided in the appendix and attached it together with your answer booklet for submission)

1. Several steps for getting the certificate of accreditation is included below except

a. Applicationb. Adequacy auditc. Compliance assessmentd. Assuring the quality of test and calibration results.

2. Which of the following quantities has different dimension from the others?

a. Depth b. Distancec. Area d. Width

3. Loading effect of a Voltmeter to the measurement circuit can be minimized using a

a. Very low impedance shunt resistor to the loadb. High series resistor to the loadc. Low input impedance voltmeterd. High input impedance voltmeter

4. Which one below indicates a focus provided by SAMM (‘Skim Akreditasi Makmal Malaysia’ or Laboratory Accreditation Scheme of Malaysia)?

a. Promoting industry, governments, regulators and consumers to the accreditation system.

b. Assist and develop laboratoryc. Assisting and supporting developing accreditation systemsd. Harmonizing inspection arrangement

5. The following are classifications of error except

a. Uniformb. Humanc. Systematicd. Random

3SEE1123

6. Primary standards are standards maintained by:

a. Industrial measurement laboratoriesb. Actual measurements in physicsc. International Bureau of Weights and Measures (BIMP)d. Organization/national laboratories

7. What is the function of Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT)?

a. To step up or step down primary voltage supply to secondary coilb. For measuring unknown resistance in a circuitc. To measure linear displacementd. To convert mechanical movement into electrical output

8. If the Wheatstone’s bridge below is balanced, find Rx.

a. Rx -Ra + Rb + Rc c. Rx= Rc Rb / Ra

b. Rx-Rc(Ra+Rb) d. Rx= Ra/ RcRb

9. The distance between two peaks of a signal measured on the x-axis is 2 cm, at1 ms/div. The frequency of the signal is

a. 50 Hz c. 1 kHz

b. 5 Hz d. 500 Hz

10. A thermistor is inherently suitable for temperature measurement involving

a. High accuracy but low sensitivityb. High sensitivity but narrow spanc. High sensitivity but low accuracyd. Wide span but low sensitivity

4SEE 1123

11. The construction of the electron gun inside the oscilloscope consists of the below except

a. Heaterb. Cathodec. Control gridd. Deflecting plate

12. Which one below is NOT the main purpose of using dimension analysis

a. To determine the unit of the equationb. To understand the physical situations of the equations and formulac. To check the correctness of the physical quantities in an equationd. To examine the relation of the physical parameters of an equation

13. The food that carries halal certifications promises the following benefits except

a. Hygiene and cleanb. Fulfill the halal food process practicesc. Rich in nutritiond. Is marketable in Muslim countries

14. The sensitivity of a voltmeter with an internal resistance 50 Q is given as 1 kQ/V at full scale 20 V. What is the input resistance of this voltmeter?

a. 19.95 kQb. 20 kOc. 0.95 kQd. 0.9975 Q

15. Which of the following is NOT the rules for presenting graphical data

a. Graph should not be drawn outside of the boundaries corresponding to the maximum and minimum data values measured

b. Title or caption explaining the data should be presentedc. Both axes need to be label with the variable and unit clearly stated

d. The independent variables should be plotted as y-axis

SEE 1123Indicate TRUE or FALSE for the statements below:

5

No. StatementTRUE or

FALSE

16. Random errors are errors that cannot be explained as human or instrument or environment errors.

17. In inductance standard, one Henry is equivalent to one Ampere per second divided by one Weber (Wb).

18. Chauvenet’s criterion is a statistical rejection of bad data in a set of experiment data.

19.“Given the specification of an electrical appliance as: 240 V ± 0.1 %”

The above statement refers to the terminology bias.

20. Thermistor is a linear thermo-resistive sensor use for temperature measurement.

21.Strain gauge is constructed from a fme-wire element that looped back and forth on a mounting plate that cause change in wire’s resistance when the plate deforms.

22. .The ISO 17025 standards states that if testing and calibration laboratories comply with ISO 17025, it must also operates accordance with ISO 9001 or ISO 9002

23. Given the quantity force, [F] = [MLT2]; then the dimension of the quantity acceleration can be expressed by [a] = [M'!LT'2].

24.By applying 85% of the ‘from farm to table’ process, the applicant should not have any problem in their application of HALAL certificate.

25. Electron gun of a cathode ray tube is used for generating electrons beam in oscilloscope.

6SEE 1123

PART B: ANSWER ONLY THREE OUT OF FOUR QUESTIONS

Question 1

a. Define the terms error and uncertainty. Then, briefly describe the systematic errors.[10 Marks]

b. Referring to the circuit shown in Figure Qlb, the connecting wires are made of Nickel.

Rwire = 10 Q-------- vw------------

25 V Rload — 15 Q

Figure Qlb

i. What is the resistance in each of the nickel wires, RWjre if the temperature of the circuit rises from 20 °C to 40 °C? Given the temperature coefficient of nikel, anikei-20 is

0.005866 PC. (Material thermal resistance equation is given in the appendix)\3 Marks]

ii. Assuming R]oad is a consumer load in an electrical power system, comment the effect of the temperature rise of these wires to the voltage across the load by using circuit analysis to prove your answer. [10 Marks]

iii. At what temperature will the total resistances of the nickel wires have the value of 25 Q?[2 Marks]

7SEE 1123

Question 2

a. In designing a dc to dc converter, a researcher has found that the switching frequency to obtain the minimum inductance is as below

where D is the duty-cycle, R is the output resistance and f is the switching frequency. If the resistor, R is 500 Q with an accuracy of 25 Q, the switching frequency is unknown with certain variation while the duty-cycle is 0.5 + 0.01. Given the minimum inductor value is 2.5 mH with accuracy of± 37.5 ^H; determine the frequency of switching with its variation by using the given equation without expanding the variable terms.

(1-2D + D2)R

[6 Marks]

b. Figure Q2b shows the basic principle of gravity pendulum,

4 I.

\

/where,g is the acceleration due to gravity near the surface of the earth/ is the length of the pendulum in metersdo is the largest angle attained by the pendulum0 or d(t) is the angle attained by the pendulum at time t.

Figure Q2b

Both Go and 0 are measured in radians. The value of 6 at time / is given as,

;(valid only for a very small 0 where 6o« 1)

Find the maximum uncertainty for 0(t), given that g = 9.81 ±0.01 ms'2 / = 0.5 ± 0.02 m 00 = 0.3 ± 0.03 rad t = 1±0.05 s [11 Marks]

Describe modulating and self-generating transducers. Explain the main difference between these two transducers. [3 Marks]

Figure Q2d shows a schematic diagram of a Serial-Capacitor type bridge which is operating at 0.5 kHz. Given that the value for the resistor Ra, Rb, Rc are 2000 Q, 2800 Q and 52 Q, respectively. The capacitor Ce is 0.5 pF. Determine the value of the components in Zx.

[5 Marks]

Figure Q2d

Question 3

9SEE1123

a. Strain gauge is used for sensing the strain.

i. Explain the piezo-resistive effect property and name a type of strain gauges. [4 Marks]

ii. State two advantages and disadvantages of semiconductor strain gauge. [4 Marks]

iii. A round copper wire is loaded with 30000 kg tensile force in which the modulus is equal to 1.7 x 1010 kg/m2. Determine the ratio of the gauge factor over the initial resistance of the gauge when the change of resistance is 250 |iH. The characteristic of wire is 15 mm in radius and 500 mm long. [5 Marks]

b. Figure Q3b shows the plot for a set of wind speed measurements logged by a metrology laboratory. Based on these data, the metrologist in charge found that the readings are largely deviated from each other. For that reason, you have been assigned to help the metrologist to perform the data analysis with the aid of Table Q3.

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 .r- ■ -

X: 7

1'

/

/

X: 1 Y: 5.7

X: 3 Y: 5.9 X: 4

'1 1.....1

Y: 5.4 "

1-.....X: 5 Y: 5 ,*

/1;;------------- v- X: 6

. Y: 4

\

*,/

\X: 2

. Y: 0.8

- i i

"DCDa>Q.

C/D■ac

0 3 4 5Reading, x

Figure Q3b

10SEE 1123

Table Q3: Chauvenet’s Criterion for rejection of a reading.Number of Readings,

nRatio of Maximum Acceptable Deviation to

Standard Deviation, dmax / cr3 1.384 1.545 1.656 1.737 1.8010 1.9615 2.13

i. For a given probability of 68.3%, sketch the normal distribution curve of a population data. In the normal curve, label the area of the rejected data and the accepted probability.

[2 Marks]

ii. Using Chauvenet’s Criterion, determine, if any data should be discarded from the set of wind speed readings shown in Figure Q3b.

[10 Marks]

Question 4

11SEE 1123

a. With the aid of circuit analysis, explain the impact of using low input impedance in voltmeter design. What is this phenomenon known as? [5 Marks]

b. Figure Q4b shows the connection of a voltmeter to measure the potential different across resistor R3. Find the voltage reading and % error of each reading obtained with a voltmeter on

(i) Meter 1: S = 2kQ/V with 1OV range,

(ii) Meter 2: S = 5kQ/V with 10V range, and

(iii) Meter 3: S = lOkTl/V with 10V range [10 Marks]

Ri = 25k^

(iv) What can you conclude based on the calculations above? [2 Marks]

c. Define Electrical and Mechanical Transducers and give two examples of each.[8 Marks]

12SEE 1123

APPENDIX - LIST OF EQUATIONS___________No. Equations

V. =f - n - h

2e

I = e

«• /z

C = Q

RT = i?ro (1 + aAT)

d f + d ] + • • • + d Lna = ■

dCosxdx

- - Sin x

u y = + + . .+ r û,l5xJ

dR9xj

\2-W, + dR

\dx 2

\2-w.

/ \ 2

K9Xn- w _

10 AL = FL /AE

11;=1

12 /■ =V"Zx'-&)2 V"Z^2-(Z^)2

13SEE 1123

ANSWER SHEET FOR PART A (25%)

NAME:_____________________________________________________

IC NO:__________________________ SECTION/ PROGRAM:_____________/

MULTIPLE CHOICES:

(1) (6) (11)

(2) (7) (12)

(3) (8) (13)

(4) (9) (14)

(5) (10) (15)

TRUE OR FALSE STATEMENTS:

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

(25)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME CONTROL : ANALYSIS & DESIGN

LECTURERS DR. SHAHDAN BIN SUDIN

PROGRAMME SEE / SEL / SEM

SECTION 01


DATE 06 MAY 2011



a)

i) If the natural response in the output of a system creates instability to the

system, what can we tell about exponential term in it?

ii) Does the presence of entire row of zeros in a Routh Table always mean

that the system has j co-axis poles?

iii) If there is a zero in the first column of the Routh table, what does this

indicate?

(3 marks)

b) For the system in Figure Qlb, how many poles are located on/at the left-half

plane, right-half plane and on jco-axis. Note that the system has a positive

feedback.

(9 marks)

-2- -SEE 3113

Question 1

R(s) + o 6 C(s)

i 1+s5 + 4s4 + 2s3 - 2s2 + 3

Figure Qlb

c) A model for an airplane’s pitch loop is as shown in Figure Qlc.

Controller Aircraft dynamics

Gyro

Figure Qlc

i) Find the range of gain K that will keep the system stable.(11 marks)

ii) Can the system ever be unstable for positive values of K1(2 marks)

Question 2

A unity feedback system has a forward transfer function

r M = K f r + i )W (s + 5)(s2 - 2s + 2)

a) How can we determine whether a root locus plot crosses the imaginary axis?

(2 marks)

b) By using the Routh-Hurwitz criterion, find the range of K to make the system

stable. When the system is marginally stable, calculate the value of poles.

(6 marks)

c) Prove, mathematically, that the point s1 = —0.59 + j4.95 is located on the

root locus.

(3 marks)

d) Draw the root locus of the system on graph paper provided.

(10 marks)

e) If the system is to operate at the damping ratio of 0.08, find the value of K to

achieve this operation.

(4 marks)

-3 -SEE 3113

-4-SEE 3113

a) What is the effect on the performance of a system if the following

compensators are used, respectively:

i) PI Controller

ii) PD Controller

iii) PID Controller

(4 marks)

b) A vehicle speed control system is shown in Figure Q3b.

Question 3

Figure Q3b

The system without controller has a settling time of 4.44 s and peak time of

3.49 s.

Design a suitable controller so that,

• the system’s settling time is reduced to half of the original value

• the peak time is maintained, and

• the steady state error is reduced to zero for a unit step input.

(16 marks)

c) Roughly sketch the root locus of the uncompensated and compensated systems

in part (b) above.

(5 marks)

- 5 -SEE 3113

a)

i) Name two ways to plot the frequency response.

ii) Define the Gain Margin and Phase Margin

iii) From the bode plot of a given system, how do we know that the system is

unstable?

(3 marks)

b) A unity feedback system has an open-loop transfer function of

( ^1000(5 + 1)s(s + 2.5)(s + 10)(s + 50)

i) By using the straight line approximation methods, plot the Bode plot of the

open-loop system when K = 1.

(14 marks)

ii) Obtain the Gain Margin and Phase Margin of the system.

(2 marks)

iii) Determine the stability of the system. Give your reason.

(2 marks)

iv) Find the value of gain K needed for the system to give a phase margin of

45°.

(2 marks)

v) With the value of K obtained in part b(iv) above, re-plot the magnitude

curve to show that the required phase margin is obtained.

Question 4

(2 marks)

- 6 -SEE 3113

a) The performance of a system can be improved by using a lag compensator,

without resulting in any instability problem. Describe two (2) main functions

of a lag compensator in terms of the static error constants and the transient

response, respectively.

(5 marks)

b) The roll dynamic of a towed-vehicle roll control system can be represented as

a unity feedback system, with a forwards transfer function given as,

rM _ ^0 + 4)W (s + 2)(s + 6)(s + 8)

The bode plot of the open-loop system, with K = 24, is as shown in Figure

Q5b.

i) Design a lag compensator, on the given bode plot (submit together with

your answer), so that the system operates at a phase margin of 45° and a

static error constant of 100.

(16 marks)

ii) Find the value of gain K for the compensated system.

Question 5

(4 marks)

-7-SEE 3113

K=24 Frequency (rad/s)

0.01

| *»« I «‘“*i[."•y^ :r^l»fc? fj< A

» J f- jwjsr ?*-»■*. sjiSh-^.sA^.^1I i *■»»»-"» f- !<■»■ ‘■f

i * 1 . * I * >- (■*1> ■*>*«*r * *~ J -4-j * ‘ j

1000

Figure Q5b(i)

-8-SEE 3113

K=24 Frequency (rad/s)

Figure Q5b(ii)

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME MODERN CONTROL SYSTEM

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHD FUA’AD BIN RAHMATASSOC. PROF. DR. ZAHARUDIN BIN MOHAMED

PROGRAMME

SECTION

SEE / SEI / SEM

01-02


DATE 05 MAY 2011



-2-

SEE 4113

(a). Give two reasons for modeling system in state space.

(b). For electrical networks, what is a convenient choice of state variables?

Question 1

[2 marks]

[2 marks]

(c). Consider the electrical network shown in Figure Ql(a) where the input variable is Vi(t) and the output variable is V0(t).

v,

• +

Figure Ql(a): RLC network

i) Determine the state-space representation of the electrical network.[Hint: The state variables should be chosen from your answer in Q1 (b)]

[10 marks]

ii) If possible, find a new state-space representation with the following state variables:x l ( t ) = v l ( t )

x2( t) = i( t )

x3 ( t ) = v2( t)[3 marks]

(d). Consider a mechanical system shown in Figure Ql(b) where u± and u2 are the inputs and and y2 are the outputs.

-3-

SEE 4113

Figure Ql(b): Mechanical system

(i) Find a state-space representation of the mechanical system.

(ii) Draw a signal flow graph to represent the system.[5 marks]

[3 marks]

-4-

(a) Give two reasons to represent a system by alternative forms.

SEE 4113

Question 2

[2 marks]

(b) Investigations on a mobile robot show that the system has Eigen-values of -2, -2, -4 and -4. The state-space equation of the robot can also be described in the Controller Canonical Form as follows:

x{ t ) = Ax( t ) + Bu( t )

y { t ) = [2 3 l]x(0

(i) Find the transfer function of the mobile robot.[3 marks]

(ii) Obtain the state-space representation and signal flow graph in Diagonal or Jordan Canonical Form.

[7 marks]

(c) A simple crane system can be represented by a second order differential equation as

d y(t) , , dy(t) du(t)+ 6---------1-4 y(t) = 4--------- b u(t)

dtA dt dt

where y(t) is the output and u(t) is the input.

(i) Find a state-space representation of the system in a phase variable form.[4 marks]

(ii) To design a controller, the state equation in the phase-variable form has to be transformed into a new state equation as follows:

• ' 3.4 6.2 ‘ ”- 0.2"z = z +

-5.8 -9.4 0.4

This can be achieved with similarity transformation with a transformation matrix,

P =2 Pn

P21 P 22

Find the output equation of the new state-space representation.

[9 marks]

-5-

SEE 4113

(a). A linear time-invariant system is characterized by the homogeneous state equation,

Question 3

dx j ( t)

dt 0 1 Xj(0dx2 ( t) -6 -5 _x2( t)_

dt

where the initial condition of the system is x(0) = [ 1 0]T

(i). Find the resolvent matrix, ®(s)

[4 marks]

(ii). Find the state transition matrix <D(t)

[2 marks]

(iii). Find the inverse state transition matrix cD'’(t)

[2 marks]

(iv). Find the solution of x(t)

[4 marks]

(b). A linear time-invariant system is characterized by the non-homogeneous state equation,

u(t)e> -:>j|_x2(f)J |_i

y ( t ) = [l 1}

•XI (0 ' 0 1 '

rl

+'o'

•_X2 (0_

-6 -5_ _x2(0_ 1

x l (0

x 2 ( t )

Determine the non-homogeneous solution, x(t) and the output soloution, y(t) if the initial condition of the system is x(0) = [ 1 0]T and u(t) is a unit step function.

[13 marks]

-6-

SEE 4113

A magnetic levitation system is described by state space representation model below and Figure Q4(a).

Question 4

dx jdt

dx 2-

1 1

w °

1 “-5

1 1

—< (N

X X

1 I

+'o'_i_

dt

u(t)

y{t) = [1 0} *\ (0 x2( t)

Figure Q4(a): state space representation of a plant with state variable feedback

Figure Q4(b): Integral control for steady state error design

-7-

(a). Determine the controllability of the system.

[ 2 marks]

(b). Design a controller with a configuration shown in Figure Q4(a), that will yield a 10% overshoot with a settling time of 0.5s.

[10 marks]

(c). Evaluate the steady state error for a unit step input.

[2 marks]

(d). What is the disadvantage of using state variable feedback in controller design and suggest how to overcome the problem.

[2 marks]

(e). Repeat the design of (b) using integral control as shown in Figure Q4(b) and evaluate the steady state error for a unit step input. Choose the third pole as 5 times farther than the dominant poles.

[9 marks]

SEE 4113

-8-

SEE 4113

Question 5

A pneumatic actuator system with servo valve system is described by a transfer function as

=------- lOCs + 2)------- (s + l)(s + 3)(s + 4)

(a). Determine the state space representation in Observer Canonical Form.

[2 marks]

(b). Determine the observability of the system.

[2 marks]

(c). Give three reasons of using observer in control system.

[3 marks]

(d). Why is the design of an observer is separated from the design of a controller?

[2 marks]

(e). Design an observer for the plant with 5% overshoot and 1 second peak time. The observer must respond 10 time faster than the plant. Place the third pole 20 times farther than the observed dominant pole.

[13 marks]

(f). Draw the signal flow graph for the plant and the observer.

[3 marks]

-9-

(a) Give two examples on how an optimal control is used in control engineering.

SEE 4113

Question 6

[2 marks]

(b) Consider a system with a state equation, x( t ) = Ax( t )+Bu( t ) and a closed-loop system with control input, u( t ) = Kx . By using the performance index

00

J = j* (xT Ix + Jiu T l l j j t 0

Prove that Jmin can be achieved by minimizing J = xT (O)Px(O)

Where I is an identity matrix, A, is a scalar weighting factor, x(0) is an initial condition and P is a symmetric matrix.

[7 marks]

(c) A linear DC motor system can be represented in a state-space form as

x(t) =0 1 O'

_° °.x(t) +

_1_u(t)

The performance of the system is quite unsatisfactory because an un-damped response results for a step input. To improve the system performance a feedback control is designed with

u( f ) = -x l ( t ) - kx 2 (t )

i) With the initial condition, xT (0) = [l l] determine the feedback gain k that minimizes the performance index

J = J {xTx + uT ujf i to

ii) Plot the performance index, J versus the gain k.[12 marks]

[4 marks]

-10-

Formula

1. RLC

SEE 4113

Capacitor

-WrResistor

v(/) = - i ( T ) d T i { ! ) = Cd4 v(t) =

v(/) = Ri(t)

di

R

C

dt

v(r)dr v{t) = L~ r̂

_1_Cs

Ls

Cs

r G

Ls

Note: The following set of symbols and units is used throughout this book: v(f) = V (volts), i(t) = A (amps), q{t) = Q (coulombs), C = F (farads), R = (1 (ohms), G = U (mhos), L = H (henries).

2. MSD

ComponentForce-

velocityForce- Impedancedisplacement ZM(s) = F(s)/X(s)

Spring

^ K

Viscous damperx ( / )

A n

Mass.v(/)

M An

f i t ) = K f ' v ( r ) dr f i t ) = Kx( t ) J o

f i t ) = ./;..v(f) f { t ) = f v

f i t ) = M -d v ( t )

d t

d x ( { )d t fvS

Ms 2

Note: The following set of symbols and units is used throughout this book: f \ ( ) = N (newtons), x ( t ) — m (meters), v ( t ) = m/s (meters/second), K = N/m (newtons/ meter), = N-s/m (newton-seconds/meter), M = kg (kilograms = newton-seconds2/meter).

3.XI - A] = 0

(AI-A)x = 0

4.T(s) = = C(sl - A) 1B + D

U(s)X = Pz

z = p-'x

z(t) = P~ xAPz(t) + P~ lBu(t)

y(t) = CPz{t) + Du(t)

-11-

SEE 4113

adj(sl - A)s i - A

® ( t ) = J ~ l [ ( s i - A y ] = * d ~ l

X ( s ) = { s i - A ) ' 1 [x(0) +

x ( t ) = L ~ l X ( s )

(k^ + k 2e^) (k 3e*+k Ae*J

[ k 5 e ^ + k 6 e ^ ) ( k 7 e ^ + k , e h t )

x ( t ) = 0(?).x(O) + j* 0(? - t ) . B . u ( t ) . c I t

0(0) = I

0(0) = A

0(0

-ln(%OS7100)

n 1 + ln2(%aS7100)

4T< =

^ = eonyl\-£2

K = \ k x k 2 k 3 ]

cM = [ b a b a 2 b

7

L = 2

I,

C

C A

C A 2

-12-

SEE 4113

7.

8.

X n =r-Cx

x = Ax + Bz/

X n = -Cx + r

y - Cx•Y A 0 X B "0"A — + w +

Xtv-C 0 0 1 _ -

N

y = [C 0]

= -Kx + K e x, t = -[K -K e \ux

' 'N•X "(A-BK) BKe X

+0

X n-C 0 x N

1

X

X,;y = [C 0}

e(oo) = l + C(A-BK)~ 1 B

J = | x T ( t )x ( t )d t => H T P + PH = - I

J = x T (0)Px(0)

J - \ u T ( f )u( t )d t => H T P + PH = -QJO

q = i + k t k

J = f [xT (0*(0 + u T ( t )u( t ) ]d t => H T P + PH = -(/ + 0JO

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

LECTURERS

SEE 1003

BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

DATO’ PROF. DR. AHMAD BIN DARUS

PROGRAMME SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET / SWB

SECTION

TIME

DATE

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

06 MAY 2011



2SEE 1003

Q1 (a) A voltage source Vs is connected to a resistive circuit consisting of three resistors

as shown in Figure Ql(a). Prove that the current flowing through R3 is given by:

R2h — ------ x V

“I" ̂ 2^3 ̂ 3^1 S

Ri

AA/V

K6

R2

Figure Ql(a)

(b) A resistive circuit is shown in Figure Q1 (b)

[5 marks]

Figure Ql(b)

i. Calculate the total resistance as seen by the source. [5 marks]

ii. Determine the current flowing through the 910 Q resistor.

[5 marks]

iii. Determine the voltage between points A and B.

[5 marks]

3SEE 1003

(c) An electric circuit is shown Figure Ql(c)

-1 A

Figure Ql(c)

i. Determine the power absorbed by the element B and F

[3 marks]

ii. Determine also whether the elements are active or passive.

[2 marks]

4SEE 1003

Q2 (a) State Kirchoff s Laws. [3 marks]

(b) Discuss clearly the importance of the concepts of supemode and supermesh in the

analyses of electrical circuits.

[5 marks]

(c) A resistive circuit energised by independent and dependent sources is shown in

Figure Q2(c). Using nodal analysis, determine the power available at all sources.

[17 marks]

10 Q

AA/V

15 Q 10 Q

Figure Q2(c)

5SEE 1003

Q3. (a) (i). Define capacitance. [2 marks]

(ii). Prove that the energy developed in a capacitor is given by

1 9 E c = - C V 2 c 2

[6 marks]

(b) The voltage across a 2pF capacitor is shown in Figure Q3(b). Determine the

expression for the current through the capacitor.

[10 marks]

vC(V)

c) Consider the circuit shown in Figure Q3(c-ii). Determine the charge on each

capacitor.

9 pF

24 V

r10 |u.F

= = 9 pF

72 pF

Figure Q3(c-ii)

[7 marks]

6SEE 1003

Q4 (a) Define what is time constant of a circuit.

[2 marks]

(b) Prove that the time constant of an RL circuit is given by

_£T~ R

[6 marks]

(c) In the circuit shown in Figure Q4(c), the switch K has been at position A for a

long time. It is moved to position B at a t = 0. Determine for time t> 0,

i. The current flowing through the switch K.

[15 marks]

i i . The output voltage v0 ( t ) .

[ 2 marks]

50 Q 50 Q

25 Q

Figure Q4(b)

Q5 (a) Explain what is meant by the effective values of an alternating signal.

[2 marks]

(b) The periodic waveform of a signal over one period is shown in Figure Q5(b).

Determine the effective value of the signal.

[8 marks]

7SEE 1003

10 11 12 13

Figure Q5(b)

(c) Figure Q5(c) shows a circuit consisting of resistor, inductors and capacitors

supplied by alternating voltage and current sources. By using phasor technique,

determine /'/ ( t) if

v2(t) = 0.7571 cos(21 + 66.7 ^ volt

v3(t) = 06064 cos(2t - 69.8 volt

[15 marks]

5 Q

Vi

Figure Q5(c)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 2063

ELECTRONICS DEVICES

LECTURERS MRS. NORHAFIZAH BT RAMLI

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEE / SEM / SET / SEW

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

13 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN PART A&B.

PLEASE USE ANSWER SHEET (PAGE 11) FOR THE OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS IN PART A AND SUBMIT THE PAPER WITH YOUR ANSWERING BOOKLET.


2SEE 2063

PART A : [Total 20 marks]

Choose the best answer for each question. Each question carries 1 mark.

Answer ALL questions on the answer sheet provided on page 11.

1. How does the conductivity in pure semiconductor vary with temperature?

A. Conductivity increases as temperature goes down

B. Conductivity increases as temperature goes up

C. Conductivity does not change with temperature

D. Conductivity decreases as temperature goes up

2. Doping is used to

A. Decrease the conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor.

B. Increase the conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor.

C. Stabilize the conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor.

D. Increase the insulative quality of an instrinsic semiconductor.

3. When a trivalent elements are used in doping, the resulting material is called_____

material and has an excess of__________ .

A. N-type: valence-band holes.

B. N-type: conduction-band electrons.

C. P-type: valence-band holes.

D. P-type: conduction-band electrons.

4. The isolated atomic structure associated with electron orbital shelss is called a/an

A. Conduction band

B. Energy band

C. Valence band

D. Energy gap

5. A positive ion is formed when

A. a valence electron breaks away from the atom

B. there are more holes than electrons in the outer orbit

C. two atoms bond together

D. an atom gains an extra valence electron

3SEE 2063

When a PN junction is reverse-biased, its junction resistance is

A. High

B. Low

C. Determined by the components that are external to the device

D. ... Constantly

A PN junction is forward biased when

A. The applied potential causes the N-type material to be more positive than the

P-type material.

B. The applied potential causes the N-type material to be more negative than the

P-type material

C. The applied potential causes the P-type material to be more negative than the

N-type material

D. Both materials are at the same potential.

Given a series silicon diode circuit with resistor R = 2 kH and an applied voltage of 10

Volts, what is Idq?

A. 4.65 mA

B. 1.0 mA

C. 10 mA

D. 0.5 mA

Why are bridge rectifiers prefered over full-wave center-tapped rectifiers?

A. They do not require the use of a center-tapped transformer.

B. They provide higher dc output voltages.

C. They require a lower PIV rating.

D. They require less space.

A half-wave rectifier utilizing a silicon diode is connected to an ac source with a voltage

of 20 Vmax. The dc output voltage is

A. 19.3 Vdc

B. 13.65 Vdc

C. 6.14 Vdc

D. 12.29 Vdc

4SEE 2063

11. Which of the following circuits is used to eliminate a portion of a signal?

A. A clipper

B. A clamper

C. A voltage multiplier

D. A voltage divider

12. Which of the following circuits is used to change the dc reference of a signal without

changing the shape of the signal?

A. A clipper

B. A clamper

C. A voltage multiplier

D. A voltage divider

13. The output voltage of the circuit in Figure A.12 will be clamped to

is silicon.

A. 10.7 V

B. 5.7 V

C. 4.3 V

D. 9.3 V

C = 1 nF

if the diode

Figure A.12

14. A Zener diode is designed to operate in the

A. Forward operating

B. Reverse bias

C. Reverse breakdown

D. Zero voltage

region of its characteristic curve.

5SEE 2063

15. In the cut-off region the base-emitter junction and the base-collector junctions of the

transistor are

A. Both forward biased

B. Both reverse biased

C. Base-emitter junction is forward biased, base-collector junction is reverse biased.

D. Base-emitter junction is reverse biased, base-collector junction is forward biased.

16. A given BJT has an alpha of 0.9985 and a collector current of 15 mA. What is the value

of base current?

A. 151.5 pA

B. 15.15 mA

C. 22.53 mA

D. 22.53 nA

17. A/An_________ is added to the fixed-biased configuration to improve bias stability.

A. Base voltage

B. Emitter resistor

C. Collector resistor

D. All of the above

18. When a BJT has its base-emitter junction forward biased and its base-collector junction

reversed biased, it is biased in the____________ .

A. Saturation region

B. Cut-off region

C. Active region

D. Passive region

19. The depletion type of MOSFET can operate in the

A. Depletion mode only

B. Enhancement mode only

C. Depletion mode and enhancement mode

D. None of the above.

20. Which of the following is true for an N-channel D-MOSFET that is being operated in the

6SEE 2063

depletion mode?

A. Id > Idss and VGs is positive

B. Id < Idss and VGs is negative

C. Id > Idss and VGs is negative

D. Id < Idss and Vgs is positive

End of Part A

7SEE 2063

PARTB: Instruction: Answer ALL questions in Part B.

QUESTION 1

a) Sketch V0 in relation to input signal Figure 1(a) for at least one complete cycle. AssumeVdzi = 3.3 V and all diodes are ideal diode.

1 kQ(6 marks)

'zi

3V

+

V.

b) Design a clamper circuit that gives a steady state input and output as shown in Figure 1(b). Draw the corresponding circuit with all the components labeled. Suggest a suitable load resistance value if use a 1 (iF capacitor. (6 marks)

V:_

5V

0 -

-5V

I i

+Clamper

V. circuit—► ln

t

f= 100 Hz

9.3V

V out 00.7V

f= 100 Hz

Figure 1(b)

c) Figure 1(c) shows a bridge rectifier for a regulated DC power supply. Draw the input signal, Vj, the rectified output, V0, and the filtered output Vrl. Clearly distinguish one signal from another and label all the peak voltages. What is the regulated DC output voltage?Assume all diodes are ideal. (8 marks)

+

240 V nns 50 Hz

'RL

Figure 1(c)

8SEE 2063

a) Given the device characteristic in Figure 2(a), determine Vcc, Rb, and Rc for the fixed- bias configuration of Figure 2(b). (6 marks)

QUESTION 2

rcc

Rr

Figure 2(b)

b) For the biasing network in Figure 2(c), determine:(0 Base current, Ib (4 marks)

(ii) Collector current, Ic (2 marks)(iii) Emitter voltage, Ve- (2 marks)(iv) Collector-to-emitter voltage, Vce (2 marks)(v) Draw the dc load line. Label Ic(sat), VcE(max), and the Q-points. (4 marks)

Figure 2 (c)

9SEE 2063

a) A self-bias circuit configuration of a depletion n-channel MOSFET has the following

parameters: Vdd = 20 V Rd = 6.2 kQ, Rg = 1 MQ and Rs = 2.4 kQ

(i) Sketch and label the circuit configuration. (2 marks)

(ii) Using data in Table 1, sketch the transfer characteristic curve, Id vs.Vgs-(3 marks)(iii) Identify the drain-source saturation current, loss, and the pinch-off voltage, Vp.

(2 marks)

(iv) Analyse the circuit, and determine the Q-point, IDq and Vdsq- (4 marks)

QUESTION 3

Table 1: Data for transfer characteristicId (mA) 0 0.5 2 4.5 8 12.5

VGS (V) -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2

b) The E-MOSFET network in Figure 3 has the following parameters:

Id(od) - 3 mA at Vgs = 4V and VGS(th) = 2 V. Determine the operating point, (VGs and Id)

and VDs. (9 marks)

V D D = +10V

Roi ?10 MQ T

^G2 $4.7 MQ

Figure 3

10SEE 2063

For the DTL gate of Figure 4 below, assume all conducting junctions to have a voltage drop of0.7 V.

4 V

QUESTION 4

a) Find the current through Di when VA = 0.2 V and Vb = 4 V. Also find the voltage at the base

of the transistor Qi. (5 marks)

b) If VA = Vb = 4 V, find the transistor base current, Ib. If VcEsat= 0.2 V, find the value of p.(5 marks)

c) Complete the truth table of Figure 4 below. Given VcEsat= 0.2 V. (8 marks)

VA(V) VB(V) Vx V Base Vy State of Qi1.2 1.24.0 1.21.2 4.04.0 4.0

d) Name the logic gate represented by Figure 4 (2 marks)

11SEE 2063

NAME: ICNo: Lecturer:Norhaflzah Ramli

Objective Question Answer Sheet (Part A):Shade your answer in the circle and return this paper with your answer script.

1. CD CD CD CD2. CD CD CD CD3. CD CD CD CD4. CD CD CD CD5. CD CD CD CD6. CD CD CD CD7. CD CD CD CD8. CD CD CD CD9. CD CD CD CD10. CD <D CD CD11. CD CD CD CD12. CD CD CD CD13. CD CD CD CD14. CD CD CD CD15. CD CD CD CD16. CD CD CD CD17. CD CD CD18. CD CD CD CD19. CD CD CD CD20 CD CD CD CD

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 2053

ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. MD. SHAH BIN MAJID DR. SAIFULNIZAM BIN ABD KHALID DR. MOHD JUNAIDI BIN ABDUL AZIZ

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEP / SET / SEW / SWB

01-02 /10

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

II MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ALL STUDENTS ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2SEE 2053

Q 1. (a) Show that for a balanced star and delta loads, the total real power (Pt) is given by

PT = V3F; /, cos 9

where Vl is line voltage

II is line current

cosd is a power factor [6 Marks]

(b) A three phase balanced supply is connected to a star connected 4 wire unbalanced

load. The loads are given as:

Blue Phase

Current magnitude =5A

Reactive Power (Q) =0.75 kVAr

Power factor = 0.9 leading

Yellow phase

Real power (P) = 9kW

Power factor = 0.92 lagging

The phase sequence is positive and use Vrn as reference. The neutral current is

1 Z90°A . Find

(i) Phase Voltages [3 Marks]

(ii) Line Currents [6 Marks]

(iii) Real and Reactive Power at red phase [4 Marks]

(iv) Total real and reactive power 16 Marks]

3SEE 2053

Q2. (a) Explain why constructing core is made of magnetic materials. [3 Marks]

■(b) How to reduce core loss in magnetic system. [3 Marks]

(c) A core with three legs is shown in Figure Q2(a). Its depth is 10 cm, and there are

500 turns on the center leg. The remaining dimensions are shown in the figure. The

core is composed of a steel having the magnetization curve shown in Figure Q2(b).

By assuming the flux leakage is negligible, answer the following questions about this

core:

(i) What current is required to produce a flux density of 0.75 T in the central

leg of the core? [5 Marks]

(ii) What current is required to produce a flux density of 1.5 T in the central

leg of the core? Is it twice the current in part (i)? [5 Marks]

(iii) What are the reluctances of the central and right legs of the core under the

conditions in part c(i)? [3 Marks]

(iv) What are the reluctances of the central and right legs of the core under the

conditions in part c(ii)? (3 Marks]

(v) What conclusion can you make about reluctances in real magnetic cores?

[3 Marks]

~T~10 cm

20 cm

10 cm

i

-10 cm- -20 crrr -15 cm- -20 cm- -10 cm-

Figure Q2(a)

4SEE 2053

Flux1.81.7

density 1.6B(T) 1.5

1.41 . •

1.21.1

10.90.80.70.6

0.40.30.20.1

0

0 200 400 600 800 100012001400160018002000220024002600280030003200

Magnetizing force H (At/m)

Figure Q 2 (b)

Q3. (a) With the help of diagrams, explain briefly how energy conversion process occurs in

an electromechanical energy conversion system. [6 Marks]

(b) In the electromagnetic system of Figure Q3(b), the exciting coil has N = 1000 turns.

The cross-sectional area of the core is A = 5 cm x 5cm. Reluctance of the magnetic

circuit may be assumed negligible. Also neglect leakage flux and fringing effect.

5SEE 2053

Immoveable part

Figure Q3(b)

X Nd> , . .(i) Starting from the definition of inductance L h — =--------------- , derive the coil

i i

inductance as a function of air gap x. [6 Marks]

(ii) What is the field energy when the coil current / = 10 A and air gap x = 2

mm. What is the force on the moveable part under these conditions.

[7 Marks]

(iii) Find the mechanical energy output when the air gap, x is reduced from

2mm to 1,5mm, assuming that the coil current is maintained constant at

10 A. [6 Marks]

Q4. (a) (i) Explain the leakage inductance in a transformer. |3 Marks]

(ii) Draw and label a complete transformer equivalent circuit. ]3 Marks)

6SEE 2053

(b) An impedance of 1.6+j 1.2 Q is connected to the secondary terminal of a 2400-240V

transformer. The primary is connected to a 2200V line. Assume the transformer is

ideal. Find:

(i) The secondary and primary current [2 Marks]

(ii) The impedance as seen at the line terminal [1 Marks]

(iii) Apparent power and real power at the output and input side [2 Marks]

(c) A 5 kVA, 2200/220 V, single-phase transformer has the following parameters:

high voltage side : R| = 3.4 Q, X \ = 7 . 2 Q ,

low voltage side : R2 = 0.028 Q , X2 = 0.06 Q,

The transformer is made to deliver rated current at 0.8 lagging power factor, to a load

connected on the low voltage side. If the load voltage is 220 V, find:

(i) The terminal voltage on the high voltage side. [6 Marks]

(ii) The efficiency if the core loss is 30 watts at rated voltage and frequency.

{3 Marks]

(iii) The readings of voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter for open-circuit test at

rated voltage and short-circuit test at rated current. The instruments are

connected on low voltage side for open-circuit test and high voltage side

short-circuit test. The no load current of the transformer is 3% of

full-load current. [5 Marks]

Q5. (a) Name four (4) main parts of a DC machine. Explain briefly the function of these parts?

[6 Marks]

(b) Draw the speed-torque characteristics of a DC series motor and from the nature of the

curve explain the applications of the series motor. [5 Marks]

(c) Give three (3) methods of speed control for a dc motor. [3 Marks]

(d) Briefly describe power losses in a shunt-connected dc motor. [5 Marks]

7SEE 2053

(e) Briefly explain at least four (4) differences between three phase induction machines

and three-phase synchronous machines. [6 Marks]

CONFIDENTIAL


DR. NORLAILI BTE MAT SAFRI DR. FAUZAN KHAIRI BIN CHE HARUN MR. CAMALLIL BIN OMAR MR. ABD HAMID BIN AHMAD MRS. ISMAWATI BTE ABD. GHANI MS. MITRA BTE MOHD ADDI


COURSE NAME ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT

LECTURERS DR. RUBITA BTE SUDIRMAN

PROGRAMME SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET / SEW

SECTION 01-07


DATE 15 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE : ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


-2-SEE 2253

Q.l

(a) An ideal voltage amplifier has a zero power signal dissipation and hence a zero power signal

loss in it. Give TWO other specifications of an ideal voltage amplifier.

[2 marks]

Vcc = + 20 V

+vn

Figure Ql(a)

(b) Referring to Figure Ql(a), given that [3 = 100, VT = 26 mV, VA = °o, Cbc = = 2 pF,

Cbe = C* = 12 pF and VBE= 0.7 V;

(i) Show that ICq = 1.05 mA. [2 marks]

(ii) Calculate the value of gm and rn . [2 marks]

(iii) Draw the hybrid-7i ac equivalent circuit at middle frequency. [2 marks]

(iv) Determine the mid-band voltage gain, Av = v0/vj and current gain, Af = i \JU. [4 marks]

(v) If CE is ignored, find the dominant high cut-off frequency for the amplifier. [4 marks]

-3-SEE 2253

Vcc = + 12 V

Figure Ql(b)

The amplifier in Figure Ql(b) has the following parameters: P = 100, VBe= 0.7 V,

O™ == 90.7 mS, rn = 1. 1 kQ, and VA = oo.

0) Give one advantage of the amplifier’s circuit configuration. [1 mark]

(ii) What is the function of coupling capacitor and bypass capacitor? [2 marks]

(iii) Draw the hybrid-7r ac equivalent circuit at middle frequency. [2 marks](iv) Determine the amplifier’s input impedance, Zj and output impedance, Z0. [2 marks]

(v) Calculate the mid-band voltage vain, Ay = v0/vj. [2 marks]

Figure Q2(a) shows a MOSFET amplifier circuit connected to a Sine to Square Wave Converter

with its input and output signals shown. Figure Q2(b) shows the characteristic curve of the

E-MOSFET. The parameters for the E-MOSFET are: k = 0.6 mA/V2, VG = 5 V and rds= oo.

-4-SEE 2253

Q.2

VDD = +15 V

Figure Q2(a): Amplifier Circuit with vs and v0 signals

-5-SEE 2253

lc<A)

Figure Q2(b): Characteristic Curve of E-MOSFET

(a) State two differences between a D-MOSFET and E-MOSFET. [2 marks]

(b) Name the amplifier's circuit configuration. [1 mark]

(c) Calculate the value of R2 and Rs, if the biasing values for VG = 5 V and Ri = 4 MQ. [4 marks]

(d) Draw the hybrid-rc ac equivalent circuit at middle frequency. [3 marks]

(e) Derive the equation for AVs- [3 marks]

(f) Calculate the input impedance, Zj. [1 mark]

(g) Calculate AVs, gm and RD if RSjg= 500 Q.. [7 marks]

(h) Determine the dominant low cut-off frequency, ft. [4 marks]

-6-SEE 2253

(a) State the advantages of an amplifier connected in cascode? [2 marks]

(b) In what situation will you use a Darlington pair configuration? [1 mark]

(c) Figure Q3 shows a multi-stage amplifier with cascade configuration. The transistors Qi and

Q2 have parameters as follows:

For Qi: loss = 8 mA; Vp = Vos(0ff) = “5 V; Idq = 2.03 mA; Vgsq = - 2.5 V, rdS= °o

For transistor Q2: (3 = 179; VA = 00; VT = 26 mV; VBe = - 0.73 V

(i) Name the amplifier’s configuration of each stage. [2 marks]

(ii) Obtain the Q-points (IBq, Icq and Vceq) for the 2nd stage of amplifier circuit.

[5 marks]

(iii) Calculate the ac parameters gmi of transistor Qi and gm2, and r^ of

tran s i stor Q2. [4 m arks]

(d) At middle frequency, obtain:

(i) The hybrid-n ac equivalent circuit. [3 marks]

(ii) Input impedance Zj, and output impedance Z0. [2 marks]

(iii) Voltage gain Avi = v0,/vj, AV2 - v0/v0i, and overall gain Avs = v0/vs. [6 marks]

Q.3

Figure Q3

-7-SEE 2253

Q.4

(a)

(b)

(i) States two specifications of an ideal op-amp.

(ii) What is the difference between a comparator and a Schmitt Trigger?

For circuit of Figure Q4(a), assume output saturate is at ±Vsat. If Ra = 10 kQ,

Rb= 20 kQ, R, = 5 kQ, R2= 20 kQ, Vsa,= ±10 V and Vref = 2 V:

(i) Derive the expression for VUTp and VLtp and determine V s when V0 = ±V.

(ii) Draw the transfer characteristic curve.

(iii) Draw the output waveform, V0 accurately if Vs = 5 sin 2007tt (V).

ref

V

Figure Q4(a)

(c) For an op-amp circuit in Figure Q4(b), voltages Va=Vb= sin cot (mV) and V, = V2

(mV). Determine and sketch the output waveforms of, Vqi and i0 .

10 kD

' 0 1

[2 marks]

[2 marks]

[6 marks]

[4 marks]

[3 marks]

0.5 + sin cot

[8 marks]

Figure Q4(b)

-8-SEE 2253

A differential amplifier circuit is given in Figure Q5.

(a) (i) What kind of coupling does the circuit employ?

(ii) Basic differential amplifier does not have the constant current source

in the circuit. What is so special about the constant current source?

(b) (i) Determine the equivalent resistance R0.

(ii) Derive the expression for Vo2 in the form of AdVd + ACVC where Ad is

the differential-mode gain, Ac is the common-mode gain, Vd = (V,-V2)

and Vc = (Vi+V2)/2. For Qi and Q2 transistor models, use pib instead of

gmVji for the dependent current sources.

Q.5

(c) Calculate Ad and Ac and then the CMRR in dB.

(d) If MOSFETs are used for Qi and Q2 instead of BJTs, will the CMRR be higher

or lower? Explain your answer.

Vcc

[1 mark]

[2 marks]

[4 marks]

[9 marks]

[5 marks]

[4 marks]

Figure Q5

-9-SEE 2253

Q.6

(a) Figure Q6(a) shows a block diagram of a negative feedback system.

Figure Q6(a)

(i) The main problem of an amplifier circuit without a feedback is stability.

Explain how a negative feedback can help stabilize the gain of an amplifier.

(ii) Derive the expression for gain with feedback, Af in terms of A and p.

(iii) Write down the expressions for the input impedance, Rjf and the output

impedance, Rof, in terms of A and (3 for trans-resistance amplifier.

[3 marks]

[3 marks]

[2 marks]

(iv) Show that an expression in (ii) above will result in the gain with feedback

becoming smaller than the gain without feedback. [2 marks]

(b) A trans-resistance amplifier (with voltage-parallel feedback) is shown in Figure Q6(b).

-10-SEE 2253

Figure Q6(b)

Given that the open loop gain of the amplifier, (.1 = 106 V/A, the differential input resistance,

Rid =10 kQ and the output resistance, r0 = 5 kQ. Use the feedback method to:

(0v

Calculate the voltage gain without feedback, A = —.i,

[5 marks]

00 Calculate the feedback ratio for the feedback network, p = —.Vo

[4 marks]

(iii)v

Calculate the closed-loop gain, Af = —.is

[2 marks]

(iv) Calculate the input impedance R,f and output impedance Rof. [4 marks]

SIGNIFICANT EQUATIONS

- 1 1 -SEE 2253

Av =-2sa- = A v.„ v(oc)

R, fT =2jt(Ck+CJ Pfft

vA..„ =-SHL = A R ,

v(oc) Z +R R. + Z,A,

L /V s i J

r Z, ^VRs +Z; J

AVSR = —2- V/lls

At

A; A v(oc)' Z, A

VÔ + R-L jV , = V c + ■

A v(oc) Z +R,Y Rs ^ A r rs )A R« + Z, .

- Ai1 Rc +Z.

Ap=-â- = AvAi Pin

vo = Advd +Acvc

rF = r„ +h oBmV.RE + R CM, = Cbc(l-Av) = Cgd (l - A v )

R„ = r. PR E3 R„1+ -

V Re3 +r it +RBB ro J

c = cMo beV AV J

= c = cMo gd

1 = ID DSS rds ='

7 = Cr 5m &mof V A

] GS

V. v p y ‘DSS

, D(on)

Iv - V VV GS(on) Th /

l„=k(Vos-V,J21,

V

= 2k{VG S-VJ h) = 2^V

Jsin x dx = -cos x jcos x dx = sin

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEL 4363

COURSE NAME DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

LECTURERS DR. MUSA BIN MOHD MOKJI

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC/SEL

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY. NOTES AND ORIGINAL BOOKS ALLOWED.CALCULATORS ARE ALLOWED.

ARE


- 2 -SEL 4363

QUESTION 1

Figure Ql.l

Figure Ql.l is an 8 bit image and its histogram is shown in Figure Q1.2.

a)

b)

State two differences between piecewise linear transformation and histogram equalization.

(4 marks)

Sketch the histogram of the output image for each technique given below when applied to the image shown in Figure Ql.l

i. Power-law transformation with y = 0.5 and c = 1ii. Negative image

c) Describe how the output image will look like if image in Figure Ql.l is:

(8 marks)

i. First applied with histogram equalization and then transformed with linear transformation where s = r — 50.

ii. First transformed with linear transformation where s = r — 50 and then applied with histogram equalization.

(8 marks)

d) Sketch the piecewise linear transformation function (the transformation line) that can be used to improve the contrast of image in Figure Ql.l. Minimum gray value of the output image should be at 0 while the maximum gray value must equals to 255.

(5 marks)

-3-SEL 4363

QUESTION 2

Figure Q2.1 Figure Q2.2

Figure Q2.1 shows an 8bit image with the size of 100x100 with a 10x50 rectangular white (gray value = 255) box as foreground and black (gray value = 0) as background. Figure Q2.2 is then the magnitude frequency spectrum of the image in Figure Q2.1.

a) If Figure Q2.1 is denoted as f ( x , y ) and Figure Q2.2 is F(k, /), compute F(0,0).(6 marks)

b) Explain whether statements below are true or false and give your reason to support it.

i. Vertical edges in the image of Figure Q2.1 contribute to a single frequency in the magnitude spectrum shown in Figure Q2.2.

(4 marks)

ii. Frequency for area other than edges in Figure Q2.1 is located on the DC component.

(4 marks)

c) Given a filter in frequency domain as below where Hh p is a highpass filter and /? is a constant.

H = Hh p(f i - 1) + 1

i. Describe the output image when image in Figure Q2.1 is passed through with the filter H for /? = 0.3.

(5 marks)

ii. Suggest the value for /? so that filter H will act as a sharpening filter and the value for /? such that it will act as an allpass filter.

(6 marks)

-4-SEL 4363

Two images have been captured using one camera at uniform illumination. The first image is a uniform gray board where its histogram is shown in Figure Q3.1. The second image captured is shown in Figure Q3.2.

a) Determine the type of noise which degraded both images captured by the camera.(2 marks)

b) Estimate mean and variance of the noise that degraded both captured images.(6 marks)

c) In ‘Adaptive Local Noise Reduction Filtering’ technique, given below are the two possible outputs of the filter. Based on the two outputs, determine which one will be the output for the areas shown by the three square regions (A, B and C) shown in Figure Q3.2. Explain your answer.

/0,y) = g ( x , y )

or

avf ( x , y ) = g ( x , y ) ----- j [ g ( x , y ) - mjaL

(9 marks)

d) In case the camera used to capture image in Figure Q3.2 is not available and Figure Q3.1 is also not available, which of the three square region A, B and C that can be used to estimate the parameter of noise corrupting the image. Explain your answer.

(4 marks)

e) Suggest other two spatial filters that can be used to remove the noise in the image shown in Figure Q3.2

(4 marks)

-5-SEL 4363

QUESTION 4Gray value

Figure Q4.1

In order to identify the number or code on the barcode image shown in Figure Q4.1, width for each of its bar (vertical lines) needs to be measured. As a guide, Figure Q4.2 shows a gray value plot taken across line a-b. (Note: Figure Q4.2 is not image histogram)

a) To measure the width of the bar, image in Figure Q4.1 should be first threshold. Thus, Figure Q4.1 will have only 2 values, one for the background and zero for the foreground. Then the width of the bar can be measured by counting the number of columns occupied by the value one and zero. The question is, between global thresholding and adaptive thresholding, which one is better for this application. Explain your answer.

(5 marks)

b) If global thresholding is to be applied to the image in Figure Q4.1, suggest a suitable threshold value.

(5 marks)

c) Instead of thresholding, the width of the bar can also be measured by first finding edges of the bar and then measuring the distance between the edges. Figure Q4.3 is an example of a first order derivative edge detector operator.

-1 1

Figure Q4.3

i. Sketch the gray value plot for the image at scan line a-b (such as in Figure Q4.2) when operator in Figure Q4.3 is applied to the image in Figure Q4.1.

(5 marks)

ii. Based on results in (i), explain how the width of the bar can be measured(5 marks)

iii. If the above operator is replaced with Sobel operator, explain the differences that might occur in the output image.

(5 marks)

- 6 -SEL 4363

QUESTION 5

Figure Q5.1

Figure Q5.2

Figure Q5.1 shows a 3 bit image with histogram as shown in Figure Q5.2. This image is to be stored in a memory disk which has only 120 bit of free memory.

a)

b)

c)

List down the three types of redundancy(3 marks)

Which type of redundancy can be found in Figure Q5.1? Explain your answer(6 marks)

One such method of compressing image in Figure Q5.1 is based on Figure Q5.3 below. Compute the size in bit of the compressed image shown in Figure Q5.3.

(8 marks)

InputImage

QUANTIZER: MAPPER:Quantization Run Length

into 2 bit image Coding

CompressedImage

Figure Q5.3

d) It is known that size of compressed image in (c) is not small enough to be stored in the memory disk. Suggest other compression method (can be lossless or lossy) that can result an output with size less than the 120 bit. Show all computation.

(8 marks)

-7-SEL 4363

a) Compute the size in bits of a 100x100 image which consists only gray values 0 and 1. Bit depth of this image is 8 bit.

(3 marks)

b) What is the difference between binary image and 1 bit image?(4 marks)

c) Explain whether quantization process can be used to binarize an image. If yes, give one disadvantage of using quantization as a binarization process. If no, give an alternative technique for the image binarization process.

(6 marks)

d) What is gray value normalization and give one example of its usage.(6 marks)

e) Explain whether the processes below can be used for image compression. If yes, state which type of redundancy that is removed from the process.

(6 marks)i. Quantizationii. Normalizationiii. Resize into smaller image.

QUESTION 6

*

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEP 4243

BIOSYSTEM MODELING

LECTURERS DR. AKRAM GASMELSEED ABDALLA MUKHTAR

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE THERE ARE FOUR (4) QUESTIONS, ANSWER ALL.READ THE QUESTIONS CAREFULLY. ORGANIZE YOUR WORK AND WRITE LEGIBLY.


2SEP4243

a) Consider an enzymatic reaction in which an enzyme can bind two substrate molecules, so it can exist in one of three states, namely as a free molecule E, and as a complexes C/ and C2, as follows:

Question 1 [25 marks]

S + EZ=r C} —E + P ^2

s + CiZ~r c9— c} +p k.

Write down the rate equations for the concentrations [S], [Cj], and [C2]?

[6 marks]

b) Draw a diagram showing the architecture of n-compartment closed system. Give the first order differential equations describing the rate of change of concentration for the traced substance (Qj) with time.

[6 marks]

3SEP4243

c) Figure 1 shows the flow of insulin in the body. A patient is given an insulin injection in the upper arm. The insulin then dissolves into the bloodstream. Once in the blood, insulin flows to and from the kidneys, as well as to and from the pancreas.

Figure 1

i. Determine the rate equations for this system.

[2 marks]

ii. Write a MATLAB code to solve these equations for the concentration of insulin in each compartment. (Assume Kin = 2, Ki2= 1, K2i = 1.5, K]3 = 2, K3j = 1.75)

[6 marks]

iii. Write a MATLAB code to plot the concentrations of insulin in kidneys compartment for up to 10 minutes. (The only initial condition is X4(t) = 25, other initial conditions are 0)

[5 marks]


a) Describe with aid of compartmental analysis the “entrohepatic circulation”?

[5 marks]

b) Define hypertonic, hypotonic, and isotonic and their relationship with osmosis into and out of cells.

[4 marks]

c) Determine the factors that affect Renal Clearance (CIr).

[3 marks]

d) Describe the two-compartment model of Renal Clearance (Cl#).

[5 marks]

e) Complete the following function code which can be used to solve the Renal Clearance (Clfi) rate equations:

function clearance = renal(t,y)

c = y(l); % central compartment p = y(2); % peripheral compartment

4SEP4243

[8 marks]

5SEP4243

a) The Hodgkin-Huxley model can be understood with the help of Figure 2. The semi permeable cell membrane separates the interior of the cell from the extracellular liquid and acts as a capacitor. If an input current Ist(t) is injected into the cell, it may add further charge on the capacitor, or leak through the channels in the cell membrane. Because of active ion transport through the cell membrane, the ion concentration inside the cell is different from that in the extracellular liquid.


jj-+/ inside *v

:. + + + + + + :

\ outside â+

Figure 2. Schematic diagram of neuron cell membrane

i. Draw the electrical equivalent circuit of a neuron, including membrane capacitance and Na+, C1-, and K+ ion channels.

[3 marks]

ii. Write the current/voltage equations for the electrical circuit.

[3 marks]

iii. Derive the Hodgkin-Huxley equation describing the rate of change of membrane potential as a function of ion conductances.

[3 marks]

iv. Describe the rate of change of opening of K+ channel.

[3 marks]

6SEP4243

b) The arm in Figure 3 weighs 41.5 N. The force of the gravity acting on the arm acts through point A. Assume that Li = 0.082 m, L2 = 0.273 m and a = 14.0°.

Figure 3 Schematic diagram of human arm

i. Determine the magnitude of the tension force Ft in the deltoid muscle.

[4 marks]

ii. Determine the magnitude of the tension force Fs of the shoulder on the humerus (upper-arm bone) to hold the arm in the position shown.

[4 marks]

iii. Determine the angle of tension force Fs relative to the x-axis, 0.

[4 marks]

7SEP4243


a) Poisson equation is a class of elliptic partial differential equations. A form of the Poisson equation is:

d2<f> d2<f> _ P d x 2 + d y 2 ~ T

i. Solve Poisson equation using the central finite difference method?[5 marks]

ii. Construct a MATLAB script segment that models the above equation in 1 cm2

membrane that firmly fastened. Assume — = 0.5T [5 marks]

b) The following reaction stoichiometry describes the aerobic growth of yeast on ethanol.

CH3CH2OH + aC>2 + bNHh ---------------------- ► cCH1704N0.149O0.408 dC02 + eH20

i. Write the mass balance equations in the standard linear form A*x = b.

[5 marks]

ii. Find the stoichiometry coefficients? Assume the respiratory quotient (RQ) is equal 0.66

[5 marks]

8SEP4243

c) In muscle fiber, Oxygen (O2) is bound to Myoglobin (Mb), a much larger molecule, and is transported as Oxymyoglobin (Mb02) through the following chemical reaction:

Write down the set of diffusion equations to model the concentration of the different chemicals? Assume: s = [O2], e = [Mb], c = [MbC^] and let f denote the rate of uptake of Oxygen into Oxymyoglobin.

[5 marks]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SET 4543

COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD KAMAL BIN A. RAHIM

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SET

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

26 APRIL 2011



-2-SET 4543

Q1 (a) Draw the block diagram of the RF front end transmitter and a receiver and

discuss the significant of each block. What is the effect of image frequency in

the receiver circuit. (15 marks)

(b) An amplifer with a bandwidth of 1 GHz has a gain of 15 dB and a noise

temperature of 250 K. If the 1 dB compression point occurs for an input power

level of-10 dBm, with a suitable diagram, show linear dynamic range, 1 dB

compression point, minimum detectable signal and calculate the linear dynamic

range (10 marks)

ANSWER FOUR QUESTIONS ONLY

(Total marks = 25 marks)

Q2 A band pass filter receiver with a specification below must reject an adjacent channel

signal that is 160 MHz away from center frequency:

• Upper frequency: f3dBH = 2170 MHz

• Lower Frequency f3dBL = 2110 MHz

• Selectivity (out-of-band attenuation) minimum 30 dB at f2 = 2300 MHz

• Response type: Chebyshev with 0.5 dB

• Source and load impedance: 50Q.

(a) Find the filter order number (6 marks)

(b) Determine the inductance and capacitor of the bandpass filter using n network

(6 marks)

(c) Draw the band pass filter circuit diagram using L and C components

(4 marks)

(d) If the response is change to maximally flat response, find the new number of

filter order and the advantages of using this response (9 marks)


-3-SET 4543

Q3 An amplifier has to be designed with maximum Gtu using transistor with the following S parameter (Z0 = 50 ohm) at 6 GHz:

5„ = 0.61Z-170", S 2 1 = 2.24Z32", S12 = 0, S22 = 0.72Z-83°

(i) Determine the stability of this amplifier. (4 marks)

(ii) What are source impedance and load impedance. (4 marks)

(iii) Find the maximum gain. (4 marks)

(iv) Design matching network using L section matching network. (13 marks)


Q4 Design a transistor oscillator at 6 GHz using FET in common source configuration driving a 50 ohm load on the drain side. The S parameters are

S u = 0.9Z-1500, S 2 ] = 2.6Z500, S ] 2 = 0.2Z-150, S22 = 0.5Z-1050

(i) Calculate and plot the output stability circle and choose a suitable Tx for |rj„|»l •

(10 marks)(ii) Design the load and terminating network (15 marks)


Q5 (a)(b)

(c)

Draw a balance mixer circuits using a 90° hybrid. (6 marks)If the RF input is given by v^^) = VRF cos coRFt and local oscillator input is given by v L 0 { t ) = VL0 coscoLOt. Using this balance mixer circuit, analyze the output after filtering process. (14 marks)If v^r(t) = 2cos(2^500x 106)t and v L 0 ( t ) = cos(2^ x 450 x 106) t , show that

after filtering process the output will be i I F (t ) = - K 2 sin(2;r x 50 x 106) t , where

K is the constant value (5 marks)'0 j 1 O'

The S parameter for 90° hybrid junction is [S'] = — =\ 2

j 0 0 1

1 o 0 j 0 1 j 0


-4-SET 4543

Transistor Equations

s„s„rr i n = s u + ^ ^ L i-s22rL

_ B} ± -J -5 , 2 -4 |C] | 2

2C,

9 rr - ^ ■ 12 2i ^1 out 22 i c r 1

r, =52±J5/-4C2

2C,

5, = l + | s n | - |<y - |a | 5 2 =r+ |5 2 2 | 2 - |S I 1 | 2 - |A | 2

C.^ . -AS** C 2 = S22 - AS, ,*

A = SUS22 — Sl2S2l

l - l - S - . , ! ’ + | A | "K

cL i^r-iAi2

Cc =_ (‘S'l 1 AS22 )

A|:

G; = ■ '1^2112 i- r,

Rs =

S\ 2$21

w-w2

^12^21l^n|2-|A|2

_ {$22 )7' _ ,2 I |2 5

22 ""A.

Sl2S2[

rs| M22r,

p~ |i-rrr,n|2|i-s22rLj2

9 9 rr — c , ° i2°2i 1 r

’ in 11 i-s22n,

Filters TransformationLow-pass

St* J .CO.

Sk

co„R

High-pass

<*>Mk

R

®cgk

Band-pass

skR

A

o>oSkR

AR

0JoSk

gk&R

01, AR

Band-stop

l“>„gk&R

R

a „ g k A

. S j A- conR

-5-SET 4543

Table 1 Element values of equal ripple Low pass filter prototype for 0.5 dB rippleN gi g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 g7 gs g 9 gio1 0.6986 1.0000

2 1.4029 0.7071 1.9841

J 1.5963 1.0967 1.5963 1.000

4 1.6703 1.1926 2.3661 0.8419 . 1.9841

5 1.7058 1.2296 2.5408 1.2296 1.7058 1.000

6 1.7254 1.2479 2.6064 1.3137 2.4758 0.8696 1.9841

7 1.7372 1.2583 2.6381 1.3444 2.6381 1.2583 1.7372 1.0000

8 1.7451 1.2647 2.6564 1.3590 2.6964 1.3389 2.5093 0.8796 1.9841

9 1.7501 1.2690 2.6678 1.3673 2.7239 1.3673 2.6678 1.2690 1.7054 1.0000

10 1.7543 1.2721 2.6754 1.3725 2.7392 1.3806 2.7231 1.3485 2.5239 0.8842

Table 2 Element values of Maximally flat Low pass filter prototype

N gi §2 g3 g4 gs g6 g? g8 g9 gio

1 2.000 1.0000

2 1.4142 1.4142 1.0000

3 1.0000 2.0000 1.0000 1.0000

4 0.7654 1.8478 1.8478 0.7654 1.0000

5 0.6180 1.6180 2.0000 1.6180 0.6180 1.0000

6 0.5176 1.4142 1.9318 1.9318 1.4142 0.5176 1.0000

7 0.4450 1.2470 1.8019 2.0000 1.8019 1.2470 0.4450 1.0000

8 0.3902 1.1111 1.6629 1.9615 1.9615 1.6629 1.1111 0.3902 1.0000

9 0.3473 1.0000 1.5321 1.8794 2.0000 1.8794 1.5321 1.0000 0.3473 1.0000

10 0.3129 0.9080 1.4142 1.7820 1.9754 1.9754 1.7820 1.4142 0.9080 0.3129

(dB)

- 6 -SET 4543

iHFigure 1 Attenuation versus normalized frequency for equal ripple

filter prototypes 0.5 dB

Figure 2 Attenuation versus normalized frequency for maximally flat filter

-7-SET 4543

NAMC TITL£ ' ' '------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ------—— OWt. NO

SMTh CHART FORM 52-BSPW (9-86J KAr ELECT r ic comi*ny, PINE BBOOR.N.O, O IMS. PWINTCD in USa' MTS

IMPEDANCE OR ADMITTANCE COORDINATES

mA I—I WIT

SET 4543NAME TITLC ' “ " ~ ------------------------------------------------- ------------------ OW*. NO

S**TH CHART FOWd 82-B5PP (S-QS1 KAY ELECTRIC COMHHt, PIMC BROOK. Ni, QlM«. M»|NTCO IN USA OATl

IMPEDANCE OR ADMITTANCE COORDINATES

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEI4143

COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL

LECTURERS DR. NORHALIZA BT ABDUL WAHAB

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEI

01

3 HOURS

28 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER ANY FOUR (4) QUESTIONS (25 MARKS EACH). YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ATTACH THIS EXAM QUESTION TO YOUR ANSWER BOOKLET.


Ql.a. In process control design, setting the control objectives requires an engineer to

have a clear understanding of the process. Describe four major categories of

control objectives.

[4 marks]

-2-SEI4143

(1.1)

b. Figure Ql(b) shows a liquid level system in a tank. Your goal is to determine the

relationship between the input flow rate, q, and the output level of the liquid in

the tank, h. The differential equation of the level of liquid in the tank, h is derived

based on the component material balance equation and is given by:

dhdt A t

where equation (1.1) is nonlinear and the constant parameters are (A, - cross-

sectional area of the tank, Aor - cross-sectional area of an orifice, g - gravity (g =

!))■i. Prove that equation (1.1) can be linearized using Taylor series expansion and

is written as follows:

dh'__ q'i Aor^ h,dt A, 2A,Jh,

(1.2)

where the deviation variables given as h' = h-hsand q] = qt -qls

Note: The subscript s denotes steady state values

[8 marks]

-3-SEI4143

ii. Find the transfer function which relate the output level of the liquid in the

tank, h and the input flow rate, q, such as G ( s ) - —Q'\s)

[5 marks]

c. Name two modelling methods to develop the mathematical model for a chemical

process. Give one advantage and one disadvantage of each method.

[4 marks]

d. State whether the following statements are either TRUE or FALSE:

i. Usually, the models used in process reaction curve methods take the form of

high-order transfer functions with dead time which is capable of predicting

most aspects of the process performance. (TRUE/FALSE).

ii. Empirical modeling is mostly effective when there are a lot of process input

and output data available and formulating the fundamental model is difficult.

(TRUE/FALSE).

iii. The statistical process estimation approach requires extensive computation

and only works for step inputs. (TRUE/FALSE).

iv. When conducting an experiment using process reaction curve approach, the

focus will always be between one specific input and one specific output

variables of a process plant only. (TRUE/FALSE).

[4 marks]

a. Briefly describe two situations where you should use the following control

strategies:

i. Feedforward control

ii. Cascade control

iii. Inferential control

[6 marks]

b. Consider the stirred-tank reactor with cooling jacket as shown in Figure Q2(b).

The control objective is to keep the temperature, T at a desired value. Possible

disturbances to the reactor are the feed temperature, T and the coolant

temperature, Tc. The manipulate variable is the coolant flow rate, Fc.

Observation '. T will respond much faster to changes in 7} than to changes in Tc

i. Based on the above observation, briefly comment on the control

performance in term of disturbance rejection (r, and Tc) if only single-loop

control is implemented in the system shown in Figure Q2(b).

[3 marks]

ii. Design a suitable control strategy using two different measurements, T and

Te, but sharing a common manipulated variable, Fc. Sketch the required

changes of your design in Figure Q2(b).

[4 marks]

iii. Draw a block diagram for the control strategy given in part ii and label the

input-output relationship completely.

[3 marks]

c. The approximate model for the system shown in Figure Q2(b) is obtained using

empirical method and is given as:

, 0.039e~55s

-4-SEI4143

Q2.

i. Determine the tuning constant for a feedback PID controller for a

disturbance response (step in T,:) using the Ciancone tuning correlation

procedures.

-5-SEI4143

Note: Use the Ciancone correlation graph in the attachment to determine the

dimensionless tuning constant based on the calculated fraction dead time.

[9 marks]

T,

Figure Q2(b)

Digital control has many advantages compared to analog control. Briefly describe

two main advantages of digital systems.

[3 marks]

Consider a flash separation system given in Figure Q3(b) with flow and level

control using discrete PID controller. The performance of the system under

discrete PID controller depends on the selection of execution period. Given the

process transfer functions for the two controllers as below:

i. If the digital execution from discrete PID controller is assumed not

significantly affect the control performance, determine the maximum

execution period for each controller (for flow, F and level, L).

[3 marks]

ii. Design two (2) digital PID controllers for disturbance response of each

variable (flow and level) using the execution period defined in part b) i.

iii. Considering the effect of an execution period in digital control, design two

(2) digital PID controllers for disturbance response of each variable (flow and

level) when the execution period is set to 4 minutes.

Briefly discuss the effect of the performance of a discrete PID controller with

respect to the length of the execution period implemented in part part b) ii and iii.

[6 marks]

[6 marks]

[3 marks]

d. The final step in the controller tuning procedure is fine-tuning the initial

controller tuning constant until acceptable performance is obtained. Based on

the dynamic response of the control system shown in Figure Q3(d), diagnose

the performance given by plant A, B and C and suggest one suitable corrective

action for plant C.

[4 marks]

- 7 -SEI4143

Feed

_► Vapor

SteamA— Liquid

Figure Q3(b)

Figure Q3 (d)

Time

SEI4143

Figure Q4(a) shows the three series tank of mixing process. The outlet concentration

is to be maintained close to its set point using proportional-only feedback algorithm

(P-only controller). All tanks are considered well-mixed and the dynamics of the

valve and sensor are negligible. Assuming that FB^> FA, the linearized models have

been derived. The process transfer function, Gp(s) and disturbance transfer function,

Gd(s) are given as:

0039

Q4.

<5) (5s + l)3

*«(» (5j + 1)3

a. Determine the stability of the three-tank mixing process for a disturbance change

if no controller is applied (Kc is set to zero).

[5 marks]

b. The system shown in Figure Q4(a) was simulated with a PI controller using

Ziegler-Nichols tuning method. Two different disturbance dynamics have been

tested to the system as follows: (Case 1: Gdi and Case 2: Gdi)

1(5s + l)3

1(5s + l)

Based on the simulation result of the above two cases, the dynamic response of

the system shows better performance in Case 1. Explain by giving at least one

reason for this observation.

[3 marks]

-9-SEI4143

B XAO

Figure Q4(a)

c. Consider the block diagram of the distillation process shown in Figure Q4(c). The

reflux ratio is the manipulated variable, m and the control objective is to maintain

the overhead product composition, y. The feed composition, d is the unmeasured

disturbance. Since the feed and overhead composition are considered unmeasured,

the inferential control configuration can be used to control an unmeasured

controlled output, y in the presence of unmeasured disturbances, d.

i. Given the input-output relationship of the system as follows:

y = G p l ( s ) m + G d l ( s ) d

z = G p 2 (s ) m + G d 2 ( s ) d

where y and z are unmeasured variable and measured variable, respectively.

Based on the above equations, prove the following estimator which relates the

unmeasured controlled output, y and the measured variables ( m and z) :

y-, . Gj, (s)

g p 1 ( s ) - ^ \ 4 g />2(*) m +Gdi (■s')

[5 marks]

ii. Redraw the block diagram given in Figure Q4(c) including the estimator

proven in part (i) to show the inferential control system structure.

[6 marks]

iii. For a given transfer function as follows:

T ] s

K n ,GAs)= P

-10-SEI4143

Vs+ 1

G d l ( s ) - -td,s + \

T p S + 1

£Vr + 1

show that in order to maintain zero steady-state deviation in y in response to a

disturbance D ( s ) = , the relationship between the gains of the inferred and the j

Kactual plants transfer function must be such that —— = ——.

K H * , 2[6 marks]

Feed

Figure Q4(c)

-11-SEI4143

a. Process interaction is one of major problem in multivariable control. Briefly

discuss the definition of ‘interaction’.

[3 marks]

b. The model derived by the empirical procedure for a distillation tower are as

follows with time in minutes:

Q5.

" 12.8e-1 -18.9e“31"

X D ( f ) 16.75 + 1 215 + 1X B { s ) _ 6.6e“7' -19.4e~3'5 LWJ

.10.95 + 1 14.45 + 1 .

i. Determine whether the input-output combination is controllable

[4 marks]

ii. Determine if either loop pairing can be eliminated based on the sign of the

relative gains (Ay > 0 ) .

[5 marks]

iii.Determine the initial tuning for PI controllers for all allowable loop

pairings.

[10 marks]

c. List down three approaches that typically used for tuning multiloop systems

[3 marks]

Attachment

-12-SEI4143

Table of Commonly Used EquationsComponent Material Balance

{Accumulation of component mass}= {component mass in}-{component mass out}

+ {generation of component mass}Energy Balance {Accumulation of U + PE + KE}={U+PE+KE in due to convection}

-{U+PE+KE out due to convection}+o -w

Taylor Expansion rv \ cv \ d F / \ 1 d 2 F / \2 F ( x ) - F ( x ) + ( x - x j + , ( x x j + . . .s d x X

K s J 2! d x Vxs Xs

General 2nd order system G ( s ) = --------^-----------j

s + 2Qa>ns + con

Peak Time relationship

-T _ *

Overshootrelationships

Uy 1%OS = e vx j oo

Continuous form PID algorithm M V ( t ) = k c E { t ) + y\E{t')dt'-Td^^- +/

•*/ o at j

Continuous PID (in Laplace Domain)

M V ( s ) = K cf E ( s ) 'I

E ( s ) + - ^ - - T d s C V ( s )I T i s J

Discrete PID controller M V ( t ) = K e

At N T^+^t£^-t7(ckw-cfw.1) +/

l j ,=1 Ar J

Ciancone correlations for Dimensionless tuning constants, PID algorithm.

-13-SEI4143

Disturbance (a,b,c) Set point change (d,e,f)

0 .10 .20 JO AC JSO £0 ,70 .*0 .90 1.0

I'racuon «ad time

»>

fraction dead umc (g^;)

1.0

m m

LG J»V.90 - .90 /̂ SVJO ,30.70 r*® c\?

X -60 / + -60® 30 S -50

- / •JO * J -,20 . 20 '40

I.,,.—.I.—.L.......J------AO

m ... ’..... *..—1...■«.—i---3-----»---1--- 1---0 .10 .20 JO .*V .50 .60 .70 .#0 .90 1,0

r.'m tion tlewi lime

( c )

.40

30

% .20

.10

,40

. ,30 -+5 ,20 ✓ \S*

p/5 \ I Q \-- J-1-U —«--- i— m f t * , , ,

0 .10 ,20 JO AO .50 M .10 JO .90 1.0

Fraction *k*d time

« )

0 .10 JO JO .40 JO .«> ,70 JO .» \J0

frastkmcteidHme (^)

( / )

Ciancone correlations for Dimensionless tuning constants, PI algorithm.

Disturbance (a,b) Set point (c,d)

-14-SEI4143

Fraction dead time (g+

( « )Fraction dead time

( c )

Fraction dead time

a »

+

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0-8 0.9 1.0

Fraction dead time

( J )

-15-SEI4143

Relationship between single-loop (SL) and multi-loop (ML) PI controller tuning when both loops have similar dynamics.

( a )

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEL 4263

COMPUTER SYSTEMS & MULTIMEDIA

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. SULAIMAN BIN MOHD NOR DR. USMAN ULLAH SHEIKH MR. ZURAIMI BIN YAHYA

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEE / SEM / SEP / SET / SEW

0 1 - 0 3

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

10 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A : ANSWER ALL THREE QUESTIONS. PART B : ANSWER ONE (1) QUESTION ONLY.

FOR QUESTION 1 AND 3 ANSWER IN THE RESPECTIVE BLANK SPACES ALLOCATED TO THE QUESTIONS.


*

SEL 4263

PART A

Question 1 (One mark for every answer)(Write your answers in the respective blank space given in the Question)

a. Given the initial condition

int n = 4 , k = 2;

what will the value of n be, if the following statement is executed. The statements are unrelated from each other during the execution process.

n.

k=n++;//

k=++n;//

ANS: n =

ANS: n =

, k :

, k =

(4 marks)

b. Assuming n = 4, k = 0, determine if the result of the following C++conditionalstatement is TRUE or FALSE?

i. IF (n = 4) // ANSii. IF (n == 4) // ANSiii. IF (n > 3) // ANSiv. IF (n < 4) // ANSV. IF (k = 0) // ANSvi. IF (n == k) // ANSvii. IF (n > k) // ANSviii. IF (n && 4) // ANSix. IF (n 1 1 k) // ANSX. IF ( !n) // ANSxi. IF ( ! k) // ANS

(11 marks)

c. What is the output of the following program?

#include <iostream> using namespace std; int main(){enum color_type {red, orange, yellow, green, blue,violet}; color_type shirt, pants; shirt = red; pants = blue;

cout << "Code for shirt" << " " << pants << endl; return 0;

Ans:(2 marks)

3SEL 4263

d. Refer to the following program:

Note: the numbers on the left column are line # (line numbers).

1. #include <iostream>2. using namespace std;3. int main()4. {5. int nNumber[5];6. int *pPointer;7. nNumber = 15;8. pPointer = SnNumber;

9. cout<<"Address of nNumber is equal to : "<<&nNumber<<endl;10. cout<<nNumber<<endl;11. cout<< pPointer<<endl;12. *pPointer = 25;13. cout<<nNumber<<endl;14. *pPointer++;15. cout«nNumber«endl;16. }

When the program is executed, line #9 will output the following display:

Address of nNumber is equal to : 0012FB20

Give the program output display resulted from each of the following lines:

Line #10:

Line #11:

Line #15:

Line #16:

(4 marks)

4SEL 4263

e. Refer to the following program:

Note: the numbers on the left column are line # (ime numbers) which is not part of the source file.

1. #include <iostream>2. #include <string>3. using namespace std;4. int main()5- {6. struct DataElement7. {8. Int iVal;9. Int hasData;10. DataElement()11. {12. iVal=1234;13. hasData=5679;14. }15. }RealData;16. cout << "First element: " << RealData.iVal << endl;17. cout << "Second element: " « RealData.hasData << endl;18. RealData.iVal = 1111;19. RealData.hasData = 2222; // True20. cout << "First element: " << RealData.iVal << endl;21. cout << "Second element: " << RealData.hasData << endl;22. }

i. Name the structure object created in the program. Ans:

ii. What does the class constructor created in the program.

Ans:

iii. When the program is executed, give the display resulted from:

Line #16:

Line #21:

(4 marks)

(Write your answers for this Question 2 in the answer book.)

a. The process of creating a windows program consists of the following steps;

Step 1: Register the Window Class

Step 2: Create the Window

Step 3: Create The Message Loop

Step 4: Create the Window Procedure

Describe briefly the purpose of each step.

SEL 4263

Question 2.

(8 marks)

b. The diagram in Figure Q2(b) shows the components involved in handling events (such as mouse click) and how these events are processed by windows OS and follow up action by the user application. Explain the components as shown in the diagram and the processes taking place to manage the events.

(8 marks)

6SEL 4263

c. The code in Figure Q2(c) shows statement in a windows procedure. Explain the workings of the code when the user clicks the application window “Close button” represented by the icon El located on the upper right of a window.

LRESULT CALLBACK WndProcedure(HWND hWnd, UINT Msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM IParam){

switch(Msg){case WMCLOSE:

DestroyWindow(hwnd); // The system sends the WM_DESTROY Message// break;

case WMJDESTROY:PostQuitMessage(WMQUIT); // PostQuitMessage function posts a

//WM_QUIT message to the message queuebreak;

default:return DefWindowProc(hWnd, Msg, wParam, IParam);

}return 0;

Figure Q2(c).

(9 marks)

7SEL 4263

Question 3

Given the following program, resource file and header file:

Note: The numbers on the left column are line # (line numbers) which is not part of the source file.

Content of file “Q3.cpp”

1. #include <windows.h>2. #include "resource.h"3. const char g_szClassName[] = "myWindowClass";4. #define IDC_MAIN_EDIT 1015. BOOL LoadTextFileToEdit(HWND hEdit, LPCTSTR pszFileName)6. {7. HANDLE hFile;8. BOOL bSuccess = FALSE;9. hFile = CreateFile(pszFileName, GENERIC_READ, FILE_SHARE_READ, NULL,

OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);10. if(hFile != INVALID_HANDLE_VALOE)11. {12. DWORD dwFileSize;

13. dwFileSize = GetFileSize(hFile, NULL);14. if(dwFileSize != OxFFFFFFFF)15. {16. LPSTR pszFileText;

17. pszFileText = (LPSTR)GlobalAlloc(GPTR, dwFileSize + 1);18. if(pszFileText != NULL)19. (20. DWORD dwRead;

21. if(ReadFile(hFile, pszFileText, dwFileSize, &dwRead, NULL))22. {23. pszFileText[dwFileSize] = 0; // Add null terminator24. if(SetWindowText(hEdit, pszFileText))25. bSuccess = TRUE; // It worked!26. }27. GlobalFree(pszFileText) ;28. }29. }30. CloseHandle(hFile);31. }32. return bSuccess;33. )34. BOOL SaveTextFileFromEdit(HWND hEdit, LPCTSTR pszFileName)35. {36. HANDLE hFile;37. BOOL bSuccess = FALSE;

38. hFile = CreateFile(pszFileName, GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL,CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

39. if(hFile != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)40. {41. DWORD dwTextLength;

42. dwTextLength = GetWindowTextLength(hEdit);43. // No need to bother if there's no text.44. if(dwTextLength > 0)45. {46. LPSTR pszText;47. DWORD dwBufferSize = dwTextLength + 1;

48. pszText = (LPSTR)GlobalAlloc(GPTR, dwBufferSize);49. if(pszText != NULL)50. {51. if(GetWindowText(hEdit, pszText, dwBufferSize))52. {53. DWORD dwWritten;

8SEL 4263

54. if(WriteFile(hFile, pszText, dwTextLength, SdwWritten, NULL))55. bSuccess = TRUE;56. }57. GlobalFree(pszText);58. }59. }60. CloseHandle(hFile);61. }62. return bSuccess;63. }64. void Functionl(HWND hwnd)65. {66. OPENFILENAME ofn;67. char szFileName[MAX PATH] =

68. ZeroMemory(&ofn, sizeof(ofn));69. ofn.IStructSize = sizeof(OPENFILENAME);70. ofn.hwndOwner = hwnd;71. ofn.IpstrFilter = "Text Files (*.txt)\0*.txt\0All Files (*.*)\0*.*\0";72. ofn.IpstrFile = szFileName;73. ofn.nMaxFile = MAX PATH;74. ofn.Flags = OFN_EXPLORER | OFN_FILEMUSTEXIST | OFN_HIDEREADONLY;75. ofn.IpstrDefExt = "txt";

76. if(GetOpenFileName(sofn))77 . (78. HWND hEdit = GetDlgItem(hwnd, IDC_MAIN_EDIT);79. LoadTextFileToEdit(hEdit, szFileName);80. }81. }82. void Function2(HWND hwnd)83. {84. OPENFILENAME ofn;85. char szFileName[MAX PATH] =86. ZeroMemory(sofn, sizeof(ofn));87. ofn.IStructSize = sizeof(OPENFILENAME);88. ofn.hwndOwner = hwnd;89. ofn.IpstrFilter = "Text Files (*.txt)\0*.txt\0All Files (*.*)\0*.*\0";90. ofn.IpstrFile = szFileName;91. Ofn.nMaxFile = MAX PATH;92. ofn.IpstrDefExt = "txt";93. ofn.Flags = OFN EXPLORER|OFN PATHMUSTEXIST|OFN HIDEREADONLYIOFN OVERWRITEPROMPT;94. if(GetSaveFileName(Sofn))95. {96. HWND hEdit = GetDlgltem(hwnd, IDC_MAIN_EDIT);97. SaveTextFileFromEdit(hEdit, szFileName);98. }99. }100. LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM IParam)101. <102 . switch(msg)103. {104 . case WM CREATE:105. {106. HFONT hfDefault;107. HWND hEdit;108. hEdit = CreateWindowEx(WS EX CLIENTEDGE, "EDIT",

WS_CHILD j WS_VISIBLE | WS_VSCROLL | WS_HSCROLL | ES_MULTILINE | ES_ADTOVSCROLL | ES_AUTOHSCROLL, 0, 0, 100, 100, hwnd, (HMENU)IDC_MAIN_EDIT,GetModuleHandle(NULL), NULL);

109. if(hEdit == NULL)110. MessageBox(hwnd, "Could not create edit box.",

"Error", MB_OK|MB ICONERROR);111. hfDefault = (HFONT)GetStockObject(DEFAULT_GUI FONT);112. SendMessage(hEdit, WM SETFONT, (WPARAM)hfDefault, MAKELPARAM(FALSE, 0) ) ;113. }114 . break;115. case WM SIZE:116. {117. HWND hEdit;118. RECT rcClient;119. GetClientRect(hwnd, &rcClient);120. hEdit = GetDlgltem(hwnd, IDC MAIN EDIT);121. SetWindowPos(hEdit, NULL, 0 , 0 , rcClient.right,

rcClient.bottom, SWP NOZORDER);122 . }

9SEL 4263

123. break;124. case WM_CLOSE:125. DestroyWindow(hwnd);126. break;127. case WM_DESTROY:128. PostQuitMessage(0);129. break;130. case WM_COMMAND:131. switch(LOWORD(wParam))132. {133. case ID_FILE_EXIT:134. PostMessage(hwnd, WM_CLOSE, 0, 0);135. break;13 6. case ID_FILE_NEW:137. SetDlgltemText(hwnd, IDC_MAIN_EDIT, "");138. break;139. case ID_FILE_OPEN:140. Functionl(hwnd);141. break;142. easelD_FILE_SAVEAS:143. Function2(hwnd);144. break;145. }146. break;147. default:148. return DefWindowProc(hwnd, msg, wParam, IParam);149. )150. return 0;151. )152. int WINAPI WinMain(HINSTANCE hlnstance, HINSTANCE hPrevInstance,153. LPSTR lpCmdLine, int nCmdShow)154. (155. WNDCLASSEX wc;156. HWND hwnd;157. MSG Msg;158. wc.cbSize = sizeof(WNDCLASSEX);159. wc.style = 0;160. wc.lpfnWndProc = WndProc;161. wc.cbClsExtra = 0;162. wc.cbWndExtra = 0;163. wc.hlnstance = hlnstance;164. wc.hlcon = Loadlcon(NULL, IDI_APPLICATION);165. wc.hCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, IDC_ARROW);166. wc.hbrBackground = (HBRUSH)(COLOR_WINDOW+l);167. wc.IpszMenuName = MAKEINTRESOURCE(IDR_MAINMENU);168. wc.IpszClassName = g_szClassName;169. wc.hlconSm = Loadlcon(NULL, IDI_APPLICATION);170. if(!RegisterClassEx(iwc))171. (172. MessageBox(NULL, "Result of RegisterClassEx ", "Wow",173. MB_ICONEXCLAMATION | MB_OK);174. return 0;175. }176. hwnd = CreateWindowEx(0,g_szClassNarae,"SEL 4263 Final Exam",WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW,

CW_USEDEFAULT, CW_USEDEFAULT, 480, 320,NULL, NULL, hlnstance, NULL);

177. if(hwnd == NULL)178. {179. MessageBox(NULL, " Result of Window Creation", "Caption",180. MB_ICONEXCLAMATION | MB_OK);181. return 0;182. }183. else184. {185. MessageBox(NULL, "Proceed A ", "Wow",18 6. MB_ICONEXCLAMATION | MB_OK);187. }188. ShowWindow(hwnd, nCmdShow);189. UpdateWindow(hwnd);190. while(GetMessage(&Msg, NULL, 0, 0) > 0)191. {192. TranslateMessage(&Msg);193. DispatchMessage(&Msg);194. }195. return Msg.wParam;196. )

10SEL 4263

Content of file “Q3.rc”

1. #include "resource.h"

2. #include "windows.h"3. ttinclude "resource.h"

4 . IDR MAINMENU MENU DISCARDABLE5. BEGIN6. POPUP "&File"7. BEGIN8. MENUITEM "&New", ID FILE NEW9. MENUITEM "&Open... ID FILE OPEN10. MENUITEM "Save &As... ID_FILE_SAVEAS11. MENUITEM SEPARATOR12. MENUITEM "E&xit", ID_FILE_EXIT13. END14 . END

Content of file “resource.h”

#define IDR MAINMENU 102#define ID FILE EXIT 40001#define ID FILE OPEN 40002#define ID FILE SAVEAS 40003#define ID FILE NEW 40004

(Write your answers in the respective blank space given in the Question)

Identifiy in the program, which code (give line numbers) that is requred to implement the following requirement:

a. Give the string of the caption of the window.(1 mark)

Ans:

b. What will be the displayed if the process of registering the class is successful?(4 marks)

Ans: Draw the display here

11SEL 4263

Give the declaration which registers the address of the callback function which will be called in the statement at line #194, “DispatchMessage (&Msg) ; ” when executed.

(1 mark)

Ans: ________________________________________________________

What is the value of the constant that identifies the menu script for the main window created by the program.

(1 mark)

Ans: ________________________________________________________

Identify the statement which registers the menu script to be created in the main of the program.

(1 mark)

Ans: _______________________________________________________

Identify the statement which passes a message from the message queue.

(1 mark)

Ans:

Which statement when executed generates WM_CREATE to the message queue?

(1 mark)

Ans: ________________________________________________________

Which event will cause statement at line #76 “if (GetOpenFileName (&ofn) ) >” to be executed?

(1 mark)

Ans: ________________________________________________________

Which event sends the WM_CLOSE to the message queue?

(1 mark)

Ans:

12SEL 4263

j. Draw the main user interface created by the program.

Ans: Draw the user interface in the box below.

(8 marks)

k. Referring to the resource file “Q3.rc”, draw the dropdown menu created in the program.(5 marks)

Ans: Draw the dropdown menu in the box below.

13SEL 4263

PART B

Question 4


A callback function using Child Window Control, which on execution from a properly built WinMain program, will initially create the user interface shown in Figure Q4(a).

* Area Calculator

Enter radius

Integer1. Decimal

(Area of a Circle

Figure Q4(a).

The specifications of the 6 controls shown in Figure Q4(a) is given in Figure Q4(b)):

Text displayed on execution

Type Position on Client

Area (X,Y)

Size(Width,height)

ID name Value

“Calculate” ButtonControl

10, 10 100,105

IDC_CALC 101

“Enterradius”

Edit Control 120, 10 100, 25 IDC_RADIUS 102

“Integer” Static Text Control

120, 65 1 0 0 , 2 5 IDC_AREA 103

“.” (decimal point)

Static Text Control

220, 65 10, 25 IDC_AREAPT 104

“Decimal” Static Text Control

230, 65 100, 25 IDC_AREADC 105

“Area of a Circle”

Static Text Control

10, 120 320, 25 IDC_AREAS t r 106

Figure Q4(b).

14SEL 4263

A user can enter a decimal entry on the “Enter radius” and overwriting the “Enter radius” text string. The program will accept value of RADIUS to be an integer or decimal point number but will be received as a string number (may be with decimal point). Assume that only valid decimal number will be entered into the “Enter radius” EDIT Control.

If the user presses the “Calculate” BUTTON control, the integer portion of the “Area of a Circle” will be displayed on the “Integer” Static Text control, and the remaining decimal portion will be displayed on the “Decimal” Static Text control.

Figure Q4(c) shows an example where a user enters 21.3 in the “Enter radius” EDIT Control and then presses the “Calculate” BUTTON control, for the answer of 1425.493, the number “1425” and “493” are displayed on the “Integer” Static Text control and “Decimal” Static Text control, respectively, which is defined in Figure Q4(a).

* Area Calculator sap i-S i

Calculate

21.3

1425 493

ire a of a Circle

Figure Q4(c).

15SEL 4263

Based on the above requirement and specifications, the following is partial codes of callback function:

// This code is define elsewhere in the program

//More Codes Here

LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM IParam) {

switch(msg){

case WM_CREATE:{

HFONT hfDefault;HWND hRadius,hCALC, hArea, hAreaPT, hAreaDC hAreaStr; hAreaStr=CreateWindowEx(WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE|SS_CENTERIMAGE,

"STATIC", "Area of a Circle",WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE |WS_BORDER,10, 120, 320, 25, hwnd, (HMENU)IDC_AREAStr,GetModuleHandle(NULL) , NULL);

/ /More Codes Here

}break;case WM_CLOSE:

// More Codes Here

break;case WM_DESTROY:

// More Codes Here

break; default:

// More Codes Here

case WM_COMMAND:switch(LOWORD(wParam)){

case 101:{

char szRadius [20]; char buffer[65];int bSuccess = GetDlgltemText(hwnd, IDC_RADIUS, szRadius, 20); double Radius = atof(szRadius); double Area=3.142*Radius*Radius;SetDlgltemlnt(hwnd, IDC_AREA, (int)Area,FALSE) ;// More Codes Here

}break;

#define IDC_CALC #define IDC_RADIUS #define IDC AREA

101102103

return 0;

16SEL 4263

a. Show the definition of the three more ID names.

(3 marks)

b. In which structure should the codes for the following controls be located (written) in the program?


“Enterradius”

Edit Control


(decimalpoint)

Static Text Control

“Decimal” Static Text Control

“Area of a Circle”

Static Text Control

(2 marks)

c. Show the codes which will create the following controls:


“Enterradius”

Edit Control


(12 marks)

d. Show the code(s) which will display the decimal value of calculated “Area of Circle”.(5 marks)

e. In which structure and which position should the code(s) that will display the decimal value of “Area of a Circle” be located (written) in the program?

(3 marks)

17SEL 4263

a. In windows programming, what is Graphics Device Interface (GDI) and what is the advantage of using GDI to the programmer.

(4 marks)

Referring to the following codes shown in Figure Q5, which are within a callback procedure are used to display two straight lines representing the x and y axes of a graph. The following questions are based on the codes.

Question 5.


LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc( HWND hwnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM IParam) {HDC hdc;PAINTSTRUCT ps;RECT rect;static int w=250, h=150; int x, y; int i; switch(msg){

case WM_SIZE:GetClientRect(hwnd, Snect); w = LOWORD(lParam) + 1; h = HIWORD(lParam) + 1;InvalidateRect(hwnd, &rect, TRUE); break;

case WM_PAINT:hdc = BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);//Draw the y-axisfor (i = h/12; i<(ll*h/12); i++){

y = i; //set the y value between the maximum to th minimum x = w/12;SetPixel(hdc, x, y, RGB(0, 0, 0)); //black

}//Draw the x-axisfor (i = w/12; i<(ll*w/12); i++){

x = i; y = h/2;SetPixel(hdc, x, y, RGB(0, 0, 0)); //black

}//Put testSelectObject (hdc, GetStockObject (SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT)) ;SetBkMode (hdc, TRANSPARENT) ;TextOut (hdc,w/24,h/12,”y",l);TextOut (hdc,ll*w/12,h/2,"x",l);EndPaint(hwnd, &ps); break;

case WM_DE5TR0Y:PostQuitMessage(0); break;

}return DefWindowProc(hwnd, msg, wParam, IParam);

}

Figure Q5.

b. What event causes the codes in the case WM_SIZE be executed?(2 marks)

c. What event causes the codes in the case WM PAINT be executed?

18SEL 4263

What is the use of the BeginPaint function?(2 marks)

What is the use of the SelectObject function?(2 marks)

Explain all the parameters used in the SetPixel function(2 marks)

The output of the program is as shown below. Every time the windows is resized using the mouse, the axes x and y would also be resized accordingly in proportion to the new size of the window. Explain which codes in the procedure are responsible for this?

(2 marks)

Modify (by adding additional codes) so that a straight line is drawn from point (w/12, 3h/4) to point (1 lw/12, h/12). The line drawn must be green in colour. Also the text, y = mx + c is also shown on the window. The text is output at point (w/2,h/12). The final output should be as shown below. The value of w and h is as obtained from the original program. All calculations should be shown clearly.

(3 marks)

(8 marks)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SET 3583

COURSE NAME DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

LECTURERS DR. NURUL MU’AZZAH BT ABDUL LATIFF

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SET

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

06 MAY 2011



-2-SET 3583

Q.l (a) Nyquist filter is often used to describe the general class of filtering and pulse-

shaping that satisfies zero 1S1 at sampling points. With the aid of diagram, explain

about ideal Nyquist pulse as a method to control ISI. (6 marks)

(b) The receiving filter in digital communication can be implemented with either a

matched filter or a correlator. Show that the correlator can be realized using

matched filter. (7 marks)

(c) An analog signal is PCM formatted and transmitted using binary waveforms over

a bandlimited channel of 100 kHz. Assume that 32 quantization levels are used

and the signal is transmitted using 8-ary PAM waveforms. The overall equivalent

transfer function is of raised cosine type with roll-off, r = 0.6.

i. Find the maximum bit rate that can be used by this system without

introducing ISI. (6 marks)

ii. Find the maximum bandwidth of the original analog signal that can be

accommodated with these parameters. (6 marks)

-3-SET 3583

Q.2 (a) What is the advantage of using basis function in matched filters or correlators?

(2 marks)

(b) Given the maximum likelihood decision rule as follows:

i Vector r lies inside region Z, ifN |

—E k , is maximum for all k = i \7=1 2

where E k is the energy of s k (t ).

Based on this decision rule, draw the block diagram maximum likelihood detector

for M decision regions. (7 marks)

(c) Figure 1 below displays the waveforms of three signals s \ ( t ) , $2(0 and $3(0-

i. Using the Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization procedure, find a set of

orthonormal basis functions to represent these signals. (10 marks)

ii. Express each of these signals in terms of the set of basis functions found in

part c (i). (6 marks)

(0 (ii) (iii)

Figure Q2

-4-SET 3583

Q.3 (a) Modulation is the process of converting a baseband signal to a passband

counterpart by varying some characteristics of a carrier in accordance with the

baseband signal. Explain why modulation is needed. (3 marks)

(b) i. Sketch the signal space diagram representing orthogonal BFSK signal.

(4 marks)

ii. Based on the signal space diagram in b(i), prove that probability of bit

error for BFSK is given by,

P b =Qv» u y (6 marks)

(c) As an engineer, you need to choose a modulation scheme for a system which its

main performance criterion is bit-error probability. Given the following

modulation schemes, and assuming that a Gray code is used for the MPSK

symbol-to-bit assignment, which of the following will you select for transmission

over an AWGN channel? Show your computations.

£coherent 8-ary orthogonal FSK with — =8 dB

N 0

£coherent 8-ary orthogonal PSK with — =13 dB

N o

(12 marks)

-5-SET 3583

Q.4 a) Define the word ‘Hamming distance’ used in error control coding. (2 marks)

b) It is required to design a (6,3) systematic linear block code. The three parity check bits are decided to be p { - w, © m 3, p 2 = m ] ® m 2 @ m i , and p 3 = m l ® m 2 .

i. Write down the generator matrix, G. (6 marks)

ii. Fill up the code words in Table Q4. (8 marks)

'able Q4Data Codeword

000

001

010

Oil

100

101

110

111

iii. Suppose the received word is 010101. Determine the estimated transmitted

data bits. (9 marks)

-6-SET 3583

Q.5 (a) Differentiate how multiple access is achieved in DS-CDMA and FH-CDMA.

(6 marks)

(b) Spread spectrum (SS) techniques can provide impressive error-performance

benefits against interfering signals. One might therefore think that such SS

techniques might provide similar benefits against AWGN. Explain why this is not

possible. (4 marks)

(c) Consider a FH/MFSK system. Let the pseudonoise (PN) generator be defined by a

20-stage linear feedback shift register with a maximal length sequence. Each state

of the register dictates the new center frequency within the hopping band. The

minimum step size between centre frequencies (hop to hop) is 200 Hz. The

register clock rate is 2 kHz. Assume that 8-ary FSK modulation is used and the

data rate is 1.2 kbits/s.

i. What is the hopping bandwidth? (3 marks)

ii. What is the chip rate? (3 marks)

iii. How many chips are there in each data symbol? (5 marks)

iv. What is the processing gain in dB? (4 marks)

-7-SET 3583

Table 1: Values of Q(x) for 0 £ x s 9X Q ( x ) X Q ( x ) X Q ( x ) X QUO

0.00 0.5 2.30 0.01.0724 4.55 2.6823x1 O'6 6.80 5,23.1x10-12

0.05 0.48006 2.35 0.0093867 4.60 2.1125xl0-6 6.85 3.6925xl0~12

0.10 0.46017 2.40 0.0081975 4.65 1.6597x10-® 6.90 2.6001 xlO"12

0.15 0.44038 2.45 0.0071428 4.70 1.3008xl0-6 6.95 1.8264X10"12

0.20 0.42074 2.50 0.0062097 4,75 1.0171xl0-6 7.00 1.2798xl0-12

0.25 0.40129 2.55 0.0053861 4.80 7.9333 xlO-7 7.05 8.9459xl0-13

0.30 0.38209 2.60 0.0046612 4.85 6.1731 xlO-7 7.10 6.237Sxl0-13

0.35 0.36317 2.65 0.0040246 4.90 4.7918x10-" 7.15 4.3389 xlO"13

0.40 0.34458 2.70 0.003467 4.95 3.7107x10-" 7.20 3.0106X10"13

0.45 0.32636 2.75 0.0029798 5.00 2.8665 xlO-7 7.25 2.0839x 10-13

0.50 0.30854 2.80 0.0025551 5.05 2.2091 xlO"7 7.30 1.4388xl0-13

0.55 0.29116 2.85 0.002186 5.10 1.6983xl0-7 7.35 9.9103X10-14

0.60 0.27425 2.90 0.0018658 5.15 1.3024 xlO"7 7.40 6.8092xl0->4

0.65 0.25785 2.95 0.0015889 5.20 9.9644 xlO-8 7.45 4.667xl0"14

0.70 0.24196 3.00 0.0013499 5.25 7.605xl0~8 7.50 3.1909X10"14

0.75 0.22663 3.05 0.0011442 5.30 5.7901x10-* 7.55 2.1763xl0“14

0.80 0.21186 3.10 0.0009676 5.35 4.3977x10-® 7.60 1.4807xl0"14

0.85 0.19766 3.15 0.00081635 5.40 3.332 xlO-8 7.65 1.0049x 10-14

0.90 0.18406 3.20 0.00068714 5.45 2.5185 xlO"8 7.70 6.8033X10-15

0.95 0.17106 3.25 0.00057703 5.50 1.899xl0-8 7.75 4.5946X 10-15

1.00 0.15866 3,30 0.00048342 5.55 1.4283x10-® 7.80 3.0954X10-1®1.05 0.14686 3.35 0.00040406 5.60 1.0718x10-® 7.85 2.0802X10-1®1.10 0.13567 3.40 0.00033693 5.65 8.0224xl0-9 7.90 1.3945 xlO-15

1.15 0.12507 3.45 0.00028029 5.70 5.9904 xlO"9 7.95 9.3256xl0~16

1.20 0.11507 3.50 0.00023263 5.75 4,4622 xlO"9 8.00 6.221 xlO-16

1.25 0.10565 3.55 0.00019262 5.80 3.3157 xlO"9 8.05 4.1397X10"16

1.30 0.0968 3.60 0.00015911 5.85 2.4579x10-® 8.10 2.748 xl.0-16

1.35 0.088508 3.65 0.00013112 5.90 1,81.75 xlO-9 8.15 1.8196xl0"16

1.40 0.080757 3.70 0.0001078 5.95 1.3407xl0-9 8.20 1.2019x 10-16

1.45 0.073529 3.75 8.8417 xlO-5 6.00 9.8659X10-10 8.25 7.9197xl0-17

1.50 0.066807 3.80 7.2348 xlO"5 6.05 7.2423x10"10 8.30 5.2056x 10-17

1.55 0.060571 3.85 5.9059 xl0~5 6.10 5.3034xl0-)O 8.35 3.4131 xlO-17

1.60 0.054799 3.90 4.8096x10-® 6.15 3.8741x10-10 8.40 2.2324X10"17

1.65 0.04947.1 3.95 3.9076 xlO"5 6.20 2.8232 x 1.0-10 8.45 1,4565x10-17

1.70 0.044565 4.00 3.1671x10-® 6.25 2.0523x 10-10 8.50 9.4795xlO-18

1.75 0.040059 4,05 2.5609x10"® 6.30 1.4882xlO-10 8.55 6.1544X10"18

1.80 0.03593 4.30 2.0658x10-® 6.35 1.0766xl0-10 8.60 3.9858xl0-18

1.85 0.032157 4,15 1.6624x10-® 6.40 7.7688X10"11 8.65 2.575xlO-18

1.90 0.028717 4,20 1.3346 xlO"5 6.45 5.5925 xlO"11 8.70 1.6594xl0-18

1.95 0.025588 4,25 1.0689x10-® 6.50 4,016 xlO"11 8.75 1.0668 xlO-18

2.00 0.02275 4.30 8.5399 xlO"6 6.55 2.8769X10-11 8.80 6.8408xl0-19

2.05 0.020182 4.35 6.8069 xlO"6 6.60 2.0558x10-” 8.85 4.376 xlO'19

2.10 0.017864 4,40 5.4125xl0-(i 6.65 1.4655 x 10-’1 8.90 2.7923xl0~19

2.15 0.015778 4.45 4,2935 xl0~6 6.70 1.0421 xlO”11 8.95 1.7774xl0-19

2.202.25

0.0139030.012224

4.50 3.3977x1.0-® 6.75 7.3923x10-12 9.00 1.1286X.10-19

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEL 4533

COURSE NAME MICROCONTROLLERS

LECTURERS DR. YEONG CHE FAI

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

12 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN SECTION A IN THIS PAPER IN THE AREA PROVIDED. ANSWER ANY TWO (2) QUESTIONS FROM SECTION B.

SPLIT THE QUESTIONS SECTION A AND TIED THEM TOGETHER WITH ANSWER SHEET FOR SECTION B.


2-SEL 4533-

SECTION A 50 MARKS

1. The following program is written to create a continuous square wave output at PORTB bit 7 (PB7) using a subroutine DELAY. The program first SETS bit PB7 and calls subroutine DELAY. Then, the program CLEARS bit PB7 and calls subroutine DELAY. The program will continue looping. Hence, a continuous square wave is generated. There are two errors in this program. Circle and explain the errors.

[5 MARKS]

ANSWER:

PORTB EQU $1004ORG $B600LDY #PORTB

LAGI BSET 0,Y $70JSR DELAYBCLR

o00o'

JSR DELAYBSR LAGI

DELAY LDAA #100AGAIN DECA

BNERTS

AGAIN

2. The following subroutine is written for M68HC11 microcontroller using an 8 MHz oscillator. Calculate the value of Count that can generate a delay of 0.4 milliseconds. Calculate the total bytes used by this subroutine.

[5 MARKS]

DELAYAGAIN

LDAADECABNERTS

# Count

AGAIN

ANSWER:

NTotal bytes

3-SEL 4533-

3. The following flow chart is an algorithm to identify the smallest byte stored in memory between address $5000 and $5020. Write a program to perform this algorithm. The program will first load accumulator B (ACCB) with decimal 255. Then it will load one byte from memory content pointed by X (starting from address $5000) to accumulator A (ACCA). Next, the value in ACCA will be compared to ACCB. If the value ACCA is less than ACCB, then ACCB will be overwritten with new lower value from ACCA. If ACCA is larger than ACCB, then nothing changes. The process continues until the loop reach memory address $5020.

4. State the values in memory $55 (in hexadecimal) after every instruction is executed. The initial value at address $55 is $0. All instructions are executed continuously.

[5 MARKS]

[5 MARKS]

ANSWER:

B = A

X = X + 1

ANSWER:

LDABSTABASRBCLR

#55$55$55

($55) = $ 0

$55 $02

($55) = ($55) = ($55) =

4-SEL 4533-

5. The following list file is generated by THRSIM compiler. State the content in memory address $00FC - SOOFF and Program Counter (PC) right after instruction RTS is executed. Assume all initial values are $FF. Write your answer in the table below in hexadecimal format.

[5 MARKS]

Address Machine code Assembly

B600 8E 00 FFORG SB600 LDS #$00FF

B603 CC 02 00 AGAIN LDD #512B606 BD B6 0B JSR PROCESSB609 20 F8 BRA AGAINB60B 36 PROCESS PSHAB60C C6 03 LDAB #3B60E 3D MULB60F 39 RTS

ANSWER:

Address/Register SOOFF $00FE S00FD S00FC PCContent

6. The circuit below is for an Analog to Digital Converter using M68HC11. Calculate the contents of ADR1 and ADR2 after the A/D conversion is completed.

[5 MARKS]

68HC11 10KQ , A A APE.O

iokqJ

PE.l 11KQ

Vrh ---- AAAH +5 V

Vrl

1ANSWER:

ADR1 = S ADR2 = $

5-SEL 4533-

7. Explain the main function of the following registers for Analog-to-Digital Converter in M68HC11.

[6 MARKS]ANSWER:

Register Main functionADCTL

OPTION

ADR1

The following is part of a program for Serial Communication Interface (SCI) for M68HC11. Explain the function of the instructions which are in bold.

[4 MARKS]

SCCR1 EQU $2C SCCR2 EQU $2D

ORG SB600 LDY #$1000 BCLR SCCR1, Y $10 BSET SCCR2, Y $C0

ANSWER:

6-SEL 4533-

9. Describe the function of BAUD register ($102B) for Serial Communication Interface (SCI) M68HC11. Explain why the integrated circuit (IC) MAX232 is often used during the SCI communication?

[5 MARKS]

ANSWER:

10. For the circuit below, write a program to switch off all the LEDs.[5 MARKS]

ANSWER:

7-SEL 4533-

SECTION B 50 MARKS

Ql

+6V

Vrh

Thermometer •-------

Va •--------Vb %------

PEO

M68HC11

PBO

PEIPE2

FAN

V

Vrl

Figure 1: Intelligent fan system

An intelligent fan system (Figure 1) is created using M68HC11 microcontroller. The system will switch ‘ON’ the fan if temperature is above Va, upper limit voltage of 30°C and switch ‘OFF’ the fan if temperature is below Vb, lower limit voltage reference of 25 °C. A thermometer is used to measure the temperature and gives the output in the form of voltage, which is directly proportional to the temperature degree “Celsius. The relationship between output voltage and temperature is shown in Table Ql:

Table Ql: Relation between voltages measured by thermometer with its temperature in degree °Celsius.______________________

Voltage measured by thermometer (Volt)

Temperature(°Celsius)

0 Volt 0°C6 Volt 100 °C

The thermometer is connected to PEO. The upper limit voltage reference is determined by a constant voltage, Va connected to PEI and lower limit voltage reference is determined by constant voltage, Vb connected to PE2. The fan connection is active high.

a. What is the definition of Resolution for Analog-to-Digital Converter in M68HC11? Calculate the Resolution for the A/D converter.

[2 MARKS]

b. Calculate the required voltage constants for Va, upper limit voltage reference and Vb, lower limit voltage reference.

[4 MARKS]

c. Part of the program has the following instructions:

LDX #$1000BSET OPTION, X %11000000JSR DELAY 100USLDAA #%00110000STAA ADCTL, X

Explain what are the effects of these instructions on the A/D converter in M68HC11?[6 MARKS]

d. Write a full program in assembly language for the intelligent fan system as described above. You can use part of the program in (c) in your answer. Assume DELAY100US is provided to delay 100/zs and you do not have to create this subroutine.

[13 MARKS]

9-SEL 4533-

Q2.

A pole climbing robot (Figure Q2) is built using microcontroller M68HC11 as shown in figure below. The robot has one wheel driven by a DC Motor. The chip L293B (datasheet in appendix) is used as interface between microcontroller and the DC Motor. The two wires of the DC motor are connected to the pins PBO and PB1 of the microcontroller respectively. The robot will climb up if PB0=0 and PB1=1 and climb down if PB0=1 and PB1=0. The robot will stop when PB0=PB1. Two limit switches are connected to PCO and PCI to detect if the robot reaches the ceiling (PCO) or floor (PCI).

Limitswitches

DC Motor with wheel

Robot will climb up when the wheel is turning counter-clockwise while it will climb down when the wheel is turning clockwise. This figure shows a robot is climbing up the pole.

Floor

Figure Q2: Pole climbing robot

10-SEL 4533-

a. Explain briefly the differences between DC Motor and Stepper motor.[4 MARKS]

b. Explain why motors cannot be connected directly to M68HC11?[2 MARKS]

c. Draw a complete working circuit diagram for this robot using M68HC11. Note the interfacing circuit between DC motor and limit switches (normally open) to M68HC11 using bootstrap mode. A motor driver L293B is used for interfacing the DC motor and connected to pins PBO and PB1 of the M68HC11. Datasheet of the motor driver L293B and M68HC11 pin out are available as appendix for your reference. PCO and PCI are connected to the limit switches. Label the circuit accordingly.

[9 MARKS]

d. Write a program to control the robot for climbing up and down continuously. The robot initially will climb up the pole until it reaches the ceiling. Once the limit switch senses the ceiling, the robot will reverse to climb down the pole. And once it reaches the floor, the robot will climb up again. The process continues. Write the program according to the hardware connectivity of Part (c) where PBO and PB1 are to control the DC Motor and PCO and PCI are connected to the limit switches.

[10 MARKS]

11-SEL 4533-

One prototype decorative light system is being developed (Figure Q3). This prototype is used to display two selectable blinking patterns for 4 LEDs using microcontroller M68HC11. A user can use a remote control to select the pattern wirelessly via RF module.

Q3.

PORTB:

Remote control Prototype decorative light system

Figure Q3: Prototype decorative light system

The operation of the system is as follows:i. Remote control: When a button is pressed, two bytes are transmitted from the

RF. The first byte is followed by ‘1’ or ‘2’ depending on which button is selected.

ii. Prototype decorative light system: An RF module is connected to Communication Serial Communication (SCI) of microcontroller. 4 active high LEDs are connected to PORTB. Each LED’s current is limited with a 330 Ohm resistor.

iii. In the program, two patterns of LED blinking with 100ms delay in between blinks are designed as shown in Table Q2. Pattern 1 starts with switching ON all the LEDs. Then, a delay of 100ms is executed before switching OFF all the LEDs. This process continues. The similar program is written for Pattern 2.

Table Q2: Four LED blinking patternsPORTB PB3 PB2 PB1 PBOPattern 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0Pattern 2 0 0 0 1

0 0 100 10 010 0 0

iv. The system always reads from the serial communication of the microcontroller. If data ‘@1’ is received, then Pattern 1 is selected to blink the -4 LEDs. If data ‘@2’ is selected, then pattern 2 is selected.

v. This process continues looping.

12-SEL 4533-

Assuming an 8Mhz oscillator is being used, please answer the questions below:

a. Draw and complete the missing parts of the output connection circuit at PORTB of the microcontroller only comprising the LEDs. All the LEDs are active high.

[4 MARKS]

b. State the three initialization steps in programming needed before SCI interface can be used.

[6 MARKS]

c. Write two subroutines PAT1 and PAT2 for the two different blinking LEDs. Assume subroutine DELAY is already created to delay 100ms.

[6 MARKS]

d. Write a full program for the system to read data from serial communication and run the running light patterns according to the user’s selection. Subroutine READ1 is already created as follow:

READ1 BRCLR SCSR,X $20 READ1 LDAA SCDR,X RTS

The program should be able to identity user’s selection and uses subroutine PAT1, PAT2 and DELAY as described in (c). You do not have to re-write all these subroutines in your answer.

[9 MARKS]

Table 10-1 MC68HC11A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Times(Sheet 1 of 6)

SourceForm(s)

Operation Boolean Expression Addressing Mode for Operand

Machine Coding (Hexadecimal)

w4>*01

I Cyc

le I Cycle

byCycle*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) 8XHINZVC

ABA Add Accumulators A + B -»A INH 1B 2 2-1 • •MinABX AddBtoX IX + 00:B -»IX INH 3A 3 2-2ABY AddBtoY IY + 00:B -► IY INH 16 3A 2 4 2-4

ADCA Add with Cany to A A + M +C -+A AIMM 89 ii 2 1-1 --i-iinA DIR 99 dd 3 4-1A EXT BS hh 0 3 4 5-2A IND.X AS ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18A9 ff 3 5 7-2

AOCB(opr) Add with Carry to B 8 + M +C -*• B BIMM C9 ii 2 2 5-1B DIR DS dd 2 3 4-1BEXT FS hh a 3 4 5-2B IND.X ES ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 E9 ff 3 5 7-2

ADDA (opr) Add Memory to A A + M -» A AIMM 6B ii 2 2 3-1 --MillA DIR 9B dd 2 3 4-1A EXT BB hh n 3 4 5-2A IND.X AB ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18 AB ff 5 7-2

ADDB (opr) Add Memory to B B + M -»B BIMM CB ii 2 2 3-1 --MillB DIR DB dd 2 3 4-1BEXT FB hh II 3 4 5-2B IND.X E8 ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 EB ff 3 5 7-2

ADDD (opr) Add 16-Bit to D D + M:M+ 1 -* D IMM C3 jj kk 3 4 3-3 ■ -miDIR D2 dd 2 5 4-7EXT F3 hh II 3 6 5-10IND.X E2 ff 2 6 6-10IND.Y 18 E3 ff 3 7 7-8

AN DA (opr) AND A with Memory A-M -»A AIMM 84 ii 2 2 3-1 ------ 110-A OIR 94 dd 2 3 4-1A EXT BA hh II 3 4 5-2A IND.X M ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18 A4 ff 5 7-2

ANDB (opr) AND B with Memory B*M —»B BIMM 04 ii 2 3-1 ------ 110-B DIR D4 dd 2 3 4-1BEXT F4 hh II 3 4 5-2B IND.X E4 ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 E4 ff 3 5 7-2

ASL (opr) Arithmetic Shift Left ____ EXT 78 hh II 3 6 SB ----nnI W I I II! i I l-o IND.X 68 ff 2 6 6-3

C b7 bO IND,Y 18 68 ff 3 / 7-346 1 7 2-1

B INH 58 1 2 2-1ASLD Arithmetic Shift Left Double „___ INH 05 1 3 2-2 ----tin

CKCD - - -LD—oC blS bO

ASR (opr) Arithmetic Shift Right ___ _ EXT 77 hh II 3 6 5-8 • ---nilH 1 11 1 11 1 1—*11 IND.X 67 ff 2 6 6-3

b? bO C IND.Y 3 7-347 1 7 2-1

ASRB B INH 57 1 2 2-1BCC (ref) Branch if Carry Clear ?C = 0 REL 24 rr 2 3 8-1BCLR (opr) Clear Bit(s) DIR 15 dd mm 3 6 4-10 — no.

(msk) JND.X 1D ff mm 3 7 6-13IND.Y 181D ff mm 4 8 7-10

BCS (rel) Branch if Carry Set ?C = 1 REL 25 rr 2 3 8-1BEO (rel) Branch if = Zero ?Z= 1 REL 27 rr 2 3 8-1BGE(rel) Branch if a Zero ? N ©V * 0 REL 2C rr 2 3 8-1BGT (rel) Branch if > Zero ?Z + (N®V) = 0 REL 2E rr 2 3 8-1BHI (rel) Branch if Higher ?c+z=o REL 22 rr 2 3 8-1BHS (rel) Branch if Higher or Same ?C =0 REL 24 rr 2 3 B-1

*Cyde-by-cyde number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cyde-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equalsTable 10-2 line item 2-4.

MOTOROLA10-6

CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET MC68HC11A8TECHNICAL DATA


SourceForm(s)



i.tto C

ycle

Cycleby

Cycle*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) SXHINZVC

BITA (opr) Bit(s) Test A with Memory A*M AIMM 85 ii 2 2 3-1 —110-A DIR 95 dd 3 4*1A EXT B5 hh II 3 4 5-2A IND.X A5 ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18A5 ff 3 5 7-2

BITS (opr) Bit(s) Test B with Memory B*M BIMM C5 ii 2 2 3-1 ------ 11 0-B DIR D5 dd 3 4-1BEXT F5 hh n 4 5-2B IND.X E5 ff 4 6-2B IND,Y 18 E5 ff 3 5 7-2

8LE (re)) Branch if S Zero ?Z + (N©V) = 1 REL 2F rr 2 3 8-1BLO (rel) Branch if Lower ?C*1 REL 25 rr 2 8-1BLS (rel) Branch if Lower or Same ?C+Z=1 REL 23 n 2 8-1

BLT (rel) Branch If < Zero ? N © V 3 1 REL 2D rr 3 8-1

BM1 (rel) Branch if Minus ? N = 1 REL 2B rr 3 8-1BNE (rel) Branch if Not = Zero ?Z = 0 REL 26 rr 2 3 8-1

BPL (rel) Branch if Plus ?N = 0 REL 2A rr 2 3 8-1

BRA (rel) Branch Always 7 1 = 1 REL 20 rr 2 3 8-1BRCLR(opr) Branch if Bit(s) Clear ? M•mm = 0 OIR 13 dd mm rr 4 6 4-11

(msk) IND.X 1F ff mm rr 4 6-14(rel) IND,Y 18 IF ff mm rr 5 U 7-11

BRN (rel) Branch Never ? 1 = 0 REL 21 rr 2 3 8-18RSET(opr) Branch if Bft(s) Set ? (M) • mm * 0 DIR 12 dd mm rr 4 6 4-11

(msk) IND.X 1E ff mm rr 4 / 6-14 7-(rel) IND.Y 18 1E ff mm rr b 8 11

BSET(opr) Set Bit(s) M + mm -+ M DIR 14 dd mm 3 6 4-10 ------ 11 0-(msk) IND.X 1C ff mm 3 7 6-13

IN D,Y 10 1C ff mm 4 8 7-10BSR (rel) Branch to Subroutine See Special Ops REL 80 rr 2 6 8-2BVC (ref) Branch if Overflow Clear ?V=0 REL 28 rr 2 3 8-1

BVS (rel) Branch if Overflow Set ? V= 1 REL 29 n 2 3 8-1CBA Compere A to B A-B INH 11 1 2 2-1 r-tmCLC Clear Carry Bit 0-»C 1NH OC 1 2 2-1 ..............0cu Clear Interrupt Mask 0-+I INH 0E 1 2 2-1 . . . 0 -------

CLR (opr) Clear Memory Byte 0 -> M EXT 7F hh II 3 6 5-6 ------ 0100IND.X 6F ff 2 6 6-3IND.Y 18 6F ff 3 7 7-3

CLRA Clear Accumulator A 0 ~+A A INH 4F 1 2 2-1 ------ 0 100

CLRB Clear Accumulator B

<oTo

B INH 5F 1 2 2-1 -------0 100CLV Clear Overflow Rag 0-+V INH 0A 1 2 2-1 ........... 0-

CMPA(opr) Compare A to Memory AIMM 81 ii 2 2 3-1 -■1111A DIR 91 dd 2 3 4-1A EXT B1 hh n 3 4 5-2A IND.X A1 ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18 A1 fr 3 5 7-2

CMPB (opr) Compare B to Memory B - M B IMM C1 ii 2 2 3-1 ----mi3 DIR D1 dd 2 3 4-13 EXT F1 hh n 3 4 5-23 IND.X E1 ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 El ff 3 5 7-2

COM (opr) Vs Complement Memory Byte $FF-M -»M EXT 73 hh n 3 6 5-8 ---1101ND,X 63 n 2 6 6-3IND.Y 18 63 ff 3 7 7-3

COMA t’s Complement A ■n ■n t > I > A INH 43 1 2 2-1 ----1101COMB 1's Complement B $FF - B -» B B INH 53 1 2 2-1 ------ 11 0 1CPD (opr) Compare D to Memory 16-Bit D - M :M + 1 IMM 1A 63 jj kk 4 5 3-5 --1111

DIR 1A 93 dd 3 6 4-9EXT 1AB3 1h 0 4 7 5-11ND,X 1A A3 ff 3 7 6-11IND.Y CD A3 ff 3 7 7-8

*CycJe-by-cycle number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cyde-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.

MC68HC11A8 CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SETTECHNICAL DATA

MOTOROLA10-7


SourceForm(s)



v>9>%a

w£.o

Cycleby

Cycle*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) SXHiNZVC

CPX (opr) Compare X to Memory 16-Sit IX -M:M + 1 IMM 8C ij kk 3 4 3-3 ----nnDIR 9C dd 5 4-7EXT BC hh fl 6 5-10IND.X AC ff 6 6-10IND.Y CD AC ff 3 7 7-8

CPY (opr) Compare Y to Memory fY-M:M + 1 IMM 18 8C jj kk 4 S 3-5 ---mi16- Bit DIR 18 9C dd 3 a 4-9

EXT 18 BC hh II 4 7 5-11IND,X 1A AC ff 3 7 6-11IND.Y 16 AC ff 3 7 7-8

DM Decimal Adjust A Adjust Sum to BCD INH 19 2 2-1 ----nnDEC (opr) Decrement Memory Byte M - 1 -* M EXT 7A hh n 3 6 5-8 ---•ni-

IND,X 6A ff 2 6 6-3IND.Y 18 6A ff 3 7 7-3

OECA Decrement Accumulator A A- 1 -»A A INH 4A 2 2-1 -■in-DECS Decrement Accumulator B B-1 -* B B INH 5A 2 2-1 • — in-OES Decrement Stack Pointer SP-1 -* SP INH 34 3 2-3DEX Decrement Index Register X IX — 1 -»IX INH 09 3 2-2 ........i --DEY Decrement Index Register Y IY — 1 —► fY INH 18 09 4 2-4 ........i - -EORA(opr) Exclusive OR A with Memory A © M -» A AIMM 88 ii 2 2 3-1 — no-

ADIR 98 dd 2 3 4-1A EXT 88 hh D 3 4 5-2A IND.X A8 ff 2 4 6-2A IND,Y 18A8 ff 3 S 7-2

EORB (opr) ExtUiske OR B with Memory BIMM ce ii 2 2 — no-B DIR 06 dd 2 3 4-1BEXT FG hh n 3 4 5-2B IND.X EG ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 E8 ff 5 7-2

FDIV Fractional Divide 16 by 16 0/IX -»IX; r -» D INH 03 41 2-17 ......... inIDIV Integer Divide 16 by 16 D/IX -»IX; r -> D INH 02 41 2-17 ......... 101INC (opr) Increment Memory Byte M + 1 -»M EXT 7C hh II 6 5-8 ■—in-

IND.X 6C ff 2 6 6-3IND.Y 18 6C ff 3 7 7-3

fNCA Increment Accumulator A A+ 1 -* A A INH 4C 1 2 2-1 ---ni-INCB increment Accumulator B B + 1 -» B B INH 5C 1 2 2-1 • —m-INS increment Stack Pointer SP ♦ 1 -» SP rNH 31 1 3 2-3INX Increment Index Register X IX + 1 -4 IX INH 08 1 3 2-2 ........ i --INY Increment Index Register Y IY + 1 -»IY INH 18 08 2 4 2-4 — i..JMP(opr) Jump See Special Ops EXT 7E hh It 3 3 5-1

IND.X 6E ff 2 3 6-1IND,Y 18 6E ff 4 7-1

JSR (opr) Jump to Subroutine See Special Ops DIR 9D dd 2 5 4-8EXT BD hh n 3 6 5-12IND.X AD ff 2 6 6-12IND.Y 18 AD ff 3 7 7-9

LDAA (opr) Load Accumulator A M -» A AIMM 86 ii 2 2 3-1 ■-I10-ADIR 96 dd 2 3 4-1A EXT B6 hh n 3 4 S2AIND.X A6 ff 2 4 6-2A IND,Y 18 A6 ff 3 5 7-2

LDAB (opr) Load Accumulator B M -* B B IMM C6 ii 2 2 3-1 ----110-B DIR D£ dd 2 3 4-1B EXT FG hh II 3 4 5-2B IND.X EG ff 2 4 6-2B IND,Y 18 E6 ff 3 5 7-2

LDD(opr) Load Double Accumulator D M -» A.M + 1 -> B IMM CC jj kk 3 3 3-2 -------IIO-DIR DC dd 2 4 4-3EXT FC hh n 3 5 5-4IND,X EC ff 2 5 6-6IND,Y 18 EC ff 3 6 7-6

*Cycle-by-cycle number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.

MOTOROLA10-8



SourceForm(s)



Byt

es

Cyc

le

Cycleby

Cycle*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) SXHINZVC

LDS (opr) Load Stack Potnter M:M + t -+SP IMM 8E 0 kk 3 3 3-2 ------ 11 0-DIR 9E dd 4 4-3EXT BE hh II 3 5 5-4IND.X AE ff 2 5 6-6IND.Y 18 AE ff 6 7-6

LDX (opr) Load fndex Register X M M + 1 -»IX IMM CE jj kk 3 3-2 ------ 110-DIR DE dd 2 4 4-3EXT FE hh a 3 5 5-4IND.X EE ff 2 5 6-6IND.Y CD EE ff 6 7-6

LDY (opr) load Index Register Y M:M + 1 -» IY IMM 18 CE jj kk 4 4 3-4 ------ 11 0-DIR 18 DE dd 3 4-5EXT 18 FE hh D 4 6 5-6IND.X 1AEE ff 3 6-7fND.Y 18 EE ff 3 6 7-6

LSL (opr) Logical Shift Left EXT 78 hh II 6 5-8LSLA ------ ff

" I M I I I ! I I I I—o 3-7C b? bO A INH 4€ 2 2-1

B INH 58 2 2-1

LSLD Logical Shift Left Double „_ INH 05 1 3 2-2 •-I1I1□HH-------------CD—o

C b15 bO

LSR (opr) Logical Shift Right EXT 74 hh n 3 6 5-8 — 1111LSRA ----- “ 64 ff 6— ——- ••• 7-3LSRB 67 60 C A INH 44 2 2-1

B INH 54 1 2 2-1

LSRD Logical Shift Right DoubFe ----- - INH 04 1 3 2-2 — outo-H I I------- -II I—I I

bl5 bO C

MUL Multiply 8 by 8 AxB -* 0 INH 3D 1 10 2-13 ..............1

NEG (opr) 2s Complement Memory Byte 0-M -»M EXT 70 hh 0 3 6 5-8 -miIND.X 60 ff 2 6 6-3IND.Y 18 60 ff 3 7 7-3

NEGA 7s Complement A

<t<o

A INH 40 1 2 2-1 -•miNEGB 2s Complement B

m i

t:COIo

B INH 50 1 2 2-1 ----miNOP No Operation No Operation INH 01 1 2 2-1ORAA(opr) OR Accumulator A (Inclusive) A + M-»A A IMM 8A fi 2 2 3-1 -■110-

A DIR 9A dd 2 3 4-1A EXT BA hh n 3 4 5-2A IND.X AA ff 2 4 6-2A INO.Y 18 AA fr 3 5 7-2

ORAB (opr) OR Accumulator B (Inclusive) B + M -»B BIMM CA K 2 2 3-1 -------110-B DIR DA dd 2 3 4-13 EXT FA hh n 3 4 5-23 IND.X EA ff 2 4 6-2B fND.Y 18 EA ff 3 5 7-2

PSHA Push A onto Stack A -» Stk, SP * SP—1 A INH 36 1 3 2-6

PSHB Push B onto Stack 8 -> Stk, SP “ SP-1 B INH 37 1 3 2-6PSHX Push X onto Stack (Lo First) IX -» Stk, SP * SP-2 INH 3C 1 4 2-7PSHY Push Y onto Stack (Lo First) IY -» Stk, SP ■ SP-2 NH 18 3C 2 5 2-8PULA Pull A from Stack SP * SP ♦ 1, A«-Stk A INH 32 1 4 2-9PULB Pull B from Stack SP=SP + 1, B4-Stk B INH 33 1 4 2-9PULX Pull X from Stack (Hi First) SP = SP + 2, IX«-Stfc NH 38 1 5 2-10PULY Pull Y from Stack (Hi First) SP* SP+2, IY«-Stk INH 18 38 2 6 2-11ROL (opr) Rotate Left EXT 79 hh II 3 6 5-8 —1111

------ IND.X 69 ff 2 6 6-3ROLA I M I H I I I I M I ff / 7-3

C b7 bO C MNH 1 7 2-1ROLB B INH 59 1 2 2-1

*Cyde-by-cyde number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cyde-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.


MOTOROLA10-9

Table 10-1 MC68HC11A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Times(SheetS of 6)

SourceForm(s)



e>£aa C

ycle

j Cycleby

Cyde*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) 8XHINZVC

ROR (opr) Rotate Right EXT 76 hh n 3 6 S-8 ----nn----- - INO.X 66 ff 2 6 6-3

RORA n-n 1 1 ii ri i hi IND.Y 1866 ff / 7-346 2-1

B INH 56 2 2-1

RTI Return from Interrupt See Special Ops INH 3B 12 2-14 unnnRTS Return from Subroutine See Special Ops INH 39 S 2-12SBA Subtract B from A A-B A INH 10 2 2-1 • •--nnSBCA (opr) Subtract with Carry from A a-m-c-»a AIMM 82 ii 2 2 3-1 ----nn

ADIR 92 dd 2 4-1A EXT B2 hh 0 3 4 5-2A IND.X A2 ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18A2 ff 3 5 7-2

SBC8 (opt) Subtract with Carry from B e-M-c -> B BIMM C2 ii 2 2 3-1 ----nnBOIR D2 dd 2 3 4-1BEXT F2 hh n 3 4 5-2B IND.X E2 ff 2 4 6-28 IND.Y 18 E2 ff 3 S 7-2

SEC Set Cany 1 -»c INH OD 1 2-1 ...............1SEi Set Interrupt Mask 1 ->! INH OF 1 2 2-1 ... 1 —SEV Set Overflow Flag 1 -+V INH OB 1 2-1 ............ 1 -STAA (opr) Store Accumulator A A -»M ADIR 97 dd 2 3 4-2 --no-

A EXT B7 hh 11 3 4 5-3A IND.X A7 ff 2 4 6-5A IND.Y 18 A7 fT 3 5 7-5

STAB (opr) Store Accumulator B B -» M 8 DIR D7 dd 2 3 4-2 - - — IIo-BEXT F7 hh n 3 4 5-38 IND.X E7 ff 2 4 6-5B IND.Y 18 E7 ff 3 5 7-5

STO (opr) Store Accumulator D A-»M, B-+M + 1 DIR DD dd 2 4 4-4 --no-EXT FC hh II 3 5 5-5IND.X ED ff 2 5 6-8IND.Y 18 ED ff 3 6 7-7

STOP Stop Internal Clocks INH CF 1 2 2-1STS (opr) Store Stack Pointer SP M:M +1 DIR 9F dd 2 4 4-4 ....no-

EXT BF hh n 3 5 5-5IND.X AF ff 2 5 6-8IND.Y 18 AF ff 3 6 7-7

STX (opr) Store Index Register X IX -»M:M +1 DIR DF dd 2 4 4-4 - —no-EXT FF hh H 3 5 5-5IND.X EF ff 2 5 6-8IND.Y CD EF ff 3 6 7-7

STY (opr) Store Index Register Y IY + 1 DIR 18 DF dd 3 5 4-6 — no-EXT 18 FF hh II 4 6 5-7IND.X 1AEF ff 3 6 6-9IND.Y 18 EF ff 3 6 7-7

SU8A (opr) Subtract Memory from A A-M -* A AIMM 80 ii 2 2 3-1 - —tinADIR 9C dd 2 3 4-1A EXT BG hh II 3 4 5-2A IND.X AO ff 2 4 6-2A IND.Y 18 A0 ff 3 5 7-2

SUBB (opr) Subtract Memory from B B-M -> B BIMM CO ii 2 2 3-1 ----mi3 DIR DO dd 2 3 4-1BEXT FC hh II 3 4 5-26 IND.X EC ff 2 4 6-2B IND.Y 18 E0 ff 3 S 7-2

SUBD(opf) Subtract Memory from D D - M:M + 1-» D IMM 83 ii kk 3 4 3-3 ....nt iDIR 92 dd 2 5 4-7EXT B3 hh II 3 6 5-10IN0.X A3 ff 2 6 6-10IND.Y 18 A3 ff 3 7 7-8

SW1 Software Interrupt See Special Ops INH 3F 1 14 2-15 ...1—

TAB Transfer A to 8 A-»B INH 16 1 2 2-1 — tio-

TAP Transfer A to CC Register A-»CCR INH 06 1 2 2-1 liinntTBA Transfer Bto A B -»A INH 17 1 2 2-1 -.--no-

*Cycle-by-cycfe number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.

MOTOROLA10-10



SourceForm(s)



VIti%a C

ycle

I Cycleby

Cycle*

Condition Codes

Opcode Operand(s) SXHINZVCTEST TEST (Only in Test Modes) Adcfress Bus Counts INH 00 2-20TPA Transfer CC Register to A CCR -* A INH 07 2 2-1TST (opr) Test for Zero or Minus M — 0 EXT 7D hh It 3 6 5-9 — Itoo

[NO.X 6C ff 2 6 6-4IND.Y 186D ff 3 7-4

TSTA A-0 A INH 40 1 2 2-1 — •1100TSTB B-0 BINH 5D 1 2 2-1 — sxooTSX Transfer Stack Pointer to X SP + 1 -»IX INH 30 1 3 2-3TSY Transfer Stack Pointer to Y SP + 1 -»IY INH 18 30 2 4 2-5TXS Transfer X to Stack Pointer IX-1 -»SP INH 35 1 3 2-2TYS Transfer Y to Stack Pointer IY — 1 ->SP [NH 18 35 2 4 2-4WAI Wait for interrupt Stack Regs & WAIT INH 3E 1 2-16XGDX Exchange D with X IX -> D, D -»IX INH 8F 1 3 2-2XGDY Exchange D with Y IY 0. D -» IY INH 19 8F 2 4 2-4

•Cyde-by-cycle number provides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation. Example: Table 10-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2*4.

•‘Infinity or Until Reset Occurs***12 Cycles are used beginning with the opcode fetch. A wait state is entered which remains in effect for an integer

number of MPU E-clock cycles (n) until an interrupt is recognized. Finally, two additional cycles are used to fetch the appropriate interrupt vector (14 + n total),

dd = 8-Bit Direct Address ($0000 -SOOFF) (High Byte Assumed to be $00) ff = 8-Bit Positive Offset $00 (0) to $FF (255) (Is Added to Index) hh = High Order Byte of 16-Bit Extended Address ii = One Byte of Immediate Data jj = High Order Byte of 16-Bit Immediate Data kk = Low Order Byte of 16-Bit Immediate Data II = Low Order Byte of 16-Bit Extended Address mm = 8-Bit Bit Mask (Set Bits to be Affected) rr = Signed Relative Offset $80 (-128) to $7F (+ 127)

(Offset Relative to the Address Following the Machine Code Offset Byte)


MOTOROLA10-11

Table 3-1 Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 1 of 2)

$1000

$1001

$1002

$1003

$1004

$1005

$1006

$1007

$1008

$1009

$100A

$100B $100C

$1000 OC1D7 OC1D6 OC1D5 0C104 OC1D3

Bit 0 | PORTA I/O Port A

Reserved

INVB PIOC

PORTC

PORTB

PORTCL

DDRC

PORTD

DDRD

PORTE

CFORC

OC1M

OC1D

$100E Bit 15 - - - - - Bite

$1 OOF Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$1010 Bit 15 - - - - - - Bite

$1011 Bit 7 - - - - - - 8it0

$1012 Bit15 - - - - - - Bit 8

$1013 Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$1014 Bit 15 - - - - - - Bite

$1015 Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$1016 Bit 15 - - - - - - Bite

$1017 Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$1018 Bit 15 - - - - - Bitfi

$1019 Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$101A Bit 15 _ - - - - - Bit 8

$101B Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$101C Bit 15 - - - - - - Bit 8

S101D Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

$101E Bit 15 - - - - - - Bit 8

$101F Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

Parallel I/O Control Register

I/O PortC

Output PortB

Alternate Latched Port C

Data Direction for Port C

I/O Port D

Data Direction for PortD

Input Port E

Compare Fores Register

OC1 Action Mask Register

OC1 Action Data Register

Timer Counter Register

Input Capture 1 Register



Output Compare 1 Register




Oulput Compare 5 Register

MOTOROLA3-2

ON-CHIP MEMORY MC68HC11A8TECHNICAL DATA

Table 3-1 Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 2 of 2)

$1021

$1022

$1023

$1024

$1025

$1026

$1027

$1028

$1029

$102A

$102B

S102C

S102D

$1026

$102F

$1030

$1031

$1032

$1033

$1034

$1035

thro

$1038

$1039

$103A

$1038

S103C

$1030

$103E

$103F

$1020 OM2 OL2 OM3 013 OM4 OL4 OM5 OL5

EDG1B EDG1A EOG2B EDG2A EDG3B EOG3A

OCtl OC2I OC3I OC4I OC5I IC1I IC2I IC3I

OC1F OC2F OC3F OC4F OC5F IC1F IC2F IC3F

TOI RTII PAOVI PAH PR1 PRO

TOF RTIF PAOVF PAIF

DDRA7 PAEN PAMOD PEDGE RTR1 RTRO

Bit 7 - - - - - - 8ft 0

SPiE SPE DWOM MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPRO

SPIF WCOL MODF

Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

TCLR SCP1 SCPO RCKB SCR2 SCR1 SCRO

R8 T8 M WAKE

TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK

TRDE TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE

Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

CCF SCAN MULT CD CC C8 CA

Bit 7 _ - - - - - BitO

Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

Bit 7 - - - - - - BitO

ADPU CSEL IRQE DLY CME CR1 CRO

Bit 7 - - - - - _ BitO

ODD EVEN BYTE ROW ERASE EELAT EEPGM

RBOOT SMOD MDA IRV PSEL3 PSEL2 PS ELI PSELO

RAM3 RAM2 RAM1 RAMO REG3 REG2 REG1 REGO

TILOP OCCR CBYP DISR FCM FCOP TCON

- - - - NOSEC NOCOP ROMON EEON

^SCSR

Ttmer Control Register 1

Timer Control Register 2

Timer Interrupt Mask Register 1

Timer Interrupt Flag Register 1

Timer Interrupt Mask Register 2

Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2

Putse Accumulator Control Register

Pulse Accumulator Count Register

SPI Control Register

SPI Status Register

SPI Data Register

SCI Baud Rate Control

SCI Control Register 1

SCI Control Register 2

SCI Status Register

SCI Data {Read RDR, Write TOR)

A/D Control Register

A/D Result Register 1



A/D ResuR Register 4

System Configuration Options

Arm/Reset COP Timer Circuitry

EEPROM Program Control Register

Highest Priority 1-Bit Int and Misc

RAM and I/O Mapping Register

Factory TEST Control Register

COP. ROM, and EEPROM Enables

MC68HC11A8TECHNICAL DATA

ON-CHIP MEMORY MOTOROLA

3-3

17-SEL 4533-

APPENDIX: M68HC11 PIN OUT

PA7/PAI/0C1 C 1

i i48 ^ VDD

PA6/OC2/OC1 C 2 47 | PD5/SS

PA5/OC3/OC1 c 3 46 I PD4/SCK

PA4/OC4/OC1 [ 4 45 ] PD3/MOSI

PA3/OC5/OC1 : 5 44 ] PD2/MISO

PA2/IC1 [ 6 43 ] PD1/fxD

PA1/IC2 C 7 42 ] PDO/RxD

PA0/IC3 [ 8 41 ] IRQ

PB7/A15 [ 9 40 ] XIRQ

PB6/A14C 10 39 | RESET

PB5/A13 [ 11 38 ] PC7/A7./D7

PB4/A12 [ 12 37 | PC6/A6/D6

PB3/A11 C 13 36 ] PC5/A5/D5

PB2/A10C 14 35 ] PC4/A4/D4

PB1/A9 [ 15 34 ] PC3/A3/D3

PB0/A8 C 16 33 ] PC2/A2/D2

PEO/ANO C 17 32 ] PC1/A1/D1

PE1/AN1 C 18 31 PCO/AO/DO

PE2/AN2 C 19 30 XTAL

PE3/AN3 [ 20 29 EXTAL

VRL E 21 28 STRB/RM

Vrh C 22 27 E

vss C 23 26 STRA/AS

MODBA/g-pgy C 24 25 MODA/UR

18-SEL 4533-

APPENDIX: MOTOR DRIVER L293B

L293BL293E

PUSH-PULL FOUR CHANNEL DRIVERS

. OUTPUT CURRENT 1A PER CHANNEL

. PEAK OUTPUT CURRENT 2A PER CHANNEL (non repetitive)

. INHIBIT FACILITY

. HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY

. SEPARATE LOGIC SUPPLY

. OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION

DESCRIPTION

The L293B and L293E are quad push-pull drivers capableof delivering output currents to IA per channel. Each channel is controlled by a TTL-compatible logic input and each pair of drivers (a full bridge) is equipped with an inhibit input which turns off all four transistors. A separate supply input is provided for the logic so that it may be run off a lower voltage to reduce dissipation.Additionally, the L293E has external connection of sensing resistors, for switchmode control.The L293Band L293E are package in 16 and 20-pin plastic DIPs respectively ; both use the four center pins to conduct heat to the printed circuit board.

PIN CONNECTIONS

DIP16

ORDERING NUMBER: L293B

POWERDIP (16 * 2-> 2)

ORDERING NUMBER: L293E

mSGS-THOMSON

DIP16 - L293B POWERDIP (16+2+2) - L293E

VCHIP ENABLE I | 1 16 1 CHIP ENA8U.ll i 20 I

INPUT 1 | 2 15 ] INPUTt INPUT I 2 19 ] INPUT *

OUTPUT 1 | U ] OUTPUT C OUTPUT 1 3 IB ] OUTPUT 4

GNO | L 13 ] CNDSENSE 1 i. 17 | SENSE 4

GNO | 5 1 SN0nitti 5 16 ] GNO

OUTPUT ? | 6 11 ] OUTPUT 1GNO

SENSE 2

0

7

15

U

] GNO

] SENSE 3INPUT J J 10 ] INPUT 3

OUTPUT 2 B 13 ] OUTPUT 3

1 6 9 [chip enable 2INPUT I S 1? j INPUT 3

S-&1B9*4 10 11 jCHIP ENABLE 2

19-SEL 4533-

APPENDIX: MOTOR DRIVER L293B (CONT)

DIP16 - L293B

Inputs FunctionVin n = H C = H ; D = L Turn Right

C = L; D = H Turn LeftC = D Fast Motor Stop

Vinh = L C = X; D = X Free Running Motor Stop

L = Low H = High X = Don’t Care

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEL 4223

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING I

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. SYED ABDUL RAHMAN BIN SYED ABU BAKAR

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEM / SEP / SET / SEW

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

29 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER QUESTION ONE (1) IN PART A ANSWER ANY THREE (3) QUESTIONS IN PART B.THIS IS AN OPEN BOOK EXAM.


Part A

a) State 2 reasons why the study of Linear Time-Invariant system is important.

(5 marks)

b) State 2 reasons why z-transform is more useful in system analysis compared to

Fourier transform. (5 marks)

c) State 2 differences between FIR and IIR systems. (5 marks)

d) A signal is defined as follows

x(t) = cos (27r3000t) - oo < t < oo

i) Sketch the frequency representation for 2n < co < 2n if the signal is

sampled at 10 kHz. (5 marks)

ii) What is the minimum sampling frequency for this signal? Explain your

reasons. (5 marks)

SEL 4223-2-

QUESTION 1

QUESTION 2

An impulse response of an LTI system is given as follow:

h[n] = u[n] + u[n - 2] - 2u[n - 5]

a) State whether this system is an FIR or an IIR system and justify your

answer. (3 Marks)

b) Compute the system function, H(z), of the above system and determine its

Region of Convergence (ROC). (7 Marks)

c) If the input, x[n], to this system is given as follow

x[n] = u[n] - u [ n - 1] + u [ n - 3] - u [ n - 4]

i) Sketch the output signal, y[n]. (5 Marks)

ii) Express Y(z), the z-transform of the output signal in terms of H(z).

(5 Marks)

d) If the z-transform of the output, Y (z), can be written as follows:

Y(z) = 1 + z-1 + z~2 + z~3 — 2 z~5 — 2 z-6

State what is the new input, xn e w[n], to this system? (5 Marks)

SEL 4223-3-

PART2

SEL 4223-4-

An LTI system has the following pole-zero plot shown in Figure Q3.

OUESTION 3

Figure Q3

a) Can this system be causal and stable? Justify your answer.

b) What should be the ROC if the system is to be stable?

(3 Marks)

(3 Marks)

c) Give the difference equation for the system shown in Figure Q3. (10 Marks)

d) Properly sketch and label the magnitude spectrum for the above system for0 < (o < n. (9 Marks)

SEL 4223-5-

An impulse response, h[n], of an LTI system is shown in Figure Q4a below:-

OUESTION 4

Figure Q4a

a) State whether the above system is a zero-phase, l inear-phase, tninimum-phase, or

reverse-phase system. (2 Marks)

b) Suppose the input to this system is as shown in Figure Q4b, obtain the output

signal to this system. (10 Marks)

0 x[n]

‘ T I T 1 T0 1 2 3 4 n

Figure Q4b

c) Obtain the magnitude spectrum |//[&]| using trigonometry terms for the above

system using 10-point DFT. (10 Marks)

d) State the difference between Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) and

Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). (3 Marks)

Consider the following 16-point DFT of x[n] which was sampled at 800 Hz

SEL 4223-6-

OUESTION 5

Figure Q5

a) What is the resolution for each index kl (2 Marks)

b) Suppose X[6] and X[10], represent noise, what type of filter should be used to removed this noise? (3 Marks )

c) Propose a suitable cutoff frequency such that the noise whose frequency mentioned in b) could be somewhat eliminated. (2 Marks)

d) Using the 2nd order Butterworth HR prototype given below do the following

1Hc(s) =

s2 + V2s + 1

i. Obtain the prewarp critical frequency such that the above normalized prototype filter gives the desired response. (3 Marks)

ii. Obtain the analog version of the desired Iowpass filter, H(s). (5 Marks)

iii. Using bilinear transformation technique, obtain the digital filter, H(z).(10 Marks)

SEL 4223-7-

OUESTION 6

Observe the following impulse response of an LTI system and answer the following questions. Note: n is the time index while k is the frequency index.

h[n]

1-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

a) Is this system stable? Justify your answer.

b) Is this system causal? Justify your answer.

c) Determine what is the type of this linear phase filter.

d) Without having to compute H[k], determine the value for H[0],

(3 Marks)

(3 Marks)

(3 Marks)

(3 Marks)

e) Without having to compute H[k], determine the phase response, (3 Marks)

f) Express |//[fc].|, the 10-point DFT of the given h[n] in terms of cosine functions.

(10 Marks)

Table 1 Fourier transform properties

Properties x(t) mDifferentiation in time dnx(t)

dt"

Integration in time T i l[ x(t)dt

-77 2

772

X(f) \e j 2*'dt-772

Time-shift < t - T d ) X(f)e'J

Frequency-shift x{t)eJ 2^ X ( f + f i )Linearity x(t) + y(t) X{f) + Y{f)

Product of two signals *(0X0 00

\x{v)Y(f-v)dv—CO

Convolution of two signals x(t) * y{t) X<J)Y<J)Time scaling x(at)

rAL\M \a)

Parseval’s theorem oo

Ex = j[x(t)fdt — 00

00

Ex = \ [X{f)]2df—00

Table 2 DFT properties

Properties x[«]Linearity axxx (n) + a2x2{ri) a lX l (k) + a2 X2 (k)Shift in time x{n - m) . 2xkm

e~J~ X(k)Shift in frequency .2 7mm

e J N x(n)X(k-m)

Circular convolution N-\

^ x x (A)x2 [(« - A) mod N]x=o

X x(k)X 2(k)

Multiplication x i (n)x 2 (n) N-\

£ X, (A)X2 [(A: - X) mod TV]A = 0

Parseval’s theorem^ | x ( « ) | 2

n=0E N 2

k=0

SEL 4223-9-

Table 3 DTFT properties

Sequencex[n\y[n]

Fourier Transform X(e^)

Y(eJ 2 4 )1. ax[n\+ by[ri \ aX{eJ 2 ¥) + bY(eJ W)

2. x[n - nd] , (nd an integer) e-M>* X^ eJ*f)

3. e j 2^”x(n) X{eJ 2* ( f~ f o ))

4. x[-ri \ X(e~J 3 ¥)

X*(e j 2 4) ifx[«]real.

5. nx[ri \ dX(eJ 2 n f) J dlnf

6. x[ri \ * y[n\ X(e i W)Y(eJ W)

7. x[n\y[n\\ f , ' f

2 X(eJ l m )Y(e i 2*u- v ) )dv

Parseval’s Theorem

8. — V \x(nf =— f/l/2 1 X{eJ 2*f df

9‘ ^ 2 *(”)/(”) = C ) 7 ‘ I?™ W

Table 4 z-transform properties

Properties x[n] X(z)Linearity a]X[(ji) + a2x2 (n) aiX\(z) + a 2X2 (z)Shift in time x(n +1) z{X{z)-xmMultiplication by n nx(n)

~z~X(z)dz

Multiplication by r" r"x(ri)atA

rConvolution 00

(k)x 2(n-k)k=Q

X^X^z)

Initial Value x(0) lim X(z)z—> oo

Final Value lim x(n) lim[(z-l)X(z)]Z-»l

SEL 4223-10-

Table 5 z-transform pairs

x[n ] for n > 0 X(z) Radius of convergence

N> RS(n) 1 05(n- in) z~m 0u (n) z

z -11

n z 1

(z-1)2

n 1 z(z + 1) (z-1)3

1

an zz-a

M

ncT az M(z-a) 2

(n+l)an z2W

(z-a) 2

(n +1 )(n + 2)...(« + m)a" Hml (z-ay+ I

cos Q 0 n z(z- cosCl 0 ) i

z 2 -2zcosQ0 +1

sin Cl0n z sin Q0 i

z2 -2zcosQ0 +1

a" cos Q.0n z(z-acosQ0) Hz2 -2zacosCl0 +a 2

a” sin Q0n za sinQ0 | a\z 2 - 2zacosQ 0 + a1

exp [-anT] z exp[-a7]|z - expf-aT1]

nT Tz 1

(z-1)2

nT exp [-anT] Tzexpf-ar] jexp[-a7]|[z-exp[-a7]]2

cos nca0T z(z -cosa>0T) 1

z2 -2zcoscoaT + 1sin nco0T zsin coqT 1

z2 -2zcosco0T + 1

SEL 4223-11-

exp[-a«7]cos ncoQT z(z - exp[-ar] cos co0T) exp[-ar]|z2 -2zexp[-ar]cosft)or + exp[-2ar]

exp[-a«r]sin nco0T z(z - exp[-aT]sin a>0T) |exp[-ar]|z2 -2zexp[-ar]cosft)or + exp[-2ar]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEI4123

APPLIED ROBUST CONTROL

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. YAHAYA BIN MD. SAM ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD NOH BIN AHMADDR. ZOOL HILMI BIN ISMAIL

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEI

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

25 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER ANY FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2

(SEI4123)

Question 1

a) Define a robust control system.

[2 marks]b) Discuss the relationship between sensitivity and the percent overshoot in the robust

control design.

[3 marks]c) A robust control system is represented by the block diagram as in Figure Ql,

R(s)K

s(s + 2£co„)C(s)

Figure Ql

The dominant poles of the system for K = 10 are located at -1.5 + y'4.21.

i) Calculates the system sensitivity and percentage overshoot at this location.

[9 marks]

ii) What happen to the system sensitivity and percentage overshoot if K is increased

to K = 50, where the new dominant poles are located at -1.5 + J6.92 .

[8 marks]

d) Comment the results obtained in (i) and (ii) in terms of sensitivity and percentage overshoot.

[3 marks]

3

(SEI4123)

Consider a unity feedback control system as illustrated in Figure Q2.

Question 2

K ---- ^

(s + 5)(s - 4) (s +10)09+ 2)2

C(s)

ii.

----- W

Figure Q2

a) What is the range of K for a stable system.

[3 marks]

b) Determine the gain of K for a zero steady-state error if the input unit step is applied to the

system.

[5 marks]

c) Obtain the system stability if K is varies ±15% from the gain obtained in (b).

[5 marks]

d) Design ITAE system if the proportional gain K is changed to the PID controller so that

the peak time response to a step input is less than 2.5 seconds with suitable damping

ratio.

[12 marks]

(SEI4123)

1 8a) A closed-loop unity feedback system has G(s) =-----------------where b = 5, nominally. Determine thes(s + b)

sensitivity of the closed-loop transfer function T(s) to changes in b.

[7 marks]b) Consider a unity feedback control system as shown in Figure Q3 where the system

characteristic equation is given by

S + CljS 0\S + Qq = 0

and the variation of parameters of the nominal characteristic equation are as in Table Q3.

Table Q3: Variation of parameters

Question 3

Variables Minimum Maximum

2 4

ai 1 3

ao 4 5

Under nominal condition, the controller and the plant transfer function is represented by

G (s)G(s) =-------- ---------s(s + 2)(s + 3)

i) Using the Routh-Hurwitz criterion, determine the stability of the system under nominal

condition.

[3 marks]

ii) Determine the four worst-case polynomials due to the variations in the parameters of the

nominal characteristic equations. -

[3 marks]

' 5

(SEI 4123)

iii) Determine the stability of the system under the presence of the uncertainty in the nominal

characteristic equation.

[12 marks]

Figure Q3

6

(SEI 4123)

Antilock Braking Systems (ABS) is operated by regulating the wheel slip, thus this action will

maximize the coefficient of friction between the tire and road for any road surface. The

simplified model of ABS is represented by a plant transfer function G(s) with a system as shown

in Figure Q4 with

G(S) = ̂ 1 =--------------- --------U(s) (s + a)(s + b)

where normally a = 1 and b = 4.

a) Using a PID controller, design a robust system where for a step input, the overshoot is

less than 4% and the settling time is 1 second or less. The steady-state error must be less

than 1% for a step input. It is expected that a and b to vary by ±50%.

[12 marks]b) Design a system using an ITAE performance index as given in Table Q4 and determine

the suitable pre-filter to improve specification in part (a).[10 marks]

c) Estimate the overshoot and the settling time for the design described in (b).[3 marks]

Question 4

D(s)

Figure Q4

7

(SEI4123)

Figure Q5 shows a control system with internal mode control scheme. The system is controlled

by a PID controller given as follows

K3 s2 + K2 s + K,

Question 5

G c(s) =

Figure Q5

a) Show that y(t) will track r f t j asymptotically in the steady-state mode.

[5 marks]

b) Design a state variable feedback and a PID compensator, to track a step input with zero

steady-state error. The system response due to unit step input must achieve a settling

time (to within 2% of the final value) in less than 1 second and a deadbeat response.

Assume that the two poles of the plant can change by 50%.

[20 marks]

(SEI4123)

Table Q4: ITAE Criterion for a Step Input

S + U)„

+ 1.4oj„v + &I r’ + 1.75ft;„,r + 2,15 + a^

•v4 + Ha,,?' + 3.4<a',r + 2.7a>is +■ m*.r5 + 2.8u>ns4 4- 5.0<^? + SSw^s 2 + 3Acots + <4 a' + 3.25 <u„.v + 6.60 + 8.60a>;^r + 7.45 + 3.95 + <tf

Table Q5: Coefficients and Response Measures of a Deadbeat System

System CoefficientsOrder a P Vi 5 e PO PU Tr90 Tr Ts2nd 1.82 0.10% 0.00% 3.47 6.58 4.82

3rd 1.90 2.20 1.65% 1.36% 3.48 4.32 4.04

4th 2.20 3.50 2.80 0.89% 0.95% 4.16 5.29 4.81

5 th 2.70 4.90 5.40 3.40 1.29% 0.37% 4.84 5.73 5.43

6th 3.15 6.50 8.70 7.55 4.05 1.63% 0.94% 5.49 6.31 6.04

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME MEDICAL TOMOGRAPHY

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. IR. DR. ING. EKO SUPRIYANTO

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

27 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE THIS QUESTION PAPER CONSISTS OF FOUR (4) QUESTIONS. ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN THE ANSWER BOOKLET PROVIDED. BEGIN EACH ANSWER ON A NEW PAGE.

CANDIDATES ARE PROHIBITED TO BRING ANY MATERIAL INTO THE EXAMINATION HALL UNLESS PERMITTED TO DO SO BY CHIEF INVTLIG AT OR.

DO NOT TURN THIS PAGE UNTIL YOU ARE TOLD TO DO SO.


2

SEP 4253

Single element ultrasound transducer is used to measure the red blood cell velocity in the

depth of 2 mm from transducer as shown in figure 1. The blood cell has form of a ball

with diameter of 0.05 mm. Measurement result shows that the red blood cell velocity is

10 cm/s. Doppler angle, 0 is 60°.

Question 1

Figure Question 1: Blood flow measurement

The acoustic properties of related tissue are listed in Table 1

Table 1 Tissue acoustic property

TissueSound Velocity (c)

(m/s)

Acoustic Impedance (Z)

(MRayls)Attenuation (dB/cm)

Skin / Muscle 1580 1.7 1.2

Water 1540 1.5 0.0022

Blood 1570 1.6 0.18

A piezoceramic (PZT) with thickness of 0.35 mm is used to send and receive ultrasound waves.

Physical properties of this material are listed in Table 2. The transducer is a tube with diameter

of 5 mm.

3

SEP 4253

Table 2 Physical property of PZT

Parameter Value

Density 7 x 103 kg.m'3

Young Modulus (Stiffness) 8.55 x 1010 Nm‘2

Acoustic Impedance 10 MRayls

Quality factor 22

Electromechanical coupling coefficient 0.4

(a) Determine the resonance frequency (fr) of the transducer.

(2 Marks)

(b) If the electric power applied to the transducer is 1 W, calculate the output power of

transducer for the reflection due to the difference acoustic impedance between skin and

blood vessel.

(7 Marks)

(c) If a continues wave is applied to the transducer with frequency fr, calculate the output

frequency of transducer due to the blood flow with velocity of 10 mm/s.

(3 Marks)

(d) If a pulse wave with pulse width l/fr is applied to the transducer to measure the red blood

cell velocity in the depth of 2 mm from the transducer, find the maximum Pulse Repetition

Frequency (PRF) to measure the blood cell velocity.

(4 Marks)

4

SEP 4253

Question 2

Figure 2, 3,4 and 5 are pictures of a 4T MRI machine and its important parts.

Figure 2: MRI Machine Figure 3: Permanent Magnet

Figure 4: Gradient Coil Figure 5: Radio Frequency Coil

(a) Sketch the block diagram of the MRI machine

(b) Explain the function of Magnet, Gradient Coil and RF Coil

5

SEP 4253

(4 Marks)

(6 Marks)

(c) Explain the work principle of MRI machine starting from the generation of high field

magnet up to display the image.

(4 Marks)

Question 3

(a) Explain the working principle of Positron Emission Tomography (PET).

(b) State the advantages of PET scan compared to CT Scan.

(c) Mention two sensors for PET detector.

6

SEP 4253

(4 Marks)

(2 Marks)

(2 Marks)

7

SEP 4253

a) In order to protect people from ionizing radiation, or to calculate the risk/benefit ratio for

exposing a patient to possibly necessary radiation, it is obviously necessary to measure

radiation to which the subject is exposed. The unit of exposure used to be the roentgen

(R) that was defined as “The quantity of radiation that will release an electrical charge of

...(a)... coulombs in one kilogram of dry air.” This is equivalent to about ...(b)..............................

electrons. A more useful measure is derived from the concept of radiation dose, which

describes the dose of radiation absorbed by human tissue. The unit of dose is the ‘gray’

(Gy). A dose of 1 Gy means that...............(c)........eV of energy have been absorbed in 1 kg

of tissue. The unit of dose equivalent is that dose that gives the same risk of damage or

detriment to health caused by any type of radiation. This unit is called Sievert (Sv). The

International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP) recommends maximum

annual dose equivalent for radiation workers as ....(d)...................mSv, with a 5-year average

less than ...(e).... mSv per year. Larger doses are allowed to specific body parts. For

members of the public, the recommended whole-body dose is.................. (f).......mSv averaged

over 5 years.

Question 4

(6 Marks)

(B) List and describe three biological effects of ionizing radiation accordingly

(6 Marks)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEL 4233

MICROELECTRONICS I

LECTURERS PROF. DR. RAZALI BIN ISMAIL DR. NIHAD K. ALI AL-OBAIDI

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEL / SEW

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

28 APRIL 2011



SEL 42332

Ql. (a) Draw the energy band diagram of a compensated semiconductor

showing clearly the followings :

(i) thermal electrons and holes,

(ii) ionized and unionized donors,

(iii) ionized and unionized acceptors,

(iv) donor electrons and acceptor holes,

(v) donor electrons recombine with acceptor holes.

(10 marks)

(b) Sketch the plot of the position of Fermi level as a function of:

(i) donor concentration (n-type) and acceptor concentration (p-

type),

(ii) temperature for both n-type and p-type.

In both of the above cases, give some explanation of the plot.

(5 marks)

(c) A Si sample at T = 450 K is doped with 1.5 x 1015 cm'3 boron and with

arsenic at a concentration of 8 x 1014 cm'3.

(i) Is the material n or p type ?

(ii) Determine the electron and hole concentrations.

(iii) Calculate the total ionized impurity concentration.

(10 marks)

Q2. (a) What do you understand by mobility? Give 2 mechanisms which

affect mobility value. Explain clearly how these mechanisms influence

mobility.

(10 marks)

(b) The resistivity of n-type material is typically smaller than the

resistivity of comparably doped p-type material. Explain why.

(5 marks)

(c) Consider silicon at T = 300 K. A Hall effect device (Fig. Q2(c)) is

fabricated with the following geometry : d = 5 x 1 O'3 cm, W = 5 x 1 O'2

cm, and L = 0.50 cm. The electrical parameters measured are Ix = 0.50

mA, Vx = 1.25 V, and Bz = 650 gauss = 6.5 x 10'2 tesla. The Hall field

is Eh= -16.5 mV/cm. Determine

(i) The Hall voltage,

(ii) The conductivity type,

(iii) The majority carrier concentration,

(iv) The majority carrier mobility.

(10 marks)

SEL 42333

Fig. Q2(c)

SEL 42334

An n-type silicon sample contains a donor concentration of Nd = 1016

cm' . The minority carrier hole lifetime is found to be xpo = 20 (is.

(i) What is the lifetime of the majority carrier electrons ?

(ii) Determine the thermal equilibrium generation rate for electrons

and holes in this material.

(iii) Determine the thermal equilibrium recombination rate for

electron and holes in this material.

(8 marks)

Impurity concentrations of Nd = 1015 cm'3 and Na = 6 xlO15 cm'3 are

added to silicon at T = 300 K. Excess carriers are generated in the material

such that the steady-state concentrations are 8n = 8P = 2 x 1014 cm'3.

(i) Find the thermal equilibrium Fermi level with respect to Epi.

(ii) Calculate EF„ and Ef p with respect to EF l .

(6 marks)

(c) In a silicon semiconductor material at T = 300 K, the doping

concentrations are Nd = 1015 cm"3 and Na = 0. The equilibrium

recombination rate is Rp q = 1011 cm'3-s'’. A uniform generation rate

produces an excess-carrier concentration of 8n = Sp = 1014 cm'3.

(i) By what factor does the total recombination rate increase ?

(ii) Find the excess-carrier lifetime.

(5 marks)

(d) Describe the concept of excess generation and recombination.

Q3. (a)

(b)

(6 marks)

SEL 42335

Q4. (a) A silicon abrupt junction in thermal equilibrium at T = 300 K is doped

such that; E c- Ep= 0.2 eV in the n region and Ep - E v = 0.18 eV in the

p region.

(i) Draw the energy band diagram of the pn junction.

(ii) Determine the impurity doping concentrations in each region.

(iii) Determine V^.

(12 marks)

(b) Draw the basic structure of the pn junction showing the space charge

region. Drawing should be labelled completely with major notations (space

charge region, electric field, and the force acting on the charged carriers).

(6 marks)

(c) Describe why and how the space charge region is formed in pn

junction.

(7 marks)

Q5. (a) Draw the energy band diagram of a zero-biased, forward-biased and

reverse-biased pn junctions. Drawing should be labelled completely

with major notations.

(9 marks)

(b) An n+ p silicon diode junction with a cross-sectional area of 10‘4 cm2 has the following properties at 7=300 K :

SEL 42336

N<r 10l8cm'J Na= 10lb cnr3

T-no — T'po- 10 SD„ = 25 cm2/s Dp = 10 cm2/s

Determine the diode current for:

(i) A forward-bias voltage of 0.2 V.

(ii) A reverse-bias voltage of 0.2 V.

(8 marks)

(c) Explain briefly the two physical mechanisms by which the reverse-bias

current increases rapidly in a pn junction.

(8 marks)

SEL 4233 7

EQUATION SHEET

h = 6.626 x 1 O'34 J - s h = 1.055 xl0~34 J-s q = 1.602 x 10',9C eV = 1.602 x 1 O'19 J m0 = 9.11 x 10'31 kg k = 8.617 x 10'5 eV/K

*2k2 E = —— + V

2m*

np = nj

Nc = 2

N„ =2

f *1 "T^3/2kT

2nh 7

f *1 t-^3/2mp kT

27i h 2

np = 4K2%h,‘ j

( * * V/2imnmp j exp

n-Nd+ -p + N“ =0

f(E)=-

f(E):

1 + exp

exp

fE-Ef

v kT~ ~ j

E-E f kT

§c(E) =

g. (E) =

2*371 h

E.-E) 1/2

Tt2/?.3

_ dV 1 dE dx q dx

Ef = Ec + kT Inf \ n

vN cy

E f = Ev +kTlnf \

_P vNv y

E f = E c +kT

E f =Ev+kT

InvNcy

+ _1__n_V8 N c

Inv N v y

+V 8 N v

n, =2j

I * * VKmJ3/4

p/ e XP\ 2kT

n i = V N C N v expv 2kT J

E _ Ec + E„ 3+ — kT In 2 4

f * \ mp

vmv

n = Jgc(E)f(E)f(E)dE

p = |gv(E)(l-f(E))dE

n =n ; exp

n = N c exp

E f~E,kT

(E -E ^ kT

p = n f expkT

p = Nv expEv-E f

kT

+ n-

SEL 42338

D _ kT

n q

rN -NiNA 1N D + n •

J „ = q ^ „ n F + q D n

JP =q^pnF + qDp

dndx

dpdx

dn 15J , s

— = -^ + (0-1*at q d x

dAn 52Ann Ann P - D„------- ^-------- - + G

d t " a. ,2dx"

a = nq|in + pqu

ex.nr

5Apn 52Apn Apn

^r-D'^_Tr+G

LP=a /D PTP

kT.

qVb l = —In

"n dN ax

w = / 2 e V > ' " n a + N dn

v N aNd ,

n, = 2.5x10 19f * * \V4

mn mPvmo mo J

r j ^3/2

V 300y

f T? \exp

v 2kTy

cm -3

Nc = 2.5xl019

{ * \3/2 , \ 3/2m„ | (T

Vmo J v300ycm

N =2.5x10 19x3/2

m„

Vmo / V

JL"300 j

3/2

cm -3

SEL 42339

Table of properties of selected semiconductors (at 300K)

Property Si Ge GaAsNc (cm'J) 2.78 x 10iy 1.04 x 10iy 4.45 x 10r/

Nv (cm'3) 9.84 x 101S 6.0 x 101!5 7.72 x 1018

nj (cm'J) 10IU 2.3 x 101J 1.8 x 10b

Eg (eV) 1.12 0.66 1.42mn7m0 1.18 0.55 0.067mD7m0 0.81 0.36 0.52

£r 11.8 16 13.17. (eV) 4.05 4.0 4.07

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEI 4153

COURSE NAME TRANDUCER & APPLICATIONS

LECTURERS DR. HERLINA BT ABD RAHIM

PROGRAMME SEI/SEP

SECTION 01


DATE 05 MAY 2011



2SEI4153

A inear variable differential transformer (LVDT) is normally used to measure small linear

displacement of object.

a. Please give an example and explain how this transducer is used in a paper industry

application and ballistocardiography measurement. (6 M)

b. A cross section of a balanced LVDT is shown in Fig. 1.1 and the input voltage is

shown in Fig 1.2. The maximum voltage output is 80% of the input voltage. Vout

i. Sketch Vout when the core is fully moved to the left (2 M)

ii. Sketch V0ut when the core is fully moved to the right (2 M)

iii. The core is moving on the x plane slowly for 20 seconds. Plot the position of

the core in x plane versus time when the Vout is as shown in Fig. 1.3

(4 M)

Question 1

c. Differential variable reluctance transducer (DVRT) is another inductive transducer

used for micro range linear displacement measurement. Explain what is the major

difference between DVRT and LVDT? (7 M)

d. State the advantages and disadvantages of an LVDT used for linear displacement measurement. (4 M)

Question 2

3SEI4153

a. In a motor drive experiment, an optical rotary transducer is used to measure the rotation

speed of the shaft movement. The motor shaft will move continuously in one direction.

i. What optical transducer can be used in this experiment? (1 M)

ii. Explain how this transducer can be used to measure the rotational speed of the

shaft by giving an example? (6 M)

iii. What is Gray Code and why is it important? (3 M)

b. A Wheatstone’s Bridge is used to measure the change of resistance. A rotary

potentiometer is connected to a Wheatstone bridge as shown in Figure 2.1.

i. Find Rpot if the bridge is balanced, using current and voltage analysis

(4 M)

ii. What is the Rpot if Vj n = 10 V, Ra= 25 kQ, Rb= 15 kQ and Rc= 35 kQ

(2M)

c. A resolver is used for rotary displacement measurement.

i. Draw and label the schematic diagram of a resolver . (3 M)

ii. Explain the construction and operation of the resolver to be used for rotary

displacement measurement. (6 M)

Question 3

4SEI4153

a. A load cell or pressure cell is normally used for measuring weight of heavy loads.

i. Explain how a load cell is used to measure the weight of heavy loads.

(6 M)

ii. Define Stress, Strain and Gauge Factor? (6 M)

b. Strain gauge can be used to continuously monitor the surface deflection of bridges.

However, due to outdoor environmental issue, the reading of a strain gauge is affected.

i. What is the disadvantages of this resistive sensor for outdoor strain

measurement?

(2M)

ii. What is the solution to obtain an accurate reading for strain or surface

deflection of the bridge? (5M)

iii. A gauge made of a material having a resistance temperature coefficient of 12 x

10'4 / °C, has a resistance of 150 Q. and a gauge factor of 2. It is connected to a

Wheatstone’s Bridge having resistance of 150 Q each. The bridge is balanced

at ambient temperature. If the temperature changes by 20 °C, find the

equivalent strain in ambient temperature represented by the change in

temperature. (6M)

5SEI4153

Question 4

a. You are the Process Engineer of KIKO fabric factory. You are assigned to prepare 20

liters of color dye per hour and send to the printing room for the newly designed fabric.

There are a few steps to follow in order to ensure that the dye quantity and quality is

following the requirements and the output is the same for every batch. The recipes and

procedures of preparing 20 L dye are:

1. 500 kg of each Red and Blue powder are mixed in a tank

2. The tank is then added with precisely 18 L of warm water at 60 °C and mixed gently

for precisely 10 minutes.

3. Then 1 L of acid solution is added slowly to the mixture and mixed for another 5

minutes.

4. Then the heating element gradually heated up the dye to 80 °C.

5. Once the dye solution reaches the desired temperature, the heating element will be

turned off and the tank will be transferred to the printing room via a conveyor belt.

i. According to the procedures mentioned above, what are the measurement

parameters and your suggested type of transducers in order to prepare this dye?

(6 M)

ii. The dye mixture is highly stained and is very difficult to clean unless using strong

acid. Suggest and explain the operational principle of a temperature transducer that

you would use in the production line. Why? (5 M)

b. Selecting suitable transducers for your production line is very important to promise good

production throughout the manufacturing period.

i. What are the criterions need to be considered when selecting suitable transducer

for a production line? (8 M)

ii. Define and give an example of transducer type self generator, modifier and

modulator. (6 M)

Question 5

6SEI4153

Your company is managing a few cooling districts in Malaysia. One of your company liquid

cooling districts that provide daily cooling services to MENARA KL and TNB tower is

located 15 km away from the city centre. The clear chilled water (-10 °C with 6.67 |j.S/cm) is

pumped and distributed to the whole MENARA KL and TNB tower through underground

pipelines. Flow transducers are used in order to monitor the flow rate of cool water and also to

ease identification of fault along the pipeline.

i. Suggest two (2) possible flow transducers that can be used in the pipeline to measure

the amount of chilled water usage of the MENARA KL and TNB tower. (4 M)

ii. Choose one of the most suitable flow transducer and explain the operational principle

of the flow transducer in general flow measurement and the pros and cons of this

transducer. (5M)

iii. Explain why you choose the flow transducer mentioned in Q5(ii), how it can be

installed and used to measure the flow rate as well as monitoring the fault in the

pipelines at the same time. (4 M)

iv. The chilled water is stored in pressurized tanks at the cooling district, the level of each

storage tank of the chilled water have to be monitored at all time to ensure no leakage

or faulty occured between the distributor and clients. You are assigned to find the most

suitable level transducer and installed it to 10 storage tanks in the storage hall. The

level of these 10 tanks can be monitored from the control room near the entrance of

the storage hall. Your manager would like to see a brief report and comparison of

three (3) different types of level transducers that are possible to use in this case and

which one is the best among the others. (12 M)

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME INDUSTRIAL CONTROL TECHNOLOGY

LECTURERS DR. SOPHAN WAHYUDI BIN NAWAWI MR. MOHAMAD SHUKRI BIN ABDUL MANAF

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SEE / SEI

01 - 02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

06 MAY 2011



2SEE4133

Question 1

a) Discuss four basic principles of valve which is normally used in process control.

(4 Marks)

b) The liquid from tank Po is transferred to a heat exchanger by using a single pump and past throw the valve with a rate of 1 OOgpm as shown in Figure Ql. The change in pressure inside the heat exchanger is 30 psi. Plot the flow rate versus position (x) for the linear and equal percentage control valve (a=50). The operation for both valves at fx (fraction of the total flow area) is equal to 0.5. Assume the total pressure drop for whole system is constant. The change in pressure rate at the valve is 40 psi

(6 Mark)

c) Discussed briefly about the Relay.(4 Marks)

d) A lighting control system is to be developed. The system will be controlled by fourswitches, SWITCH1, SWITCH2, SWITCH3, and SWITCH4. These switches will control the lighting in a room based on the following criteria:

i. Any of three of the switches SWITCH1, SWITCH2, and SWITCH3, if turned ON can turn the lighting on, but all three switches must be OFF before the lighting will turn OFF.

ii. The fourth switch SWITCH4 is a Master Control Switch. If this switch is in the ON position, the lights will be OFF and none of the other three switches have any control.

iii. Design the wiring diagram for the controller connections, assign the inputs and outputs and develop the ladder diagram which will accomplish the task.

(11 Marks)

3SEE4133

Question 2

a) A programmable logic controller (PLC) or programmable controller is a digital computer which is used for automation. Briefly discussed:

b) The PLC program is executed as part of a repetitive process. By using an appropriate figure, explain:

i.11 Scan Cycle”?ii. If a PLC program is 7.5K long and the scan rate of the machine is 7.5

msec/K, what will the length of time between I/O updates be?(10 marks)

c) By referring to the ladder diagram in figure Q2 , list down all the conditions to energize CR1. (5 marks)

i. The purpose of a Programmable Logic Controllerii. The features of a Programmable Logic Controlleriii. Two steps that PLC must perform during operationiv. The procedure for solving a rung of logic

(10 marks)

CR7 CR6 CR1

( )

CR2 CR5

CR1 CR4 CR3

Figure Q2: Illustration of allowed current flow in a ladder rung

4SEE4133

Question 3

RegulatedVoltage

Process

Actuator

Feedback Loop

ErrorSignal

CorrectionSignal

VariableAmplitude

Power to ^/Actuator

Processor« L Power Power► Driver

JVfewofy 1iController

Set Point

Figure Q3

a) Figure Q3 shows the block diagram of the elements that make up the feedback path on a process control loop, give the definition of the blocks listed below:

i. Feedback loopii. Set point

iii. Sensorsiv. Actuator (6 Marks)

b) There are situations in which a PLC must make a decision based on the results of the majority of inputs. Let us assume that a PLC is monitoring five tanks of liquid and must give a warning light to the operator when;

i. Three of them are empty. It doesn’t matter which tanks are empty, only that any three of the five are empty.

ii. Four or five empty tanks but as we will see, those cases will be automatically included when we design the system for three empty tanks above.

iii. If the empty tank is four or more, it will give a blinking light together with a warning light.

iv. You can label the tank with A, B, C, D and E.

Based on this situation:

i. Draw a state diagram.ii. Write down a Boolean expression.

iii. Draw the ladder diagram.(19 Marks)

5SEE4133

a) Draw schematic diagrams and explain in brief the control systems below together with one real application:

i. Feedback and feedfoward controlii. Ratio control

iii. Bypass control(3 Marks)

b) List the types of memory address table in PLC. Briefly explain how we can write number in memory address table of a PLC. (6 Marks)

c) Draw a complete block diagram for general architecture of an embedded control system.(8 Marks)

d) You are required to change the Data Memory table in a PLC to control the duration of green light at four junction traffic light based on the following condition;

Question 4

i. Every junction has installed 3 sensors to detect Long, Medium and Less number of cars.

ii. The timing diagram of duration is shown in the following table;Junction 1, Sensor (SI, S2, S3) Situation Duration of green lightSlA=l, S2A=1, S3A=1 Long Queue 100 SecondSlA=l, S2A=1, S3A=0 Medium Queue 70 SecondSlA=l, S2A=0, S3A=0 Less Queue 30 Second

Junction 2, Sensor (SI, S2, S3) Situation Duration of green lightSlB=l, S2B=1, S3B=1 Long Queue 90 SecondS)B=1, S2B=1, S3B=0 Medium Queue 60 SecondS]B=1, S2B=0, S3B=0 Less Queue 40 Second

Junction 3, Sensor (SI, S2, S3) Situation Duration of green lightSlC=l, S2C=1, S3C=1 Long Queue 80 SecondSlC=l, S2C=1, S3C=0 Medium Queue 50 SecondSlC=L S2C=0, S3C=0 Less Queue 20 Second

Junction 3, Sensor (SI, S2, S3) Situation Duration of green lightSlD=l, S2D=1, S3D=1 Long Queue 95 SecondSid=1, S2D=1, S3D=0 Medium Queue 65 SecondSid=1, S2D=0, S3D=0 Less Queue 35 Second

iii. Select appropriate address and draw a ladder diagram to write the above condition in the memory address table of a PLC. You do not have to write a program to control the sequence of red, green and yellow light of the Traffic light.

(8 Marks)

6SEE4133

a) Since SCADA systems are designed for reliability, availability and data integrity, extra consideration must be given to confidentiality and authentication. Write down some consideration to choose a SCADA for a process control. (6 Marks)

b) A typical control system consists of one or more remote terminal units (RTU) connected to a variety of sensors and actuators, and relaying information to a master station. A PLC can be used as RTU. Discuss the connection between the PLC to the sensors and HMI for the process in Figure Q5(a). (7 Marks)

Question 5

/PMh

(—^PIC>

i

FE

..221.

,1. rPSK'

<222j

50-HL-22«

-LPopcS

wed

Figure Q5(a)

PT ^234j

Figure Q5(b)

7SEE4133

You are required to control the following continuous process shown in Figure Q5(b). Explain briefly the connection using PLC.

i. As a PID Controller to control level and temperature.ii. The method to tune PID controller parameter suitable for the process

iii. As RTU to control and interface for monitoring using SCADA for the process.(12 Marks)

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

LECTURERS

PROGRAMME

DR. AZLI BIN YAHYADR. SHARIF AH HAFIZAH BT SYED ARIFFINDR. EILEEN SU LEE MINGMR. AMERUDDIN BIN BAHAROMMR. MUHAMMAD ARIF BIN ABD RAHIMMR. JAMEEL ABDULLA AHMED MUKRED


SECTION

TIME

DATE

01-05 /10

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

07 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN SECTION A ANDTHREE QUESTIONS FROM SECTION B. ALL WORKING MUST BE SHOWN CLEARLY IN THE ANSWER SHEET.


- 2 -SEE 1223

SECTION A [40 marks]

1. Convert

2.

(i) (10110)oray code tO B CD.

(ii) 5742g to hexadecimal.

[4 marks]

[4 marks]

The pin diagram of 7400 chip (quad 2-input NAND gates) is shown in Figure A(i).

Copy the diagram on your answer script and identify pin 1 and pin 14 as well as the

DC supply Vcc and GND pins on the diagram.

[4 marks]

3. By using Boolean algebra,

(i) simplify A.B + A.(B + C) + B.(B + C).

(ii) prove that A + B = A + A.B .

4. F(A,B,C,D) = n(l, 3, 5, 9, 13, 15) and don't care = D(2, 4, 7, 12, 14).

(i) Obtain the minimized POS expression using the K-map.

(ii) Implement the minimized function in NOR-NOR configuration.

[3 marks]

[3 marks]

[4 marks]

[3 marks]

-3 -SEE 1223

5. A medium scale integrated circuit (MSI circuit) accepts four inputs and produces two

outputs as shown in the Table A(i). X indicates don’t care conditions. Give a suitable

name for this circuit.

[3 marks]

Table A(i)

I3 I2 I. Io Oi Oo0 0 0 1 0 00 0 1 X 0 1

0 1 X X 1 0

1 X X X 1 1

6. Figure A(ii) shows a 4-1 multiplexer with a D flip-flop. Copy the diagram on your

answer script and show how these two devices can be connected to become a J-K flip-

flop. The J and K inputs are connected to the select bits Si and So respectively. You

can't use any additional gates.

[4 marks]

— OO'0Q

F — — >

<?Qo

Figure A(ii)

7. Figure A(iii) is a logic symbol of a 4-bit parallel adder. If X [X3..Xo]= 1111 and

Y[Y3..Yo] = 0101, show how this chip can be used as a 4-bit subtractor X - Y. Copy

the diagram on your answer script and label the diagram with the input and output

values. [Hint: 2's complement = l's complement + 1]

[4 marks]

-5 -SEE 1223

SECTION B [60 marks]

Question 1

(a) A student is required to simplify a Karnaugh map. He tries to form groups of 1 ’s as

shown in Figure Ql(a)

AB

CD

\00

01

11

10

, 0 0 , 0 1 1 1 1 0

1 1 J 0 i x ! 0

0 [ 1 1 i | 1 j

0 i i 1 1 j

i 1 1 0 ! x j 0

Figure Ql(a)

(i) Explain the mistakes done by the student.

(ii) Obtain the correct Boolean equation from the map.

[4 marks]

[3 marks]

(b) The block diagram and the truth-table of a combinational logic circuit are shown in

Figure Ql(b) and Table Ql respectively.

Figure Ql(b)

-6-SEE 1223

Table Q1

(i) Obtain the minimized SOP expression for output P2 using Karnaugh Map.

[4 marks]

(ii) Implement P2 in NAND-NAND configuration.

[3 marks]

(iii) Implement Pi using one 4-to-l multiplexer only without any additional gates.

[4 marks]

(iv) Suggest a suitable name for the combinational logic circuit operation.

[2 marks]

-7-SEE 1223

(a) A 2-to-4 line decoder (active-HIGH output) and an OR gate can be used to realize the

function F(A,B) = EIM (1,3). By using your inspired creative and innovative minds,

show how this same function can be implemented using a 3-to-8 line decoder (active-

HIGH output) shown in Figure Q2(a) with 2-input OR gates only. A and B should be

connected to the select bits S2 and Si of the decoder respectively.

[6 marks]

Question 2

Oo0,

S202

Si 03

04So

05

o6

O7

Figure Q2(a)

(b) Consider a circuit shown in Figure Q2(b).

Figure Q2(b)

(i) Identify the type of circuit, draw the logic symbol and write down the truth

table for this particular circuit.

[3 marks]

(ii) Using the logic symbol drawn in part (i), construct the simplest positive edge-

triggered J-K flip-flop. You may add additional gates, if necessary. Show also

the positive edge-triggering circuit and draw the logic symbol.

[3 marks]

(iii) By using the logic symbol of J-K flip-flop in part(ii), show how this flip-flop

can be modified to make a D and a T flip-flops.

[2 marks]

Sketch the output waveforms Qi and Q2 for four clock pulses for the circuit shown in

Figure Q2(c). Qi and Q2 are initially 0.

[6 marks]

D Q.

> V

CLK

J Q2

>

K

Figure Q2(c)

-9-SEE 1223

The state transition diagram of a counter is shown in Figure Q3(a)

Question 3

(a) Give two advantages of designing the counter using D flip-flops instead of J-K flip-

flops.

[4 marks]

CLK

Figure Q3(b)

- 10-SEE 1223

(b) The block diagram of the counter for the given state transition diagram is shown in

Figure Q3(b).

(i) What is the purpose of the combinational logic circuit?

[2 marks]

(ii) Design the combinational logic circuit using only 4-to-l multiplexers.

[12 marks]

(iii) What is the advantage of using multiplexers instead of basic gates for the

combinational logic circuit?

[2 marks]

- 1 1 -

SEE 1223

(a) (i)

(ii)

Question 4

Show how a NOT function is implemented using each of the following gates;

2-input NOR gate, 3-input NAND gate and 2-input XOR gate.

[6 marks]

Implement a 3-input OR function using minimum number of 2-input

NAND gates only.

[4 marks]

(b) A ROM circuit to implement various logic operations is shown in Figure Q4.

(i) What is the ROM size?

[2 marks]

(ii) Explain how the ROM can be configured so that it can function as a 2-input

NAND gate and also 2-input XOR gate.

[4 marks]

Addressdecoder

ROMmatrix

SEL-

A-

B -

On

o,

S2Ot

Si 0,

OiSo

0,

0,

07

1 - 0 - 0

0 - 1 - 0

OH i Ho r l0 - 0

1 - 1 - 0

iTTo>^ r-THoj- □z ôTT

F2 Fi Fo

Figure Q4

(iii) The ROM also stored the data for a 1-bit full-adder. Explain how you can

retrieve the data for the full-adder.

[4 marks]

- 1 2 -SEE 1223

APPENDIX

BOOLEAN ALGEBRA

Boolean's Theorem

Theorem 1 A + 0 = A > ii >

Theorem 2 A + A = 1 A A = 0

Theorem 3 A + A = A A.A = A

Theorem 4 A + l = l > o ll o

Theorem 5 <ii

IIC

Theorem 6 A+B=B+A A.B = B.A

Theorem 7 A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C A.(B.C) = (A.B).C

Theorem 8 A.(B + C) = A.B + A.C A + B.C = (A + B).(A + C)

Theorem 9 A + A.B = A A.(A+B)=A

Theorem 10 A + A.B = A + B A.(A + B) = A.B

DeMorgan's Theorem

(i) A.B = A + B

{£ (ii) A + B = A.B

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 2113

CONTROL : MODELLING & SIMULATION

LECTURERS

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

ASSOC. PROF. ZAMANI BIN MD ZAIN DR. ABDUL RASHID BIN HUSAIN DR. ZUWAIRIE BIN IBRAHIM DR. AHMAD ‘ATHIF BIN MOHD FAUDZI DR. MOHD RIDZUAN BIN AHMAD DR. ZOOL HILMI BIN ISMAIL DR. SHAFISHUHAZA BT SAHLAN


01-06

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

9 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER QUESTION 1 AND ANY OTHER THREE (3) QUESTIONS.


- 2 -SEE 2113

(a) Figure Qla shows the block diagram of a control system. Name the block diagram components W, X, J, M, L and Z.

Question 1

K L

•M

Figure Qla

(3 marks)

-3-SEE 2113

(b) Find the transfer function 6i(s)/Ea(s), for the electromechanical system shown in Figure Qlb. The following values are given:

Jl = 600 kg m2 N\ = 10Dl = 900 Nms/rad

(10 marks)

Tm

Figure Qlb

-4-SEE 2113

(c) A modified azimuth position control system to give different output performance is as shown in Figure Qlc.

VP(s) + ---------►

Power amplifier

100EM

ivuhui anu luau

0.2083

(5 + 100)w

(5 + 1.71)

K

e0(s)

(i)

(ii)

Figure Qlc

Find the transfer function, 60(s)/Vp(s).

(2 marks)

Under certain operating condition, we need to adjust the system so that it will give a damping ratio of 0.707. Find the value of K and natural frequency (con), needed to get the required damping ratio.

(4 marks)

(iii) For the values obtained in part (c)(ii) above, calculate the corresponding settling time, peak time and percentage overshoot.

(4 marks)

(iv) Sketch and name the output response in this case.

(2 marks)

(a) Define ‘control system’. Give ONE example of a feedback control system of your choice.

(3 marks)

(b) Give FOUR (4) benefits of control systems. Support your answer by giving one example (real application) for each benefit.

(6 marks)

(c) Figure Q2c shows THREE (3) unit step responses. Response B is the desired/reference performance. Discuss the step responses A and C in terms of their transient response, steady-state response and stability. Comparisons with the desired response should also be made.

-5-SEE 2113

Question 2

(6 marks)

- 6 -SEE 2113

(d) Diabetes mellitus, or more commonly referred to as diabetes, is a group of metabolic diseases in which a person has high blood sugar.

This is due to the body does not produce enough insulin (Type 1 diabetes), or because cells do not respond to the insulin that is produced (Type 2 diabetes).

For the Type 1 diabetes, which results from human body’s inability to produce insulin, it requires the patient to inject the insulin into the body. Current advances in developing miniaturized sensors have meant that it is now possible to develop an automated insulin delivery system. This system monitors blood sugar levels and delivers an appropriate dose of insulin when required.

A software-controlled insulin delivery system works by using a micro-sensor embedded in the patient to measure some blood parameter that is proportional to the sugar level. This signal is then sent to the pump controller. This controller computes the sugar level and the amount of insulin that is sufficient for the body needs. It then sends signals to an amplifier and driver circuit to drive a miniaturized pump to deliver the insulin via a permanently attached needle.

Draw the functional block diagram of this automated insulin delivery system.

(10 marks)

-7-SEE 2113

(a) (i) What is the definition of ‘transfer function’ and what assumption is made concerning the initial conditions of the system when dealing with transfer functions?

Question 3

(2 marks)

(ii)

Figure Q3a

A simple passive-element testing rig is shown in Figure Q3a. A constant 1-A input current is supplied to three passive elements, A, B and C producing three corresponding output voltages:• Element A - a constant ramp voltage• Element B - 0 V• Element C - a constant voltage of 3 V

From the voltage reading, determine the passive elements A, B and C. Also, find the discrete value of element C.

(4 marks)

- 8 -SEE 2113

^ Determine the transfer function, ^ , of the system shown in Figure Q3b.

(9 marks)

Vo

C

(c) 6 (s)Given the rotational system in Figure Q3c, find the transfer function, G(s) = ——06O)

(10 marks)

(a) (i) Name THREE (3) basic forms for interconnecting subsystems.

-9-SEE 2113

Question 4

(3 marks)

(ii) The Mason gain formula is given as

C(s) _ XkTkAk R(s) A

If a forward path, 7*, touches all closed loops, what would be the value of Ak7

(2 marks)

(b) Obtain the transfer function of the block diagram shown in Figure Q4b by using the block diagram reduction technique.

(10 marks)

Figure Q4b

- 10-SEE 2113

(c) (i) Draw the corresponding signal flow graph for the block diagram shown in Figure Q4c(i).

(3 marks)

Figure Q4c(i)

(ii) Find the transfer function C(s)/R(s) using Mason Rule for the signal flow graph shown in Figure Q4c(ii) below.

(7 marks)

Figure Q4c(ii)

-11 -SEE 2113

(a) Explain the significance of the following terms:(i) Time constant, r, in the transfer function of a first-order system(ii) Damping ratio, §, in the transfer function of a second-order system(iii) Undamped natural frequency, a)n, in the transfer function of a second-order

system

(5 marks)

(b) For each of the transfer functions listed below, draw an s-plane diagram indicating the location of system poles. Then, in ONE graph, sketch the unit step responses for all the transfer functions. Label the response for each transfer function clearly.

C(s) 10 R(s)~ s2-1

C(s) 10 R(s) s2 + 3s + 2

C(s) 10 R(s) s2 + 2s + 2

Question 5

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(c) An electrical network in Figure Q5c has a transfer function of

K(s) R,V,(s) (R2 + R, )CLs + (CR2R ] + L)s + Rx

(6 marks)

KliMAVi

1 K Q+C v c ( t )

Figure Q5c

Find the values of Ri and C to yield a 20 % overshoot and 20 ms settling time for Vc(t).

- 1 2 -SEE 2113

(d) Figure Q5d shows the unity feedback system, where

(s + 2) (s+3)

R(s) + E(s)G(s)

C(s)

Figure Q5d

(i) Find the system type.

(ii) What error can be expected for an input signal of r(t) = 10u(i)7

(iii) What error can be expected for an input of r(t) = 10tu(t)l

(8 marks)

(2 marks)

(2 marks)

(2 marks)

- 13-SEE 2113

r TABLE OF LAPLACE TRANSFORMS■?, L ** ~ 'r * & i V'' <

f(t)‘P * 3*-. \ jpy u„ 1.'' u)' t i - (S) 1 \ f i

Unit impulse, 6(0 1A A

se"* 1

s + ate'a< 1

0 + a?t 1

s2

tn n\sn+1

sin a)t CO2 2 S + CO

cos cot s2 2 S +00

sinh cot (0„2 2 S -CO

cosh cot ss2 -co2

dm sF(s)-f(0)dt

d"f{t) snF(s) - s'" 7(0) - sn-2f(l)( 0)... - fnA) (0)df

]f{t)dt0

F(s) s

t”f{t),n = 0,1,2,-.. ,dMF(s) 1 dsM

e-al sinwt w

(s - a f - w 2

e-at koswt s-a

( s - a j - w 2

- 1 4 -SEE 2113

LAPLACE TRANSFORMS THEOREMS

Item no. Theorem Name

r a>

1. Wit)) = F(s) = f(t)e-stdtJO-

Definition

2. mm] = kF(s) Linearity theorem3. % [ f i ( 0 + M t ) ) = F\ ( s ) + F2(s) Linearity theorem4. <"/(/)] = F(s + a) Frequency shift theorem

5. cAf{t ~ T)} = e~sTF(s) Time shift theorem

6. %[f(at)] = 1-fI~) Scaling theorem

7.dt = sF(s) —/(0-) Differentiation theorem

8.

1 1

= s2F(s) - 5/(0-) -/(0—) Differentiation theorem

9.1 ............... '1

1 1

= snF(s) - £ sn~kf*~\0-) k= 1

Differentiation theorem

10. [ At) drJo-

= 5*1s Integration theorem

11.

12.

/(-)

Ao+)

= lim sF(s)s-* 0

= lim sF(s)

Final value theorem1

Initial value theorem2

1 For this theorem to yield correct finite results, all roots of the denominator of F(s) must have negative real parts and no more than one can be at the origin.2 For this theorem to be valid, f ( t ) must be continuous or have a step discontinuity at t = 0 (i.e., no impulses or their derivatives at / = 0).

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE :

COURSE NAME :

LECTURERS :

PROGRAMME :

SECTION :

TIME :

DATE :


SET 3573

MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

DR. NOR HISHAM BIN KHAMIS

SET

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

13 MAY 2011



- S E T 3573 --2-

Q1 a. The general input impedance formula for an L-C transmission line is given by:

7 _ 7 _ _n _ 7 Zl + tan W1 J 0 Z0 + jZL tan m

Find an expression for Z£ when:

i. the load is a short, (3 marks)

ii. the load is an open, (3 marks)

iii. the line is a half wavelength long line terminated by ZL, and (4 marks)

iv. the line is a quarter wavelength long line terminated by ZL. (4 marks)

b. An ideal transmission line is terminated by a resistance equal to half the£

characteristics impedance of the transmission line, i.e., ZL = y. To eliminate

reflections back to the generator, what matching impedance must you use

i. if you place the matching element in series, one quarter of a wavelength

from the load (towards the generator)? (5 marks)

ii. if you place the matching element in parallel, one quarter of a

wavelength from the load (towards the generator)? (5 marks)

iii. Comment on your the solution in (i). (1 marks)

Q2 Using a Smith chart, find the lengths of the two stubs (in term of wavelengths) in

Figure Q2, to achieve matching. There are two possible solutions, give both of them.

All steps and calculations must be written in the answer books and all points must be

shown and marked clearly on the Smith chart. (25 marks)

< ° 25S < °'2^

ZL=(20 + j30)n

Figure Q2

- SET 3573--3-

Q3 Figure Q3a below shows a piece of transmission line with a leakage loss represented

b) Find the return loss and insertion loss of the transmission line. (4 marks)

c) If the transmission line is assumed to be lossless by ignoring the leakage loss,

i.e. leakage loss Zo is taken out, replaced and terminated with a complex load

impedance of Zl = (20 - jl5)Q (as shown in Figure Q3b), and the intrinsic

impedance of the line is 75Q, find

i. input impedance to the line, (3 marks)

ii. the reflection coefficient at the input of the line, (2 marks)

iii. the SWR at the input of the line, and (2 marks)

iv. return loss at the input of the transmission line. (2 marks)

by Z0.

a) Determine the scattering parameters of the transmission line. (12 marks)

Figure Q3a.

Zt=(20-jl5}Q

Figure Q3b.

- SET 3573--4-

A rectangular waveguide has a cross-section of 1.5 cm x 0.8 cm, cr= 0, // = fo,

and s — s0. The magnetic field component is given as:

H = 2 sin (—) cos sin(— n x 10"t - J3z) A/m a b 2

Determine:

i. the modes of operation, (2 marks)

ii. the cut-off frequency, fc (3 marks)

iii. the phase constant /?, (4 marks)

iv. the propagation constant y, and (2 marks)

v. the intrinsic impedance 77 for all modes in part i). (6 marks)

If the waveguide is now filled with a dielectric of s = 4s0, determine the new

cut-off frequency. (4 marks)

Give comment from part b). (2 marks)

Two modes which have the same cut-off frequency are called what kind of

mode? (2 marks)

i) Define VSWR. (2 marks)

ii) Give an application of circular waveguide. (2 marks)

ii) State the coupling parameters of a directional coupler. (4 marks)

iii) What are the desirable properties of the slow wave structure to be used

in TWT amplifier? (4 marks)

i) Name the device in Figure Q5 below and explain how it works.

(10 marks)

ii) Describe the applications for such device. (3 marks)

Figure Q5

- SET 3573 --5-

List of formulas:

y — cc + jp — -yj (R + jojV)(G + jo)C)

Z0 =R + ja)LG + jo)C

V = Vfe‘JZ + Vre>*

I = Le^ + Le * _ Xe^Xe^ Zn

Vfe~^ Vfeyt

7=7 ZL cos /%? + jZ0 sin pi Z0 cos pi + jZL sin pi

= Zf

2^1

/ \2 ✓ >21,1 11- + —

U J

vp =

\ =

1 -

1 - A,

(OS

+ jZ0tan pi + jZLtan pi

Q.

Q.

The Smith Chart-^gjScTToN

CO

EFFICIEN

T IN

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SET 4593

ACOUSTICS ENGINEERING

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD NGASRI BIN DIMON

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SET

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

10 MAY 2011

ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.


Ql. (a) Through proper mathematical equation, discuss properly the sound absorption coefficient for an open window.

(4 marks)

(b) Mathematicaly, show that the perforated wall panel able to act as sound absorber with proper illustration, discuss the general trend of sound absorption performance of porous material and perforated wall panel.

(4 marks)

(c) Through proper illustration, discuss properly four (4) applications of sound absorber in realising or contributing good acoustics primarily in an enclosed room.

(8 marks)

(d) Mathematically, show and discuss the measurement of random incidence sound absorption coefficient of an acoustics material.

(4 marks)

Q2. (a) As an acoustics engineer, you are required to suggest acoustic criteria for a secondary classroom with 30 students. This class room is adjacent to the school principal office. Based on the above.

(i) Suggest 3 acoustics criteria requires attention to have good an functioning classroom.

(5 marks)

(ii) Suggest the Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) for the dividing, wall adjacent to the school Principal Office. Explain your suggested STC.

(4 marks)

(b) The 700m3 empty untreated classroom RT60 is 1.5 second. The classroom is able to accommodate 60 students in a wooden seat. Based on above

(i) Discuss the empty RT60 quality being measured. (2 marks)

(ii) Suggest RT60 with 60 students suitable to enable the classroom to function effectively.

(2 marks)

(iii) Determine the additional amount of sound absorber in Sabine (A) required to achieve optimum RT60 with 60 students.

(2 marks)

(iv) Discuss the technique and requirement to determine the classroom’s area needed acoustics treatment.

2SET 4593

(4 marks)

Discuss the followings

(i) SPL = 80 dB(A)(ii) RT60 = 1.0 second(iii) STI = 0.65(iv) NRC = 0.60

(4 marks)

There is a sound source in the middle location and middle height of the square height of 4 meter width and 4 meter height. The length of the tunnel is 50 meter. Based on the above

(i) Derive the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) due to the sound source at a distance of 4 meter from the sound source.

(4 marks)

(ii) If the sound pressure measured at a distance of 2 meter from the sound source is 0.01 Pa, calculate the SPL at 4 meter. Discuss any assumption used in the calculation.

(4 marks)

Seat X in a Istana Budaya concert hall is 15 meter from the, singer Yuna playing her guitar. Singer Yuna strikes a single, mighty note on her guitar string. The Sound Pressure Level (SPL) of the direct sound of her guitar note at seat X is SPL 80 dB. The 1st reflection from the nearest side wall arrived in seat X in 98 milisecond after Yuna strikes her guitar string.

(i) How far does the reflected sound level to reach seat X.(2 marks)

(ii) Calculate the SPL of the reflected sound at seat X. Discuss any assumption in this SPL calculation.

(2 marks)

(iii) How long the sound reflection delayed after the arrival of direct sound at seat X.

(iv) Draw its corresponding Energy Time Curve (ETC) and discuss the behaviour of this ETC.

(2 marks)

Through proper illustration, discuss thoroughly the followings

(i) The acoustics design for the library.(4 marks)

(ii) The acoustics design for the open plan office.(4 marks)

With proper illustration, discuss properly the effect and consequences of the untreated dome shape surface in an enclosed hall.

(4 marks)

4SET 4593

c) There are 5 split units aircond in a lecture theatre. The SPL generated at 1kHz foreach split unit is 70 dB, 72 dB, 68 dB, 75 dB and 71 dB. Calculate the SPL when all the split unit aircond is being “ON” simultaneously. (4 marks)

5. (a) A siren positioned vertically at a height of 14 meter of on observation tower. It produces sound pressure of 6.44 Pa (rms) at radius of 1 meter. The SPL measured on the ground level at 19.6 meter horizontally is 87 dB. Based on the above, calculate the following

(i) The directivity angle, 8 (1 marks)

(ii) The directivity index, at an angle 0 (4 marks)

(iii) The siren is moved to 1 meter above the ground level, calculate the SPL at the same distance, 19.6 meter and at the same angle, 9.

(3 marks)

(b) (i) Discuss the 5 components needed for a sound system design in amultipurpose hall. (5 marks)

(ii) Discuss properly and thoroughly 2 sound systems design strategy that can be used in a multipurpose hall. (4 marks)

(c) Discuss the loudspeaker requirement for a lecture theatre and musical theatre hall.(3 marks)

Constant

L = 1 x 10'12 W/m2c = 340 m/sIoP0 = 2 x 1 O'5 Pa a (1 person) = 0.35 p = 1.2 kg /m3

W0 = 1 x 10‘12 Watt

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE SEU 2033

COURSE NAME CIRCUIT THEORY

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. ZOLKAFLE BIN BUNT AT

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

SPE / SPR

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

DATE 30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY. ALL WORKING NEED TO BE SHOWN CLEARLY.DRAW NEAT DIAGRAMS WHEREVER NECESSARY.


2SEU 2033

Ql. (a) Explain, in your own words, the steps taken to implement Superposition principle to do circuit analysis. What are the limitations of Superposition principle.

[ 5 marks ]

(b) Apply the superposition principle to find vo in the DC circuit of Figure Ql(b).

[ 12 marks ]

6Q

Figure Ql(b)

(c) Given the DC circuit in Figure Ql(c), obtain the Thevenin equivalent at terminals a-b and use the result to get vx.

[ 8 marks ]

40 V

Figure Ql(c)

3SEU 2033

Q2. (a) In an AC circuits, the nodal and mesh analysis are performed in the same manner as DC circuit analysis except it involves complex number. Explain clearly, steps to be carry out for the analysis of AC circuit using Nodal analysis.

[ 5 marks ]

(b) Determine the current Io in the circuit of Figure Q2(b) using mesh analysis.

[ 12 marks ]

4fi

120 Z90° V

Figure Q2(b)

(c) Obtain Io in Figure Q2(c) using nodal analysis.[ 8 marks ]

10 Q

20 sinlOOOt A

------- m-------------

0 < >20 Q — — 50 |ixFIo

10 mH

Figure Q2(c)

4SEU 2033

Q3. (a) Using a suitable and simple diagram, explain Norton’s Theorem.

(b) In an AC circuit as shown in Figure Q3(b), compute io using Norton's theorem.

[ 10 marks ]

[ 3 marks ]

Figure Q3(b)

(c) For the circuit of Figure Q3(c), find:

(i) the real power dissipated by each element,

(ii) the total apparent power supplied by the circuit,[ 12 marks ]

20 Q 50 Q

Figure Q3(c)

5SEU 2033

Q4. (a) Draw the equivalent circuit when the Z-parameter network is said to be reciprocal. What are the characteristic of the symmetrical and reciprocal for Z-parameter two-port networks.

[ 5 marks ]

(b) Calculate I] and h in the two port network of Figure Q4(b). Determine whether the network is symmetrical or reciprocal?

[ 8 marks ]

2Z30° V

2 QAW

v ,

Zn = 6 QZ \2= — j4 O Z21 — ~ j4 O Z22 = 8 Q

12

V2

Figure Q4(b)

(c) For a series two port network as in the circuit of Figure Q4(c);

(i) Find the parameters for the overall networks

(ii) Evaluate V2/Vs in the circuit in Figure Q4(c).[ 12 marks

Figure Q4(c)

6SEU 2033

Q5. (a) Briefly define the quality factor, Q of a series resonant circuit.

(b) Prove that at the resonant angular frequency, the circuit shown in Figure Q5(a) and Figure Q5(b) has the same impedance as seen from terminal a-b if:

[ 3 marks ]

R-i + cd1!} Lp toL

[ 9 marks ]ao ao

o ob b

Figure Q5(a) Figure Q5(b)

(c) For a series RLC resonant circuit in Figure Q5(c).

i) Find, I, Vr, Vl and Vc at resonanceii) What is the quality factor, Qs of the circuit

iii) If the resonant frequency is 5000 Hz, find the bandwidth, BWiv) What is the power dissipated in the circuit at the half-power

frequencies.

R=4Q Xl = 15Q

o+

240 V Xc= 15D

Figure Q5(c)

7SEU 2033

Conversion of two-port parameters

y z h T

yyn yn

y2i y22

Z22 - z12

A A Z 2

-Z21 Z,[

Az A

z

1 -h12

hn hn

^21 AA

hn hji

T22 - At

T,2 T12

zl III

"^12 T„

z

y22 - y!2

Ay Ay

-y2i ynAy Ay

zn zi2

Z21 Z22

Ah ^12

h22 h22

-h2] 1h22 h22

^11 At

^21 T21

1 ^22

^21 T21

h

1 -yn

yn yn

Zli

yn yn

Az Z12

Z22 Z22

Z21 ^

Z22 Z22

hn h12

h2j h22

^12 AT

T T1 22 1 22

-1 T__ ^ 21

T T122 1 22

T

-y22 -i

y2) y2i— Ay -yn

y2i y2i

£il Al Z21 Z21

1 Z22

Z21 Z21

"Ah^21 ^21

‘^22 h21 h21

T TAn 12

T Tl2l 22

Ap=PllP22-Pl2P21

Nota: Parameter T = transmission Parameter

"A B" r t1n T 1 12

C D T21 T22 _

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

LECTURERS

SEU 2052

ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY FOR MANAGEMENT

MR. MOHD FADLI BIN RAHMAT MR. MOHD ZAKI BIN DAUD

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

SHD

01-02

2 HOURS

DATE 30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A:THIS PART CONSISTS OF THREE QUESTIONS. YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER ANY TWO (2).

PART B:THIS PART CONSISTS OF TWO QUESTIONS. YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER EITHER ONE.


2SEU 2052

PART A

THIS PART CONSISTS OF THREE QUESTIONS (QI, Q2 & Q3). YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER ANY TWO.

QI. (a) Explain the following rules with the aid of diagrams.(i) Voltage Divider Rule [5 marks](ii) Current Divider Rule [5 marks]

(b) For the circuit in Figure Ql(b), determine:(i) Rtotal [3 marks](ii) Is [2 marks]

(iii) Ia [2 marks](iv) Ib [2 marks](v) Power dissipated in 4 Q resistor [3 marks](vi) Power dissipated in 9 Q resistor [3 marks]

60.

Figure Ql(b).

Q2. (a) Explain briefly, advantages of AC system compare to DC system. [5 Marks](b) The recorded voltage and current in time domain equations of the air-conditioning system are as below:

v(t)= 339.42 sin(314t + 30°)Volt i(t) = 14.14 sin(314t — 15° ) Ampere

(i) For both v(t) and i(t), find peak-to-peak, average and root-mean-square values. [3 Marks]

(ii) Calculate the system frequency. [1 Mark]

(iii) Rewrite the above equations into phase domain and draw the phasor diagrams. [3 Marks]

(iv) Is v(t) leading or lagging i(t)? State the phase angle. [1 Mark]

(v) Calculate the apparent power, real power and reactive power for this air- conditioning system. [3 Marks]

3SEU 2052

(c) A workshop which is a three-phase balanced load with wye-connection received electric supply from Tenaga Nasional Berhad (TNB) with a three-phase balanced voltage with wye-configuration, where line voltage, V|jne = 415 Volt, 50 Hz.

(i) Draw the configuration between load and supply with neutral connection of the above mentioned system. [3 Marks]

(ii) How do we know the loads are balanced? [1 Mark]

(iii) Calculate the current consumed by the workshop if it used 23 kW real power with 0.85 lagging power factor. [1 Mark]

(iv) Find the apparent power and the reactive power used by the workshop.

[2 Marks](v) Describe briefly how the power factor of the workshop can be improved.

[2 Marks]

Q3. (a) Below are the list of devices which convert electrical energy to another form of energy. Explain briefly how these devices function.

(i) Resistor [1 Mark]

(ii) Diode [1 Mark]

(iii) Inductor [1 Mark]

(iv) Capacitor [1 Mark]

(v) Transistor [1 Mark]

(b) Describe briefly how does the relay work and state its advantages. [5 Marks]

(c) Building D06 in Management Faculty UTM have 8 lecture rooms. Each room are installed with 2 air-conditioning units, 48 florescent lamps, 1 desktop computer and 1 projector. If all lecture rooms are fully utilized, calculate how much UTM’s electric consumption in 30 days if all load operate in 12 hours everyday with 0.95 power factor. Refer to the Table Q3 c(i) and Table Q3 c(ii) for electrical devices power rating and TNB electric tariff.

4SEU 2052

Electrical Devices Apparent Power, S (kVA) .

Air-conditioning unit 3.2Florescent lamp 0.2Desktop 0.5Projector 1.2

Table C>3 c(i)

Tariff A Kadar/Rate(kWh) (cent/unit)1-200 21.8201-1000 28.91001 and above 31.2

Table Q3 c(ii)[15 Marks]

PART B

THIS PART CONSISTS OF TWO QUESTIONS. (Q4 & Q5). YOU ARE REQUIRED TO ANSWER EITHER ONE.

Q4. (a) What is the main function of a transformer? [2 marks](b) Transformer is based on two principles. What are they? [4 marks](c) What are the relationships between primary and secondary

voltage, current and power in an ideal transformer? [6 marks](d) What types of losses that affect the efficiency of a transformer? [6 marks](e) Write down the equation for transformer efficiency. [1 mark]

(f) A single phase transformer 200 kVA, 6600/400 V, 50 Hz has 80 turns on the secondary side. Find:

(i) The values of primary and secondary currents. [4 marks](ii) The number of turns on primary side. [2 marks]

Q5. A linear power supply converts 240 V AC to 25 V DC.(a). Describe the steps required to change the 240 V AC to 25 V DC. State the supply type (AC or DC) with the help of diagrams showing the supply waveform transformations. [14 marks]

(b). Explain the differences between boost, buck, and buck-boost converters.

(c). Compare the operation of DC motor and AC motor.[6 marks]

[5 marks]

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEL 4373

IC TESTING TECHNIQUES

LECTURERS DR. OOI CHIA YEE

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEL / SET / SEW

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

04 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.PART B : ANSWER TWO QUESTIONS ONLY.


-2-SEL 4373

PART A: ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS

QI. (20 MARKS)

a. Answer the following questions referring Figure 1.i. List all faults in Circuit 1 given that those faults are singly introduced. How many

faults are in total? [3 marks]ii. List all checkpoints in Circuit 1. How many checkpoints are in total?

[3 marks]

Figure 1. Circuit 1.b. Answer the following questions based on the information given below.

The process uses 8-inch wafers.The cost of processing a wafer is $150.Each wafer has 600 chips. a=0.5d=0.25 defects/cm2

Chip area without DFT, A=8mmx8mm=0.64cm2

i. What is the defect level in parts per million (PPM) if the fault coverage of the available test patterns is 94%? [5 marks]

ii. Suggest two ways to improve the PPM. [4 marks]iii. The measures in (ii) improve the fault coverage to 99% but increase the area by

15%. Calculate the new PPM. [5 marks]

-3-SEL 4373

Q2. (30 MARKS)a. Given that a characteristic polynomial is x5+x2+x+1. Design an external and an internal

XOR LFSRs. [6 marks]

b. Does the polynomial x2+x+l divides x9+x6+x+l without any remainder? Show your work.[4 marks]

c. Answer the following questions by referring to Figure 2.

Figure 2. Circuit 2.

i. Full scan technique is used to improve the testability of the circuit. How many

inputs and outputs are required for the purpose of test generation? [4 marks]

ii. 752 test patterns are generated to achieve 100% fault coverage. What is the total

number of clock cycles for test application time? [4 marks]

-4-SEL 4373

Figure 3. S-graph.

d. Figure 3 shows the S-graph of a sequential circuit. Answer the following questions.

i. How many cycles are there in this circuit? [3 marks]

ii. What is the smallest number of flip-flops we need to include in the scan path to

break all the cycles such that the resulting sequential depth is the smallest?

Identify the flip-flops. [9 marks]

-5-SEL 4373

PART B: ANSWER TWO QUESTIONS ONLYQ3. (25 MARKS)

A_B~C

E---- •

M Q

Figure 4.

a. Answer the following questions based on Figure 4.i. Derive a test pattern for J stuck-at 1. [7 marks]

ii. List all faults detected when C=l, D=1 and E=1. You can use deductive fault simulation by filling in the following table. [12 marks]

Line A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q RSignalLinefaultlist

b. Draw the time frame expansion model for the sequential circuit in Figure 5 for two time frames. [6 marks]

Figure 5.

-6-SEL 4373

Q4. (25 MARKS)

Figure 6.

a. Figure 6 shows the sub-circuit of a big circuit. Complete the following table for SCOAP

measures of the sub-circuit. [10 marks]

A B C D F G H J K L M N P Qcco 10 50 27 10

CC1 5 35 44 5

b. Let us assume that PODEM sets an objective 0 at line Q. Which path (e.g. QNFB) does

PODEM first choose to back-trace to a primary input in Figure 6? [3 marks]

c. Define drivability. What is the use of drivability? [2 marks]

d. Find drivability for the lines involved when X is stuck-at 0 in Figure 7. Based on the

drivability measures, which is the best fault propagation path? Find the test sequence to

propagate the fault through the best fault propagation path. [10 marks]

t... e P~

>F1J

QCLK

D Q

t> F2Q

Figure 7.

-7-SEL 4373

Q5. (25 MARKS)

Figure 8.

a. Answer the following questions using Figure 8.i. Derive the test pattern for the stuck-at 1 in the circuit. [6 marks]

ii. Using dynamic compaction, derive the test pattern for the faults in Part a.i. and k stuck-at 1. [5 marks]

Figure 9.b. Answer the following questions using Figure 9.

ii.Identify THREE of the redundant faults in the circuit. Show the simplified hardware after redundancy removal.

[9 marks] [5 marks]

-8-SEL 4373

Testability Measures

CCO (a)CC1 (a) a

ab

z CCO (z) = min (CCO (a), CCO (b)) + 1 CC1 (z) = CC1 (a) + CC1 (b) + 1

z CCO (z) = CCO (a) + CCO (b) + 1 CC1 (z) = min (CC1 (a), CC1 (b)) + 1

Z CCO (z) = min (CCO (a)+ CCO (b), CC1 (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1 CC1 (z) = min (CC1 (a)+ CCO (b), CCO (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1

Z CCO (z) = CC1 (a) + CC1 (b) + 1CC1 (z) = min (CCO (a), CCO (b)) + 1

z CCO (z) = min (CC1 (a), CC1 (b)) + 1 CC1 (Z) = CCO (a) + CCO (b) + 1

z CCO (z) = min (CC1 (a)+ CCO (b), CCO (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1 CC1 (z) = min (CCO (a)+ CCO (b), CC1 (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1

z cco (z) = cci (a) + 1 CC1 (z) = cco (a) + 1

-9-SEL 4373

CO (a) CO (b)

CO (z) + CO (z) +

CC1 (b) + 1 CC1 (a) + 1

CO (a) CC1 (a) CCO (a)

CO (a)-= CO(z) + CCO (b) + 1 a.CO (b) == CO(z) + CCO (a) + 1 h-

CO (a) =--CO(z) + min (CCO (b),CC1 (b)) + 1 a-CO (b)-= co(z) + min (CCO (a),CC1 (a)) +1 h-CO (a)---CO(z) + CC1 (b) + 1 a.CO (b) == co(z) + CC1 (a) + 1 b-

CO (a) == co(z) + CCO (b) + 1 aCO (b)-= co(z) + CCO (a) + 1 b

CO (a) == CO(z) + min (CCO (b),CC1 (b)) + 1aCO (b) =--CO(z) + min (CCO (a),CC1 (a)) + 1b

CO (a) == co(z)+1 a

CO (a) == min(CO (z1), CO (z2), CO (zn)) a

CO (b) CC1 (b) CCO (b

CO (z) z

.zn

Important formulas for yield and defect level estimation:i) Probability of a chip passing the test, Y(T)=[l+TA/7p]"

ii) Defect level, DL(T)=1-Y(T)

Where T = fault coverage A = chip area f= fault density P = clustering parameter

-10-

SEL 4373

Table 1. Fault list propagation in a deductive fault simulation

Gate type Inputs Output Output faulta b c list Lc

AND 0 0 0 [Lan Lb]u ci0 1 0 [Lain Lb]u ci1 0 0 [Lan Lb]u ci1 1 1 [La^1 Lb]LJ C0

OR 0 0 0 [Lau Lb]u ci0 1 1 [Lan Lb]u Co1 0 1 [Lan Lb]u Co1 1 1 [Laf~N' Lb]U Co

NOT 0 1 Lau Co1 0 La^j Ci

NAND 0 0 1 [Lan Lb]u Co0 1 1 [Lan Lb]'—* Co1 0 1 [Lan Lb]u Co1 1 0 Lb]^1 Ci

NOR 0 0 1 [Lau Lb]u c00 1 0 [Lan Lb]u ci1 0 0 [LaO Lb]u Ci1 1 0 [Lan Lb]u ci

-11-

SEL 4373

Fault Equivalence Rules:

F1s-a-1

s-a-1-x—

F2 dominates FI.

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME HIGH VOLTAGE TECHNOLOGY

LECTURERS PROF. DR. HUSSEIN BIN AHMAD ASSOC. PROF. DR. MUHRIDZA BIN YAACOB ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMED AFENDI BIN MOHAMED PIAH

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SEE

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

03 MAY 2011



-2-SEE4463

1. (a) Briefly describe any two (2) of the followings:

(i) Field enhancement factor;

(ii) ‘Medium high voltage’ (MHV), ‘High voltage’ (HV), “Extra high voltage’

(EHV) and “Ultra high voltage’ (UHV);

(iii) Three applications of high voltages excluding those in the generation,

transmission and distribution of electrical energy.

(6 marks)

(b) There are several properties of a dielectric which are of practical importance for

an engineer. Name five (5) most important properties of a dielectric and briefly

describe each of them.

(10 marks)

(c) A 50kV AC voltage is applied to a square-shaped structure made from stainless

steel, except its base plate which is insulated from the rest of the structure and is

grounded. Taking a cross section of the structure and using a grid with sixteen

equal squares (giving nine points with unknown voltage), determine the voltages

at all nine points after one iteration.

(9 marks)

2. (a) The build-up of high currents in a breakdown is due to the process of ionization

in which electrons and ions are created from neutral atoms or molecules. Explain

how the ionization process occurs prior to gas breakdown phenomena.

(5 marks)

(b) The ionization coefficient alp as a function of field strength E and gas pressure p

is given by the following threshold equation;

-= f{— p u,

By using the Townsend’s breakdown criterion, show that the breakdown voltage

for uniform field gaps is a function of gap length (d) and gas pressure (p).

(8 marks)

(c) Fig. Q2 shows the experimental set-up for studying the Townsend discharge. The

experiment is conducted by measuring the current / at the different gap distance,

d. Table Q2 gives the set of observation obtained when studying the conduction

and breakdown in a gas.

i) Determine the initial current, I0.

ii) Calculate the values of the Townsend’s primary and secondary ionization

coefficients.

Table Q2 Townsend experimental data

-3 -SEE4463

Gapdistance, d (mm)

1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16

Current /(pA)

19 21 26 32 40 45 80 106 152 255 430

Cathode

ir}7'

Ultra-violet light

d

Anode

R

Adjustableh.v. source

-I |—| |-^{a)~Vs

Current limiting resistor

Fig. Q2 Townsend experimental set-up

(12 marks)

Fig. Q3(a) shows a schematic diagram of a tilted transmission line tower and an

impulse current waveshape, i(t). Consider the tower top is struck by the lightning

current i(t) and voltage rises to u(t).

Current CkA')

-4-SEE4463

ifrt

Time ('microsec')

Also Zg is the surge impedance of the ground wire

Zt is the surge impedance of the tower

u(t) is the impulse surge function

i(t) is the current wave function

Tt is time of surge propagation from tower top to the tower footing.

Rt is tower footing resistance

UiT(t) is the potential distribution on the top of tower,

a is the coefficient of reflection on the tower bottom side

(3 is the coefficient of reflection on the tower top side

(i) Show that

u(t) = ZgZ,/ (Zg + 2Zt). i(t)

(3 marks)

(ii) Determine whether the following equation is right or wrong (write the

detailed derivation in order to prove it)

Ujrit) = u(t) + aT(\ + P)[u(t -2Tt) + (arP)u(t -4Tr) + (arfi)2u(t - 6Tr) +................. ]

(7 marks)

-5-SEE4463

A lightning current surge with the wave shape as shown in Fig. Q3(b), strikes a

tower, which has a single ground wire in both directions. The characteristics are

as follows:

Surge impedance of lightning channel, Zi = infinity

Surge impedance of tower, Zt = 150 Q

Surge impedance of ground wire, Zg = 340 Q

Velocity of wave propagation on lines = 298 m/pis

Velocity of wave propagation on tower = 240 m/|is

Height of tower = 30m

Effective tower footing resistance = 40 Q

Lightning current peak magnitude = 40 kA

20fis ---------------------- ► 1 jLts -------

Fig. Q3(b) The simplified lightning current wave shape

Based on Fig. 3(a), determine the maximum tower top potential for a duration 5

times the time of surge propagation from the tower top to the tower base after the

lightning strike the tower.

(15 marks)

(a) Fig. Q4(a) shows an insulation coordination practice using gaps/arcing horns.

Briefly describe what you understand from the diagram.

-6-SEE4463

Fig. Q4(a) Coordination using gaps/arcing horns

(5 marks)

(b) Fig. Q4(b) shows an evaluation of risk factor in an insulation coordination

practice using the statistical technique. Briefly describe what you understand

from the diagram as f0(V) and P(V) move to either direction (left and right).

Fig. Q4(b) Evaluation of risk factor

(5 marks)

SEE4463

A 500 kV steep fronted wave (rate of rise 1000 kV/(a.s) reaches a transformer of

surge impedance 1500 Q through a line surge impedance 500 Q and protected by

a lightning arrester with a protective level of 700 kV, 60 m from the transformer.

Sketch the voltage waveforms at the arrester location. Determine the time at

which the arrester operates. Assume all waves travel at 3.0 x 108 m/s.

Explain the purpose of insulation diagnostic tests on electrical power equipment.

What are the parameters or properties normally measured when investigating the

insulation performance?

The circuit diagram for a Schering bridge is shown in Fig. Q5. Both ends of the

sample and the standard capacitor are connected to the high voltage side of the

bridge. The standard capacitor used in the circuit has losses and can be

represented as a capacitance (C2) and resistance (7*2) in series.

Show that at balanced condition, the capacitance and the resistance of the sample

(15 marks)

(5 marks)

are;

standard capacitor

with losses

Fig. Q5 Schering bridge

(12 marks)

-8-SEE4463

(c) Show that for a solid insulating material of relative permittivity sr, containing a

cylindrical air-filled cavity of depth t, which is small in relation to the thickness T

of the dielectric, the voltage across the sample (Va) is given by the expression;

V' = V'+ — 'V,M

where, Vc is the voltage across the cavity.

From the above equation, explain why the partial discharge can occur in the

cavity even though only the normal service voltage is applied across the

insulating material.

(8 marks)

6. (a) Describe the types of tests conducted on high voltage equipment.

(4 marks)

(b) With the aid of suitable diagrams discuss the generation of high voltage direct

current (HVDC) using the full wave rectifier circuit.

(5 marks)

(c) Lightning impulse voltage is simulated in the laboratory using an impulse

generator and is used to conduct lightning impulse tests on high voltage

equipment based on standard test procedures. An impulse generator (unmodified

Marx) has five (5) stages. The following circuit elements are available: 100 kV-

rated 0.2 p.F capacitors, a 300 £2 front resistor, and a 2500 Q tail resistor. The

load capacitor is given as 1000 pF.

i) Determine the output impulse waveshape of the generator and give

comments on the waveshape as compared to the standard test procedure.

(8 marks)

*

ii) What is the maximum output voltage of the generator if the charging

capacitor is charged up to the maximum rated voltage?

Hint:

-9-SEE4463

Vout maxPCL Rf

c +c /3~ —

R f c t cL

(5 marks)

iii) Sketch the five-stage impulse generator (unmodified Marx).

(3 marks)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEU 2012

ELECTRONICS

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. JEGANNATHANSRINIVASANDR. YOU KOK YEOWDR. KUMERESAN AIL A. DANAPALASINGAMDR. KHURRAM KAMALDR. AHMAD SAUDI SAMOSIR

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SMB / SMI / SMK / SMM / SMP /SMT / SMV

01-08

2 HOURS

30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.PART B : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.PART C : ANSWER THREE (3) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2 SEU2012

A. Multiple Choices. (Answer ALL questions). Choose the best answers.

When sufficient energy is added to a valence electron, it will jump from

A. valence band to the conduction band.

B. conduction band to the valence band.

C. energy band to the conduction band.

D. valence band to the energy band.

At room temperature, the number of free electron in intrinsic semiconductor is_______

A. more than the number of hole

B. equal to the number of hole

C. less than the number of hole

D. none of the above.

When the source voltage increases in a zener regulator, which of these currents remains

approximately constant?

A. Series Current B. Load Current C. Total Current D . Zener Current

Output voltage, V0 for the circuit in figure A4

-------- o v0

Si

Figure A4Vz=10V

A. 10V

B. 10.7V

C. 9.3V

D. 15V

The power dissipated by a transistor approximately equals the collector currents multiply with

A. base-emitter voltage

B. supply voltage

C. base supply voltage

D. collector emitter voltage

3SEU2012

For circuit in Figure A5 , when value of Rb increases,QVCC

Rc

Figure A5

A. Ic decreases

B. ft decreases

C. Vce decreases

D. Ic increases

E.

When an NPN BJT transistor is operating in saturation region, what is the biasing condition of

the base emitter junction

A. Either reversed or forward biased

B. Forward biased

C. Reversed biased

D. Cannot be determined

DC analysis is performed on an amplifier to

A. ensure the transistor can operate as an amplifier

B. find operating point for the amplifier circuit

C. determine amplifier gain

D. avoid transistor to work in saturated or cut off condition

For a JFET, the threshold voltage, Vos(th) is the

A. maximum allowable gate source voltage before breakdown

B. gate source voltage that produces a leveling off of Id

C. minimum gate-source voltage that makes drain current flow

D. none of the above

Valence electrons are

A. in the closest orbit to the nucleus

B. in the most distant arbit from the nucleus

C. in various arbits around the nucleus

D. not associated with a particular atom.

•Rb

4SEU2012

11. The process of adding an impurity to a semiconductor is called

A. recombination

B. doping

C. purification

D. ionization

12. The purpose of a pentavalent impurity is to

A. reduce the conductivity of silicon

B. increase the number of holes

C. increase the number of free electrons

D. create minority carriers

13. For operation in the active-region, the base of an npn transistor must be

A. positive with respect to the emitter

B. negative with respect to the emitter

C. positive with respect to the collector

D. at zero volt.

14. A certain common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 100. If the emitter

bypass capacitor is removed,

A. the circuit will become unstable

B. the voltage gain will decrease

C. the voltage gain will increase

D. the Q-point will shift.

15. For an op-amp with a negative feedback, the output is

A. feed back to the noninverting input

B. increased

C. feed back to the inverting input

D. none of the above

5SEU2012

PART B. (Answer ALL questions).

electron, it will jump to1. (a) When sufficient energy is added to a__________

energy band. [1 mark]

(b) In N-type extrinsic semiconductor, electrons are the................... carriers and

holes are the....................carriers. [2 marks]

(c) Depletion zone of a P-N junction occurs due to the..................... process.

[1 mark]

(d) The following figure is a block diagram of power supply system. Name the

blank block. [1 mark]

AC in

2. (a) Match between two boxes using arrow

[3 marks]

(b) How must the base-emitter and base-collector junctions be biased for proper

transistor operation? [2 marks]

(c) Figure B2 is a diagram of a typical single-crystal silicon NPN small-signal

transistor connected to a basic biasing circuitry in a common-emitter configuration,

(i) Label the terminals of transistor with C for collector, B for base

and E for emitter. [2 marks]

SEU2012(ii) Label the base to emitter voltage as VBe and collector to emitter voltage

as VCe* Mark the polarity of each voltage with correct plus or minus

signs. [2 marks]

Figure B2

3. (a) Give TWO major advantages of a Field-Effect Transistors (FET) over a

Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJT). [2 marks]

4. (a) List two ideal characteristic of an op-amp. [2 marks]

(b) State TWO important assumptions made when analyzing circuits with ideal

op-amps. [2 marks]

R,(c) State the amplifier function of the op-amp for Av = 1 +

R5. Sketch Vo of the following figure when Vref=0 and Vi = Vm sin cot V.

+V,'cc

V.

[1 marks]

[4 marks]

7SEU2012

QI. Rectifier

(a) Draw the circuit diagram of a full-wave bridge rectifier (including transformer and filter).

[4 marks]

(b) If the input to the transformer primary is a 60 Hz sine wave at 120 V,™ and if the

transformer has a tums-ratio of 10:1, determine the peak value of the secondary voltage.

[4 marks]

(c) Assuming that Rl is 220Q, determine the peak value of the unfiltered full-wave rectified

voltage. [5 marks]

(d) Assuming that the filter capacitor is lOOOpF, determine the peak-to-peak ripple voltage.

[4 marks]

PART C: ANSWER (3) QUESTION ONLY

(e) Determine the percentage ripple factor. [3 marks]

8SEU2012

Q2. When Rl = 200 Q, determine Voltage and Current across each component in the

circuit in Figure Q2, with the following step:

(a) Determine the state of zener diode in the circuit. [2 marks]

(b) Draw the equivalent circuit base on the state of zener diode. [2 marks]

(c) Determine Voltage and Current across resistor Rl [2 marks]

(d) Determine Voltage and Current across resistor Rs [2 marks]

(e) Determine Voltage and Current across zener diode [2 marks]

Repeat the above question when Rl = 50 Q.

(f) Determine the state of zener diode in the circuit. [2 marks]

(g) Draw the equivalent circuit base on the state of zener diode. [2 marks]

(h) Determine Voltage and Current across resistor Rl [2 marks]

(i) Determine Voltage and Current across resistor Rs [2 marks]

O') Determine Voltage and Current across zener diode [2 marks]

R<

Rl

Figure Q2

9SEU2012

Q3. Refer to a small signal amplifier circuit in Figure Q3.

The transistor’s parameter are: Pdc = Pac = 100, Vbe= 0.7V, Vt = 26mV

(a) Draw the DC equivalent circuit, then calculate: [1 marks]

(i) the base and collector current, Ib and Ic- [4 marks]

(ii) the collector to emitter voltage, Vce- [3 marks]

(b) Calculate new Q-point (Ibq and Icq) if R2 is halved [4 marks]

(c) Draw the A.C. equivalent circuit of the transistor circuit. [4 marks]

(d) If the voltage gain of the amplifier is Avs = V</Vs = lOdB, and the input signal is a

sinusoidal waveform of Vs = 3.75sinl OOOt V, what would be the amplitude (peak

value) of the output Vo? [4 marks]

VCC+12V

Figure Q3

10 SEU2012

Q4. Refer to Figure Q4. The JFET has IDss=5.4mA and VP=-6V.

(a) Calculate the DC Operating Point VGsq , for IDQ= 2.7mA [3 marks](b) Calculate the drain to source voltage Vos- [3 marks](c) Draw the A.C equivalent circuit of the FET circuit. [2 marks](d) Calculate parameter gm [2 marks](e) Calculate the input impedance, Zi, and the output impedance Zo. [3 marks](f) Calculate the amplifier voltage gain, Av = Vg/Vj. [4 marks](g) Calculate the input voltage, vi; if the AC signal of the output voltage is

v0=5.4 sin 2ut volts. Draw the input signal, v*. [3 marks]

V DD”

O

Ri5MQ

R,15

O

[jfoRd 2JC D.

Rssoon

+

^DS

JOOuF

-OA

V,o

-G

Figure Q4

11SEU2012

Q5. Refer to an Operational Amplifier circuit in Figure Q5(a).

(a) Name three function/application of operational amplifier ? [3 Marks]

(b) The common standard |iA-741 operational amplifier is shown in Figure Q5(a), state

the name for each terminal of the operational amplifier. [4 marks]

HA-741

Figure Q 5 (a)

(c) In Figure Q5(b), the operational amplifier has infinite gain, infinite input impedance

and negligible output impedance. Derive an expression for the circuit’s transfer

function Vou/Vin. [4 marks]

r2

out

Figure Q5(b)

12SEU2012

(d) Calculate Ri from the given circuit as shown in Figure Q5(c) ?

i?2 = 200ka

[4 Marks]

Figure Q5(c)

(e) Determine the output voltage of the following Summing Amplifier circuit as shown in

Figure Q5(d). [5 Marks]

10 kQ

Figure Q5(d)

13SEU2012

Appendix - List of Equations

PIV = 2Vp(mit) + 0.7F

ynns

V’ »-M

V,pJT

VDC 2V3jrlc

yy

y

r ( p - p )2V3

1r —

vDC 4J3 me

Fy

r(rms)r(p-p)

2-S

V Tv = —£—

r(p-p)

V p

RlC fRLC

fta

1 -a

I = 1 + /1 E C B

8mr /3Vr

vr1 CQ

1V,cs

V.

21DSS ■!= (Tjj-, j is mO

r /»!

/ V ' 1

]/\ ! P /

/a =is nr

CO

/

(T = <76m o»?0

D

DSS

V K

Ic — od E + lCBO

§ mV

[/p /

AI,JT

a& m

AV,os

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES

LECTURERS : ASSOC. PROF. DR. NAZIHA BT AHMAD AZLI

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE


SEI / SEE / SEL / SEM

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

09 MAY 2011



Question 1

2SEE4433

(a) Discuss the need of driver circuits in a power electronics converter system. Include a suitable diagram to support the discussion and an example of a driver circuit for any suitable power device.

[7 marks]

(b) Figure Ql(b) shows the output voltage waveform of an unknown power converter. Given that the input of the particular converter is a 240 VrmS, 50 Hz supply. Based on Figure Ql(b), answer the following questions.

Figure Ql(b)(i) Name the type of power converter used to produce the above output voltage

waveform. Identify the load used.[2 marks]

(ii) Sketch the output current, i0(t) waveform.[2 marks]

(iii)If a Free Wheeling Diode (FWD) is connected in parallel with the load. Sketch the output voltage, v'0(t) waveform and the output current, i'0(t) waveform.

[3 marks](iv)Based on the scenario in Ql(b)(iii), derive the expression for the average output

voltage.[3 marks]

(v) In the case if the above converter is using a controllable power switch (without FWD), a delay angle of a would occur. Sketch the new output waveform and prove that the controllable average output voltage is expressed by

Vo i m mg e )=^(cosoc-cosP)

under discontinuous current mode, where 16 is the extinction angle.[4 marks]

(vi) Based on the observation of the controllable output waveform, it can be identified that the output current of the power converter start to rise at t = 2.2 ms and decay to zero at t = 12.5 ms during the first cycle. Calculate the average output voltage.

[4 marks]

Question 2

3SEE4433

(a) Using relevant diagram, sketch and label a block diagram of a mains-fed switched mode power supply (SMPS). Discuss briefly the function of each element in the diagram.

[8 marks]

(b) The waveform of inductor current, iL, of a boost converter in steady-state is shown in Figure Q2(b). The output voltage of the boost converter was found to be \V0\ = 48 V and its peak-to-peak ripples to be Av0 = 0.25 V.

i. Determine the switching frequency and the duty cycle of the circuit.

ii. Determine the input voltage, Vs, and the load resistance, R.

iii. Draw the inductor voltage waveform. Label the key quantities.

iv. Determine the values of the inductor and capacitor.

[3 marks]

[4 marks]

[2 marks]

[4 marks]

(c) For a Buck converter shown in Figure Q2(c), determine the minimum design rating of voltage and current for both power switch {vsw, isw) and power diode (Vx, ix) to ensure the converter works well.

[4 marks]+ K™ -

Figure Q2(c)

Question 3

4SEE4433

(a) Consider a single-phase full-bridge voltage source inverter. Suggest and then describe briefly a control strategy for the inverter that can eliminate a single harmonic in the inverter output voltage to prevent interference with other signaling system utilizing the same frequency. Provide diagrams if necessary to support your suggestion.

[7 marks]

(b) Figure 3(b) shows the output voltage across the R load of an inverter.

V,. ..

-K,r 4

Figure Q3(b)

(i) Show that the Fourier series of each voltage term isr

V. =4V,„__ dc_

\nn jcos na

Hint: cos n(n -a) = cos inn') cos (na)

[3 marks](ii) Given that the inverter output frequency is 50 Hz, R = 100 Q, L = 20 mH and the Vdc

= 100V, determine the value of a to produce 110.3 V fundamental-frequency voltage.[3 marks]

(iii)By using the same a calculated in (ii), determine the THD of the inverter load current up to 7th harmonic order.

[8 marks](iv)Under the condition in b(iii), plot the frequency spectrum of the inverter load current.

Label the important parameters clearly.

[2 marks](v) Suggest and then describe a switching strategy for the inverter power devices that can

improve the quality of the inverter load current.[2 marks]

Question 4

5SEE4433

(a) DC motor drive system employed power electronic converters to obtain variable speed for certain application. Explain briefly two types of power electronic converter normally used. Your explanation must include their typical schematic diagram and performances.

[8 marks]

(b) A 200 V, 1000 rpm and 150 A separately excited DC motor has an armature resistance of0.03 Q. The motor is fed from a chopper circuit, which is able to operate in both motoring and braking operations. The source has a voltage of 200 VDC. Assume that the system operates in continuous conduction.

1. Sketch the schematic diagram of the power converter used in DC motor-drive system as mentioned above.

[3 marks]ii. Calculate the duty cycle, D, of the chopper circuit for motoring mode at rated torque

and speed of 500 rpm.[4 marks]

iii. Calculate the duty cycle of the chopper for braking at rated torque and speed of 500 rpm.

[3 marks]iv. If the chopper maximum operating duty cycle is set to 0.9 and the motor current is at

twice its rated value, calculate the maximum permissible motor speed during braking mode.

[4 marks]v. With the condition of Q4(b)(iii), determine the power fed back to source. Assume no

losses in the power electronics converter.[3 marks]

6SEE4433

(a) Based on a centrifugal pump, explain how and adjustable speed drive can save energy compared to a constant speed drive.

[7 marks]

Question 5

(b) Sketch the characteristic of a typical torque versus speed which depicts the constant power and constant torque regions in an electric drive system. Then, briefly explain how the speed is controlled based on the T-co characteristic.

[5 marks]

(c) Figure Q5(c) shows the torque-speed characteristics of a three-phase induction motor that supplied by a three-phase voltage source inverter for its variable speed-drive operation using a constant V/f control scheme. The induction motor has the following parameters:

■ Rated voltage : 415 V (peak)■ Pole pair (P) : 2

Torque

Figure Q5(c)

i. Determine the supply frequency of characteristic under rated condition.

ii. Determine the supply frequency of characteristic A.

iii. Calculate the slip if the motor is rotating at 24 Hz at rated supply frequency.

[1 marks]

[1 marks]

[2 marks]

Question 5(c)iv-vi continues on the next page.

7SEE4433

If the inverter gives 415 V (peak) fundamental sinusoidal voltage with modulation index of 0 .8 , calculate the required modulation index if the motor need to be operated at rotor mechanical speed of 18 Hz under constant Volt-Hertz ratio at full load condition.

[3 marks]Under variable voltage variable frequency operation, calculate the required voltage to maintain the constant V//ratio for the inverter frequency under1. Rated condition2. Characteristic A3. Characteristic B.

[3 marks]Under the rated condition, calculate the speed of the motor (in rpm) at 80% of the full load torque.

[3 marks]

Question 5(c)...continued

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEI3133

ANALOG AND DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. SALLEHUDDIN BIN IBRAHIM

PROGRAMME

SECTION

SEI

01


DATE 30 APRIL 2011



2

SEI3133

(a) Calculate the sensitivity of a 200|iA meter movement which is to be used as a dc voltmeter.

(2 marks)

(b) A basic D’Arsonval movement with a full scale deflection of 50 jiA and internal resistance of 500 Cl is used as a voltmeter. Determine the value of the multiplier resistance needed to measure a voltage range of 0 - 10V.

Question 1

(c) Convert a basic D’Arsonval movement with an internal resistance of 50Q and a full-scale deflection current of 2mA into a multirange dc voltmeter with voltage ranges of 0 - 10V, 0 - 50V, 0 - 100V and 0 - 250V as in Figure 1.1 by determining the values of Ri, R2 , R3 and R4 at Vi, V2 , V3 , and V4 respectively.

(3 marks)

Figure 1.1

(10 marks)

3

SEI3133

(d) Design an Ayrton shunt as in Figure 1.2 by determining the values of Rj, R2 , R3 and R4 in order to construct an ammeter with a current range of 0 - 1mA, 10mA, 50mA and 100mA. A D’Arsonval movement with an internal resistance of 100Q and full scale current deflection of 50 |jA is utilized.

(10 marks)

1 mA

D'Arsonval

Figure 1.2

4

SEI3133

Question 2

(a) (i) Assuming ideal diode, calculate the d.c. output voltage for the network shown in Figure 2.1.

(b) Repeat part (a) if the ideal diode is replaced by a silicon diode, having a cut in voltage of 0.7V. Ignore diode forward resistance.

Rl* 1 kQ

Figure 2.1

(c) Calculate the peak input and output voltages in Figure 2.2.

(5 marks)

(7 marks)

5

(d) The circuit of a shunt ohmmeter used for the measurement of resistance is shown in Figure 2.3. The calibration resistance R is adjusted for the full scale deflection when X —> oo. For the meter having 0.5 mA full scale deflection current and resistance of 50Q, and supply voltage of 3V, determine

(i) Value of Rand

(ii) Value of X causing half scale deflection.

SEI3133

Figure 2.3

(e) State four advantages and one disadvantage of PMMC instruments.

(8 marks)

(5 marks)

(a) State four advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.

(4 marks)

(b) A 41 digit voltmeter is used for voltage measurements.2

(i) Find its resolution.

(ii) How would 12.98V be displayed on 10V range?

(iii) How would 0.6973 be displayed on IV range?

(iv) How would 0.6973V be displayed on 10V range?

(5 marks)

(c) A 31 digit voltmeter has an accuracy specification of ± 0.5% of reading ± 1 digit.

(i) What is the possible error in volt, when the instrument is reading 5.00V on the 10V range?

(ii) What is the possible error in volt, when reading 0.10V on the 10V range?

(iii) What percentage of the reading is the possible error in the case of (c) (ii) ?

(iv) Is the result in (c) (iii) acceptable?

(8 marks)

(d) Describe how inductive and capacitive impedances are converted into voltage components in digital LCR meters. Your answer must include the basic circuits for performing both operations.

6

SEI3133

Question 3

(8 marks)

7

(a) State two differences between noise and interference?

(4 marks)

(b) The circuit shown in Figure 4.1 generates noise in the resistor from two sources: thermal noise in the resistor and shot noise in the diode. Calculate the total noise voltage in the resistor at a bandwidth of 1 MHz from these sources. Assume the temperature of the resistor is 27°C. e = electronic charge, 1.60 x 10'19C, k = Boltzmann’s constant, 1,38 x 10'23 J/K, and the diode’s forward voltage drop = 0.7V.

SEI3133

Question 4

0 + 5 V

R 220kQ

Figure 4.1

(5 marks)

(c) Can both ends of a shield be connected to grounds? What would happen if both ends are connected to grounds?

(4 marks)

(d) A TLE2027 op amp with a noise specification of 2.5nV/VHz is used over an audio frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a gain of 40dB. The output voltage is 0 dBV (IV). Compute its signal-to-noise ratio.

(6 marks)

8

SEI3133

(e) A pn junction carries a current of 1mA at room temperature. Determine its rms shot noise voltage over an audio frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. (e = electronic change, 1.60 x 10‘19C, k = Boltzmann’s constant, 1,38 x 10'23 J/K).

(3 marks)

(f) Describe burst noise.

(3 marks)

9

SEI3133

Question 5

(a) An 8-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) outputs all l’s when its input voltage is 5.1V. Find its (i) Resolution and (ii) Digital output when its input voltage is 1.28V.

(6 marks)

(b) Given a 3-bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) with a 1 V full scale voltage and accuracy of ± 0.2%,

(i) find its resolution in terms of voltage,

(ii) find its accuracy in terms of voltage, and

(iii) sketch a graph of analog output voltage (as the vertical axis) versus digital input word (as the horizontal axis) for the 3-bit DAC and show the resolution and the accuracy on the graph.

(6 marks)

(c) The RS232 signal in Figure 5.1 is sent with 8 data bits and odd parity.

Logic 1; i 2 3 4 5 G 7 8 [ 9 10 n 12 ;iii

iiii

____tiiiiiti

:Viii

Logic 0

One bit time

Figure 5.1

(i) What is the binary value being transmitted in this signal?

(ii) Is the parity bit correct?

(iii)Would the answer to question 25 change if the RS232 signal was set for 7 data bits?

(8 marks)

(d) Distinguish between parallel and serial communication.

(5 marks)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 3433

ELECTRICAL MACHINES

LECTURERS DR. AWANG BIN JUSOH MR. NIK DIN BIN MUHAMAD

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEE

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY. ALL WORKING NEED TO BE SHOWN CLEARLY.


Question 1

SEE 3433-2-

(a) By considering linear electromechanical energy systems and with the help of equations,

explain briefly the production of torque in a singly excited and a doubly excited

electromechanical energy system. [6 marks]

(b) In the" electromagnetic relay system, the flux linkage A and current i relationship is given

by:

i = kA2e2x

Evaluate the electromechanical energy force, fm when 1 = 2 V.s, x = 1 m and k = 6 A/(V. s)2 [6 marks]

(c) An elementary two-pole cylindrical rotating machine with a uniform air gap is shown in

Figure Ql(c): The mutual inductance between the rotor and the stator is given by

Lu-O.5cos0 H

A DC current source z, = 4 A is applied to the rotor and an AC current source

i2 = 8sin(10/) A is applied to the stator.

(i) Write the general equation of the torque for the machine in Figure Ql(c) as

functions of i\, i2 and L\2. [2 marks]

(ii) Derive the developed torque when the rotor is locked at 6= 60°. Also, determine

the average torque produced by the machine. [5 marks]

(iii) Derive the developed torque when the rotor can freely rotate. Let Q = 60° at t = 0

and a>m = 10 rad/s. Also, determine the average torque developed by the machine.Rotoraxis [6 marks]

comt + 5

Statoraxis

e ^

Figure Ql(c)

SEE 3433-3-

Question 2

(a) Show typical Vt - Ia characteristics of differentially compounded and cumulatively

compounded DC generators. Explain briefly their characteristics. [6 marks]

(b) A six pole DC machine has a wave winding of 300 turns. The flux per pole is 0.025 Wb. The

DC machine rotates at 1000 rpm.

(i) Determine the generated voltage, Ea.

(ii) Determine the kW rating of the machine if the rated current through the turn is 25 A.

[5 marks]

(c) A 10 kW, 100 V, 800 rpm, Ra = 0.1 Q DC machine operated as shunt self-excited generator

has a magnetization characteristic at 800 rpm as shown in Figure 2(c) in Attachment Q2(c).

The shunt field winding resistance R f w - 100 Q and the number of turns N f = 1200 turns per

pole. The rated field current If = 0.8 A. The machine is provided with a series winding with

R$r = 0.04 Q so that it can operate as a compound DC machine as well.

(i) Draw an equivalent circuit of the compound DC machine. Label all key quantities.

[3 marks]

(ii) The machine is operated as a shunt generator at 800 rpm and the no load terminal

voltage is adjusted to 100 V. Determine the full load terminal voltage. Assume the

effect of armature reaction at full-load is /f(AR) = 0.05 A. [4 marks]

(iii) The machine is operated as a compound DC machine at 800 rpm so that the terminal

voltage of 100 V can be achieved at no load as well as at full load (i.e., zero voltage

regulation). How many series turns per pole, Nsr are required to obtain this zero

voltage regulation. Assume the effect of armature reaction at full-load is If(AR) - 0.05

A. [7 marks]

You must submit Attachment Q2(c) with your answer booklet

(a) Explain briefly the terminal voltage control for controlling the speed of a separately excited

DC motor. [4 marks]

SEE 3433-4-

Question 3

(b) Explain briefly the effect of armature reaction on the operation of a DC motor and a DC

generator. [4 marks]

(c) A 10 kW, 100 V, 800 rpm, R a - 0.1 Q DC machine operated as shunt self-excited generator

has a magnetization characteristic at 800 rpm as shown in Figure 3(c) in Attachment 03(c).

The shunt field winding resistance R f w = 100 Q and the number of turns N f = 1200 turns per

pole. The rated field current I f = 0.8 A. The machine is provided with a series winding with

the number of turns N s r and negligible R s r so that it can operate as a compound DC motor as

well. The machine is connected to a 100 V DC supply and is operated as a shunt DC motor.

At no load conditions the motor runs at 800 rpm and the armature takes 5 amperes.

(i) Find back emf E-d, field current If, and field resistance, Rf at no load conditions.

[3 marks]

(ii) Find the speed of the motor when the rated current flows in the armature. Neglect the

armature reaction effect. [4 marks]

(iii) Find the speed of the motor when the rated current flows in the armature. Consider

that the effect of armature reaction at full load is 5% reduction in the air gap flux (i.e.

^fl = 0.95^nl)- [5 marks]

(iv) The machine is operated as a cumulatively compound DC motor so that the speed of

700 rpm can be achieved at full load. How many series turns per pole, Nsr are

required? Assume the armature reaction effect at full load is /f(AR) = 0.15 A.

[5 marks]

You must submit Attachment Q3(c) with your answer booklet

Question 4

SEF3433-5-

(a) Why is terminal voltage speed control for induction machine limited in operating range?

[3 marks]

(b) How is torque developed in induction motor? Why is it impossible for an induction motor

to operate at synchronous speed? [4 marks]

(c) The parameters for a 6-pole, 3-phase, star-connected, 415 V, 50 Hz, 950 rpm wound rotor

induction machine are as follows:

R\ = 0.25 Q Ri — 0.20 Q

Zi = 0.65 Q X2'= 0.60 O Xm = 60Q.

The motor is connected to a 3-phase 415 V, 50Hz supply. The rotational losses are

assumed constant at 1200 watts whenever the motor rotates. With the rotor terminal short

circuited, find:

(i) Line current, power factor, and input power at full load. [6 marks]

(ii) Current drawn by the motor and torque at starting. [6 marks]

(iii) Motor efficiency at which maximum torque is developed. [6 marks]

SEE 3433-6-

(a) Draw the power-angle characteristics and torque-speed characteristics of a synchronous

machine. Label key quantities. [4 marks]

(b) With the help of a suitable phasor diagram, explain briefly how the power factor of the

synchronous motor connected to infinite bus can be controlled by the field current at a

constant output power. [6 marks]

(c) A star-connected 3-phase, 20 kVA, 415 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole synchronous machine has a

synchronous reactance Xs= 10 Q. The armature resistance can be neglected. The machine

is connected to an infinite bus bar of 415 V, 50 Hz.

(i) The mechanical power and field current excitation are adjusted such that the machine

is delivering 10 kW at a power factor of 0.8 lagging. Determine the excitation

voltage Ef and the power angle S. Draw the phasor diagram for this condition.

[5 marks]

(ii) If the field excitation current is now increased by 15 percent without changing the

prime mover power, find reactive kVAr supplied by the machine. Draw the phasor

diagram for this condition. [5 marks]

Question 5

(iii) Determine the maximum power the synchronous machine can deliver for the

excitation current as in (i). Draw the phasor diagram for this condition.

[5 marks]

SEE 3433-7-

Attachment Q2(c)

Name:

Seksyen: 01/02

Magnetization Curve at 800 rpm

Field Current

Figure Q2(c)

SEE 3433-8-

Attachment Q3(c)

Name:

Seksyen: 01/02

Figure 03fc)

SEE 3433-9-

Potentially Useful Formulae

B = — = jjH A

H0 - x 10 7 H/m

R =I

fm =

MHI = Ni

X _ N(j> _ N2 ~ i ~ i ~ R

X = N(j> = Li

dX e = —

dti

Wf = fidX0i

W'f = jxdi0

B

= \HdB0

H

y =0

W'/ = Ji-’IW

(/I, X)

w

w

dxA=constant

fm =cWf (i, x)

dx

i2 dL = 2 ^ U X )

fm =A2 d

2L(x)2 dxL{x)

R f = R f i v + R f c

W,+/,

h ( e f f ) ~ 1 f I f ( A R )

N= /. +^L-J /(/<«)

&> =(KJ)2 KJ

Ea = KJa<Om

T = KI 2sr* a

G)_ ~ v,K,

120/P

N. -N.s =

^r = a-jR

Pmech=ll~ { l - s ) = Pag(\-s)

Ea =V , = E a ± I a R a

K . =Np

m

V t = J?,/,

E f = V , Z 0 ± I J X s

3 E f V ,P = — ̂sin£

P =I2^-°g 2 _

sin(x)cos(jF) = +

r =<5J ‘ ag T max

syn W n + ( X , t + X , ? }

V =r T hX .

7 ::T h

[ R ? + ( X l + X m ) 2 } j X m ( R ] + j X ,)

d LT = } _ i 2 dL1L+ 1.2 dL^ + . . ---------2 1 2 2 dd dd

12

R i + j ( X l + X J

1r = KT h R ,

P = EaI.=Ta>m

a ) s y n ( R r h + R 2 / S ) 2 + ( X T h + X 2 ) 2 s

T = KJIa

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SET 4533

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

LECTURERS ASSOC. PROF. DR. JAFRI BIN DIN ASSOC. PROF. DR. RAZALI BIN NGAH

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SET

01-02

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

30 APRIL 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE SECTION A: ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS. SECTION B: ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2SET4533

SECTION A (ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS)

Ql.(a) Describe the mobile telephone standards of second generation Global System Mobile (2G GSM) and third generation (3G) in terms of operating frequency, channel BW, data rate, and modulation type.

(8 marks)

(b) A cellular radio system has radio base station (RBS) antenna gain of 5 dB at a height 30 m above the ground and mobile station (MS) has a unity antenna gain at a height of 2 m above the ground. The RBS transmitted power is 5 W and operates at 2 GHz. MS has bandwidth of 200 kHz and 5 dB noise figure. The distance between RBS and MS is 5 km.

(i) Calculate carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) at the MS assuming plane earth path loss propagation exists and the losses due to environment is 10 dB.

(3 marks)

(ii) Using the Okumura model predicts the C/N at MS for an open area. Compare the result obtained from (i). (7 marks)

(iii) From (ii), calculate how many second per hour the signal will be below the MS sensitivity level by assuming Rayleigh fading occur at MS. (3 marks)

(iv) From (iii), design a new RBS so that the loss in communication is 20 second per hour. The same antenna gain of 5 dB will be used. (4 marks)

3SET4533

. You are supposed to design a communication link through a geostationary satellite to meet a Carrier-to-Noise ratio, C/N and link margin specification as follows:

Satellite- Geostationary at 730 W longitude.

24 C-band transponders, 28 Ku-band transponders 3.2kW RF power output.Antenna gain, on axis, C band and Ku band (transmit and receive) =31 dB

- Receive system noise temperature (C band and Ku band) = 500K Transponder saturated output power (C band) = 40W

- Transponder bandwidth (C band) =36 MHz- Transponder saturated output power (Ku band) = 80W- Transponder bandwidth (Ku band) = 54 MHz

SignalFM-TV analog signal to be received in a bandwidth of 27 MHz.

- Multiplexed digital TV signals transmitted as QPSK with symbol rate 27 Msps using half rate FEC with coding gain 5.5 dB.Minimum permitted C/N overall of 9.5 dB.

(a) Determine the transmitting power for the earth station to provide a clear air C/N of 26 dB in a C-band transponder at a frequency of 6.285 GHz. Given the uplink antenna diameter is 9 m with efficiency of 68%. The uplink station is located on the 2 dB contour of the satellite footprint. Assume 0.5 dB for clear air atmosphere attenuation and other losses.

(11 marks)

(b) What could be your transmitting power if a Ku band transponder is to be design compared to your answer in Q2 (a). (No calculations involved).

(3 marks)

(c) Design a Ku-band receiving earth station (Determine the diameter of the receiving antenna) to provide an overall clear air C/N of 17 dB in a 27 MHz IF noise bandwidth at a carrier frequency of 11.45 GHz. The antenna noise temperature is 30 K and the LNA noise temperature is 110 K. The receiving terminal is located on the 3 dB contour of the satellite footprint, and clear air attenuation on the path and other losses total 0.8 dB.

(9 marks)

(d) Under conditions of heavy rain, the Ku-band path to the satellite station suffers an attenuation of 6 dB. Calculate the overall C/N at the earth station in a bandwidth of 27 MHz under these conditions.

(2 marks)

4SET4533

Q3.(a) Assuming nth propagation power law exists between radio base station (RBS) and mobile station (MS) in cellular system, show that the carrier to interference ratio (C/7) is given by.

( D V C ! I = --1

Uwhere D is the co-channel separation and R is the cell radius. (3 marks)

(b) State two assumptions to be made for the above expression. (2 marks)

(c) From part (a), if seven cells per cluster are employed and free space condition exists between RBS and MS, calculate the carrier to interference ratio (C/7) in dB. Discuss your result in term of MS reception. (5 marks)

(d) Analyze (C/7) if the number of cell per cluster is now to be reduced to four. (3 marks)

(e) Figure Q3 shows the discrete power delay profile for multipath environment obtained from the field measurement in Kuala Lumpur by a cellular telephone company.

(i) Calculate, (a) mean excess delay, (b) mean square delay, (c) rms delay spread, and (d) coherence bandwidth for frequency correlation function above 90%.

(7 marks)(ii) Analyze your results in Q3 (e)(i)in term of type of fading for this channel.

(3 marks)(iii) Suggest the requirement (if any) needed for designing a receiver to be used in this

environment. (2 marks)

SECTION B (ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS')

Pr(x) dB

Figure Q3

5SET4533

Q4.(a) State three advantages of the sectorized cell in cellular telephone network. (3 marks)

(b) With the aid of suitable diagram, explain how sectorized cell can reduce the co-channel interference compared to omni cell. (4 marks)

(c) Describe two types of interference occurence in cellular radio system and the methods to overcome or minimize these interferences. (4 marks)

(d) As an engineer you have been assigned to plan radio base stations to provide cellular telephone coverage for an area of 3000 square km and operating at 900 MHz having a total bandwidth allocation of 19.2 MHz with simplex channel of 30 kHz. The area of each cell is 10 square km using 4 cells per cluster. Assume the grade of service (GOS) of 2 % for Erlang B system and each user make average 3 calls per hour at average call duration of 2 minutes. Calculate,

(i) the traffic intensity of each user (2 marks)(ii) the number of cells and cluster in service area (2 marks)(iii) the number of channel per cell (2 marks)(iv) the maximum carried traffic for the service area (2 marks)(v) the total number of users that can be served for 2% GOS (2 marks)

(vi) the theoretical maximum number of users could be served at one time. (2 marks)(vii) Discuss the results in (v) and (vi) in terms of number of users. (2 marks)

6SET4533

Q5.(a) Satellites(spacecraft) which orbit the earth follow the same laws that govern the motion of the planets around sun. Johannes Kepler derived three(3) laws describing planetary motion.

(i) What are Kepler’s three laws of planetary motion?

(6 marks)

(ii) What do the terms perigee and apogee mean when used to describe the orbit of a satellite orbiting the earth?

(4 marks)

(iii) A satellite in an elliptical orbit around the earth has an apogee of 39,152 km and a perigee of 500 km. What is the orbital period of this satellite? (The mathematical formulation of the third law is T2 = (47t2a3)/jj., where T is the orbital period, a is the semimajor axis of the orbital ellipse, and u is Kepler’s constant = 3.986 x 105 km2/s2. Assume the average earth radius of the earth is 6378.137 km)

(5 marks)

(b) Satellite orbits the earth follow the same laws that govern the motion of the planets around the sun.

(i) Use Kepler’s law to compute the radius of a circular satellite orbit for which the period is 1 day.

(6 marks)

(ii) State one example of satellite system that may employ this orbit. Explain the operations of such services which require this orbital feature.

(4 marks)

BASI

C M

EDIA

N A

TTEN

UA

TIO

N A

rau

(f,d

) (dB

)

7SET4533

300 500 TOO K>00 20003000 FREQUENCY KMHz)

8SET4533

100 200 300 500 700 1000 2000 3000

Frequency f (MHz)

PERC

ENT

PRO

BABI

LITY

TH

AT

NO

RMA

LISE

D S

IGN

AL

POW

ER <

ABS

CISS

A

Signal power normalized to the median (dB) CDF of the received signal power plotted on Rayleigh paper

9SET4533

Prob

abili

ty o

f Blo

ckin

g

0.05

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.0011.0 10.0

Traffic Intensity in Erlangs100.0

11SET4533

List of formulas

Boltzmann Constant = 1.38 xlO J/K

= 1 W/m> And And 77

P - P A -01,4 J£I’G^' d e 120n e A80n2

Ad} d2 A(dx + d2)

P=P,G,Gr yd2for d »yjh'h.

Z50 (dB) = Lf + Amu ( f . d ) - G(h,) - G(hr) - Ga

G(h:) = 20 log(h, / 200),30m <ht < 1000m

f10 log(hr /3),hr <3m

[20 log(hr / 3),3m < hr < 30m

vcosd

G(hr) =

L = A

<JT = yjr2 - ( t ) 2 where t 2 =

C = MkN = MS

M ^ to

__

____

_1

1 i

and (r) =

r_ ~(X

T

1

D ~ \li2 +U + J'2

AA u = A H , A = U Au, Ac=^

Res = 23.188 xlO6 ^3.381-cos/, cos/= cos<9£ cos((Z^-(Z^) [C/N] = [EIRPJ + [Gr] - [Losses] - [k] - [Ts] - [BN]

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

LECTURERS PROF. IR. DR. ABDUL HALIM BIN MOHAMED YATIMASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD NOH BIN AHMADASSOC. PROF. IR. DR. SHARUL KAMAL BINABDUL RAHIMDR. MOKHTAR BIN HARUN

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEB / SEC / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET

0 1 - 0 3 / 1 0

2 HOURS

13 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE PART A : ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.PART B : ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.


-2-

SEE4012

Ql. Professional basketball players have been playing basketball all their life, and in addition

that is what they do for living. Define the term professional, and discuss why basketball

which has been played professionally is not termed as professional.

(15 marks)

Q2. Define what BEM Code of Professional Conduct is. With example discuss why the code,

even though not totally comprehensive, provides a framework for ethical judgment for an

engineering professional.

(15 marks)

Q3. Answer any three of the followings:

a. List all objectives of Registration of Engineers Act 1967 (Act 138)

b. List all functions of Board of Engineers Malaysia (BEM).

c. List the eight elements necessary for a contract to be enforceable by law.

d. List rights and responsibilities of an engineer

(15 marks)

Q4. What are the ethical issues? With the aid of an example, discuss how each ethical issue is

evaluated in ethical judgment.

(15 marks)

Q5. List and define three types of accident? With aid of an example, discuss how an

engineering design is deemed safe before it is mass produced for public use.

PART A (60%) - ANSWER ANY 4 QUESTIONS.

(15 marks)

-3-

SEE4012

Answers to Q6 to Q9 are based on the following case, and Code of Professional Conduct

(Registration of Engineer Act - Act 138) on page 5.

Marvin Johnson is Environmental Engineer for Wolfog Manufacturing, one of several local

plants whose water discharges flow into a lake in a flourishing tourist area. Included in Marvin's

responsibilities is the monitoring of water and air discharges at his plant and the periodic

preparation of reports to be submitted to the Department of Natural Resources.

Marvin has just prepared a report that indicates the level of pollution in the plant's water

discharges slightly exceeds the legal limitations. However, there is little reason to believe that

this excessive amount poses any danger to people in the area; at worst, it will endanger a small

number of fish. On the other hand, solving the problem will cost the plant more than $200,000.

Marvin's supervisor, Plant Manager Edgar Owens, says the excess should be regarded as a mere

"technicality," and he asks Marvin to "adjust" the data so that the plant appears to be in

compliance. He explains: "We can't afford the $200,000. It might even cost a few jobs. No doubt

it would set us behind our competitors. Besides the bad publicity we'd get, it might scare off

some of tourist industry, making it worse for everybody."

[This hypothetical case is an adaptation from Roger Ricklefs, "Executives Apply Stiffer Standards Than Public to Ethical Dilemmas," The Wall Street Journal, November 3, 1983.]

Questions:

Q6. List 3 (three) relevant codes in BEM Code of Professional Conduct that might be violated

should Marvin goes ahead with his supervisor’s suggestion. Briefly explain one of your

answers. (5 marks)

Q7. What do you understand about the word “adjust”, the action Marvin was asked to do on

the data so that the plant appears to be in compliance. Justify your answer

PART B (40%) - ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS

-4-

SEE4012

(10 marks)

Q8. Let’s say that you were in the team that was responsible for gathering and analyzing the

pollution emission data. How would you justify to Edgar Owens, who says the pollution

excess should be regarded as a mere "technicality", that his statement is not true.

(15 marks)

Q9. From the whole scenario of the case given, would you suggest to Marvin to do

whistleblowing? Justify your answer. (10 marks)

-5 -

SEE4012

CODE OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT(REGULATION NO 23 - 33 REGISTRATION OF ENGINEER ACT)

23. Every Registered Engineer shall at all times uphold the dignity, high standing and reputation of his profession.24. A Registered Engineer in his responsibility to his employer, client or the profession shall have full regard to the public interest.25. (1) A Registered Engineer shall discharge his duties to his employer or client as the case may be with complete fidelity.

(2) Except with the permission of his employer, a Registered Engineer shall not accept any remuneration for services rendered other than from his employer.26. A registered Engineer shall not maliciously injure or attempt to maliciously injure whether directly or indirectly, the professional reputation, prospects or business of another Registered Engineer.27. A registered Engineer shall not;

(a) canvass or solicit professional employment(b) offer to make by way of commission or any other payment for the introduction of his professional employment; or(c) except as permitted by the Board, advertise in any manner or form in connection with his profession.

28. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not practice engineering with any person whose registration has been cancelled.29. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not be a medium of payment made on his client’s behalf unless he is so requested by his client nor shall he, in connection with work on which he is employed, place contracts or orders except with the authority of and on behalf of his client.30. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not without the approval of the Board enter into professional partnership with any person other than a Professional Engineer in private practice, a Registered Architect, a Registered Quantity Surveyor or a Licensed Land Surveyor.31. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not directly or indirectly-

(a) supplant or attempt to supplant another Professional Engineer in private practice;(b) intervene or attempt to intervene in or in connection with engineering work of any kind which to his knowledge has already been entrusted to another Professional Engineer in private practice; or(c) take over any work of that other Professional Engineer in private practice acting for the same client unless he has-

(i) obtained the consent of that other Engineer; or(ii) been formally notified by the client that the service of that other Engineer have been terminated in accordance with the provisions of any contract entered into between that other Engineer and the client.

32. (1) Except with the prior approval of the board, a Professional Engineer in private practice shall not be a director or executive of or substantial shareholder in or agent for any contracting or manufacturing company or firm or business related to building or engineering.

(2) If such approval is given, such Professional Engineer shall not undertake any contract work wherein he is engaged as a consulting engineer in such project unless it is in respect of a “design and build” project.33. Every Registered Engineer while acting in his professional capacity shall disclose in writing to his client of the fact if he is a director or member of a substantial shareholder in or agent for any contracting or manufacturing company or firm or business or has any financial interest in any such company or firm or business, with which he deals on behalf of his client.

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEE 2043

SIGNAL AND NETWORKS

LECTURER DR. YUSRI BIN MD. YUNOS

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEL / SEM / SET / SWB

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

12 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY. EACH CANDIDATE WILL BE GIVEN THE FOLLOWING ITEM:-

i) A BOOK OF FORMULAii) SEMILOG GRAPH


Given the following signals /j (t), f2 (?) and f3 (t). Answer the following questions.

f2 (0 = 4[w(7 - 2) - «(/ - 4)]

f 3 { t ) = - 2 ( t - 6 ) [ u ( t - A ) - u ( t - 6 ) ]

(i) Sketch the signals of f x (t ), f 2 ( t ) and /3 (?).

(ii) If /4 (0 = /, (0 + f 2 ( t ) + f 3 (0 Sketch /4 ( t )

(iii) If f 5 (0 = - f 3 (20 Sketch /5 (0

A fullwave rectified signal, V : ( t ) of Figure Ql(a), acts as an input to a

simple RLC circuit of figure Ql(b)

SEE2043

Vi(t)

Figure Ql(a) Full wave rectified signal

L=0.2H

(6 Marks)

(3 Marks)

(4 Marks)

Figure Ql(b) RLC Circuit

(i) Find the trigonometry fourier series of Vi (7) up to 2nd harmonics?

(3 Marks)

(ii) Find the circuit current, I ( t ) (6 Marks)

(iii) Sketch the amplitude frequency spectrum of the current, I ( t ) up to

2nd Harmonics. (3 Marks)

3SEE2043

Q2. (a) Briefly discuss ONE similarity and ONE difference between Fourier

transform and Laplace Transform in the application of signal analysis and

signal processing.

(4 marks)

(b) (i) Write the mathematical expression of signal x(t) in

TRIANGULAR function and then find the Fourier Transform of

the signal.

(2 marks)

x(t)

4SEE2043

Figure Q2(b)(i)

(ii) The signal x { t ) in (b)(i) is now shifted to the right by 2 units and is

represented by signal y(t) below in Figure Q2(b)(ii). Find the

Fourier Transform of the signal in (b)(ii).

(2 marks)

y(t)

FigurebQ2(b)(ii)

(iii) Signal x(t) in (b)(i) and signal y(t) in (b)(ii) are combined to

form signal z(t) below. By using the property of Fourier

Transform, find the Fourier Transform for signal z(t).

(2 marks)

5SEE2043

Consider the system. h{t) is given as h(t) = 2 sin c (201) + sin c (10/).

x(t)------- ► h(t) +y(t)

(i) By using the duality and linearity properties, find the Fourier

Transform for signal h ( t ) .

(4 marks)

(ii) The Fourier Transform of signal x(t) is given as X(a>) below.

Draw the spectrum of Y(a>).

X(a>)A

-25 -15 -5 5 15 25co

Figure Q2(c)(ii)

(2 marks)

(iii) Based on your answer in (c)(ii), write the expression for Y(g>) .

(2 marks)

6SEE2043

(d) Consider a system shown in Figure Q2(d)(i). An input signal, x(t) is

multiplied by a carrier signal cos(<y/)' The resulting signal is then passed

through an ideal filter h(t). The signal is then multiplied by carrier signal

cos(co2t). The spectrum of X(co) and H(a>) are as shown in Figure

Q2(d)(ii) and (iii).

x(t)

cos (coxt) cos (co2t)

Figure Q2(d)(i)

Figure Q2(d)(ii)

1

mco)

0 250 750 co

Figure Q2(d)(iii)

i) If a>y is set at 500rad/s, draw the spectrums of A(co) and B(a>).

(3 marks)

ii) Determine the value of co2 and draw the spectrum of filter H2 (co)

if the desired output signal Y(co) is as shown below in Figure

Q2(e). Show your calculations by drawing the spectrum of C(a>).

7SEE2043

Y(a>)

Figure Q2(e)

(4 marks)

8SEE2043

Q3 (a) The Laplace Transform has properties similar to the properties of the

Continuous Time Fourier Transform. Using the linearity, time shifting,

time scaling and the differential equation properties;

Find the Laplace transform of

(i) x(t) = u(t) - u(t - 3)

(ii) y(t) = x(21)

(iii) ~ (z(0) + 7 ^ (*(0) +12 z(t) = 0at dt

(2 marks)

(3 marks)

for times t > 0, subject to the initial conditions z(0) = 2 and

— 0(0),=o =~4 dt

(b) Consider the waveform x(t) given in Figure Q3(a);

(4 marks)

x f t )

-> t

(i) Write a mathematical expression for x(t) (3 marks)

(ii) Find the Laplace Transform, X(^) (3 marks)

An electrical circuit shown in Figure Q3(b) consist of two resistors, an

inductor, a capacitor and a voltage source. Initially, at t = Os switch S is at

position^ and at t = Is the switch is at position B and remain there.

9SEE2043

Figure Q3(b)

(i) Sketch the Laplace transform equivalent circuit for 0 < t < Is

Assume . vc (0) = 0 and /(0) = 2

(2 marks)

(ii) Find the current i(t) and vc (t) provided by the power supply

immediately after the switch S is closed at position A.

(5 marks)

(iii) Find the voltage across the capacitor for t > Is

(3 marks)

Using the semilog graph, plot the magnitude and phase bode plot for

SEE2043

88^+10)(j + 8)(j + 11)

(15 marks)

If Y ( s ) = X ( s ) H ( s ) , where X ( s ) = s + 3000 , sketch the magnitude and

phase bode plot for Y ( s ) .

(10 marks)

Figure Q5 shows different response of passive low pass filters.

11SEE2043

(a) (b)

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

(c) (d)

Figure Q5

(i) What is the type of response shown in Figure Q5(a)?

(2 marks)

(ii) A typical response of a Chebyshev filter is shown in Figure Q5(b).

On the other hand, a slightly different response of a Chebyshev is

shown in Figure Q5(c). What is the different?

(2 marks)

(iii) The response in Figure Q5(d) shows a steeper roll-off (small

transition band) compared to Figure Q5(b) and Figure Q5(c).

Based on your observation, how a steeper roll-off can be obtained?

(2 marks)

You are asked to design a second order Chebyshev filter.

(i) Calculate the maximum allowable magnitude of ripple, A max, of

the filter. Given c o s =1.844r a d I s and a s = 45d B .

(5 marks)

12SEE2043

(ii) Find the normalized transfer function, H n ( s ) , of the Chebyshev

filter. (5 marks)

(iii) What is the actual transfer function, H ( s ), of the Chebyshev filter

if the c o p = 20rad / s.

(2 marks)

By using the same system order, cos, and as , calculate the following:.

(i) The normalized transfer function, H n ( s ) , of a Butterworth filter.

(2 marks)

(ii) The value of a p (5 marks)

13SEE2043

LAMPIRAN (APPENDIX)

F: MEREKABENTUK PENAPIS ANALOG (Analog Filter Design)

CHEBYSHEV

4nax = 20 log ^ =-20 lOgf \ 1 / \ I max

= 101og(l + £-2) , £ =\10 10 -1

Xn = 1

cosh -i( a, 'N / f A ^̂max

O 0 1 / IoOV / / v J

o)c = cop cosh — cosh 1 n \s j j

H n ( s ) =K . K ,

Tn(s) sn + an_lsn 1 + ....+ a^s + a0 ’

o ; n ganjil(odd)

; n genap(everi)a, an

+ s 10 20

BUTTERWORTH

mjcoi =

i +f \in

CO

K m o J

> H n ( s ) =1 1

Bn(s) s" + an_lsn +....+ ax s + 1

a = 201og10 \H(ja>)\ = -lOlog

a. = -lOlog

— / \ In ~1 +

CO

COV C

In '1 + P

CO\ c _, as = -10 log

In '1 + s

\2n

= 10“p/'° -1,C \In

CO,

v®cy= 10"'/,0-l ,

f \2n oj.

\ a p j

10“J1° -1 10“p/1° -1

14SEE2043

n =__ logl(lOg'/10 - l)/lQ^/10 - 1

c o c =10«„/10 1/2 n atau =

[lO"*/10 - if"

Jadual F.l: Pengiraan frekuensi sudut jalur henti temormal, a>sn. (Calculations of normalized stopband angle frequency)

Jenis penapis Frekuensi sudut jalur henti ternormal, 0)m(Types of filters) (Normalized stopband angle frequency)

Penapis lulus rendah, LPF(Low Pass Filter) <°P

Penapis lulus tinggi, HPF Vp(High Pass Filter)

Penapis lulus jalur, BPFG)nlcoD2 - col co2

s2 - CODlCODl----- 1---------------- 1 atau(or)------- ?--------------- s, pilih yang lebih kecil(Band Pass Filter) ® , i K 2 - ^ i j ® r f K 2 - % l j

(choose smaller value)

Penapis jalur henti, BSFct)'Acon-, - o) n , ) coAa>nl - O) ,)—-----------------— atau(or) —----------------------- , pilih yang lebih kecil

(Band Stop Filter) ^pl^pl ~ ®s2 ~ (Qpl^pl(choose smaller value)

15SEE2043

Jadual F.4: Pekali penapis Chebyshev untuk Amax 0.5, 1, 2 dan 3 dB.('Coefficients of Chebychev filter for Amax 0.5, 1, 2 dan 3 dB)

n a0 ai a 2 a3 a4 as a61 2.8627 0.5 db ripple2 1.5162 1.42563 0.7156 1.5348 1.25294 0.3790 1.0254 1.7168 1.19735 0.1789 0.7525 1.3095 1.9373 1.1726 0.0947 0.4323 1.1718 1.589 2.1718 1.1597 0.044 0.2820 0.7556 1.6479 1.869 2.4126 1.1512

n a0 ai a 2 a3 a4 as a61 1.9652 1 db ripple2 1.1025 1.09773 0.4913 1.2384 0.98834 0.2756 0.7426 1.4539 0.95285 0.1228 0.5805 0.9743 1.6888 0.93686 0.0689 0.3070 0.9393 1.2021 1.9308 0.92827 0.0307 0.2136 0.5486 1.3575 1.4287 2.1760 0.9231

n a0 ai a2 a3 a4 a5 a61 1.3075 2 db ripple2 0.8230 0.80383 0.3268 1.0221 0.73784 0.2057 0.5167 1.2564 0.71625 0.0817 0.4593 0.6934 1.4995 0.70646 0.0514 0.2102 0.7714 0.8670 1.7458 0.70127 0.0204 0.1660 0.3825 1.1444 1.0392 1.9935 0.6978

n a0 ai a2 a3 a4 a5 a61 1.0023 3 db ripple2 0.7079 0.64483 0.2505 0.9283 0.59724 0.1769 0.4047 1.1691 0.58155 0.0626 0.4079 0.5488 1.4149 0.57446 0.0442 0.1634 69909 69060 1.6628 0.57067 0.0156 0.1461 0.3000 1.0518 0.8314 1.9115 0.5684

16SEE2043

Jadual F.5: Transformasi frekuensi penapis(.Frequency Transformations of filter)

Jenis penapis (Types of filters)

Transformasi (Transformation)

Penapis lulus rendah, LPF (Low Pass Filter)

s s—, (—, bagi Butterworth) (Op ac

Penapis lulus tinggi, HPF (High Pass Filter) —, (—, bagi Butterworth)

5 s

Penapis lulus jalur, BPF (Band Pass Filter)

s1 +a>piO>p2

Penapis jalur henti, BSF (Band Stop Filter)

(o)p2 ~ COpi)s

S2 + ®P1®P2

Jadual F.6(a): Pekali-pekali Polinomial Butterworth Bn(s) = sn+an-isI1'1+................ +ais+l

n ai a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a92 1.41423 2.0000 2.00004 2.6131 3.4142 2.61315 3.2360 6.2360 6.2360 3.23606 3.8637 7.4641 9.1416 7.4641 3.86377 4.4939 10.0978 14.5917 14.5917 10.0978 4.49398 6.1258 13.1370 21.8461 26.6883 21.8461 13.1370 6.12589 6.7587 16.5817 31.1634 41.9863 41.9863 31.1634 16.5817 6.758710 6.3924 20.4317 42/8020 64.8823 74.2334 64.8823 42.8020 20.4317 6.3924

Jadual F.6(b): Polinomial Butterworth dalam bentuk pemfaktoran Butterworth_____________ (.Butterworth Polynomials in Factorized Form)___________________

n Bn(s)_____________________________________________________________________________1 s + 12 s2+ 1.41421356s + 13 (s + 1) (s2+ s + 1)4 (s2 + 0.76536686s + 1) (s2 + 1.84775907s + 15 (s+ 1) (s2 + 0.61803399s + 1) (s2 + 1.931803399s + 1)6 (s2 + 0.51763809s + 1) (s2 + 1.41421356s + 1) (s2 + 1.93185165s + 1)7 (s + 1) (s2 + 0.44504187s + 1) (s2 + 1.24697960s + 1) (s2 + 1.80193774s + 1)8 (s2 + 0.39018064s + 1) (s2 + 1.11114047s + 1) (s2 + 1.66293922s + 1) (s2 + 1.96157056s + 1)9 (s + l)(s2 +0.34729636s + 1) (s2 + s + 1) (s2 + 1.53208889s + 1) (s2 + 1.87938524s + 1)10 (s2 + 0.31286893s + 1) (s2 + 0.90798100s + 1) (s2 + 1.41421356s + 1) (s2 + 1.78201305s + 1)

(s2 + 1.97537668s + 1)

CONFIDENTIAL




COURSE NAME

LECTURERS

BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MEASUREMENT

MR. AB. RAHIM BIN AB. RAHMAN

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEP

01

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

13 MAY 2011

INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FIVE (5) QUESTIONS ONLY.


2

SEP4123

ANSWER FIVE ( 5 ) QUESTIONS ONLY

QI. Refer to Figure QI. Assume Op Amps are ideal,

(a) Prove that

(0

V o =R,

R,

1+*L

-^V + p os 1+5*.

R,

f f T? î+5l

Rz

i + 5iv v ^ 4 J

\ + vV ^ - G j

+ ■R<

^ ^ T? ^ i + R |

R,

(ii) Rji-Ri,

(iii) Rp=0

R,2-R3+R4,

V2 -R,

i+5iV V ^ 4 J

+

r1 +

R0V ^ G J V ^ G j

V1

Rg:

v2

Vpc

VEE

A/WR5

Re■AAV

Vcc

Rii

Rc

V,

AVvV°2 R3

EE

r2AAA—

Vcc

+-T —RoVEe

Vr

Vcc

AAV- _ ,R4 Vos

VEE

+ Vcc

r7

Rx

Rs

- V e e

Figure QI

[6 marks]

[3 marks]

[1 mark]

(b) By separating Rx into RX7 above the potentiometer’s wiper and Rxg below the

potentiometer’s wiper respectively, please express Vos in term of Rx7, Rxg, R7, Rg, +Vcc

and -Vee- [5 marks]

3

SEP4123

With Vos being adjusted to OV, the offset voltage of IV appears at the

amplifier output, explain the methods you use to remove this offset voltage. [5 marks]

Q2. (a) Refer to Figure Q2(a). Calculate the common mode gain for instrumentation amplifier

OPA37A, OPA11 IB and OPA128LM. Which amplifier do you think amplifies the least

of common-mode signal? [8 marks]

4

SEP4123

trill the best low noise, offset, {end temperKture drift performance. At $oufce wpedifKcs above aiboul 10kQ, tile bias current noise of the OPA37 reacting wtit] dk inpii tnpcdfiBce begins fo domMile tfve nojse performance. Pw these *pphcaiio«kut}n^ iiie OPA1} I or DehI OPA211I FET input op-amp wil

pafsjftMrtcfc. Forlower coal, use (be OPA12J pl^tk. To ae elKttomaef, use the OPM28,

AjfAz R,<0)Own

<V/V)CMRR

{dB) Max I„Noise at 1kHz

fnV/yfE)

OPA37A 50-5 2J* 100 128 4GnA 4QPAtlli 202 Iflk 100 110 I p A 200PA12SLM 202 10k LOG 118 75fA 38

Building three op-amp precision instrumentation amplifiers with NPN and FET Inputs* (Courtesy of Burr-Brown under copyright 1993 Burr-Brown Corporation)

Figure Q2(a)

5

(b) Refer to Figure Q2(b). Discuss the purpose of this circuit and how it performs its task.

[6 marks]

SEP4123

1 MQ

Auto-zero amplifier. (Courtesy of Burr-Brown under copyright 1BBB Burr-Brown Corporation)

Figure Q2(b)

(c) Refer to Figure Q2(c) and Figure Q2(d). Discuss how the shield is effectively reduced the

effect of distributed capacitances along the long input cables to the amplifier.

What happen if there is no shield installed? [6 marks]

6

SEP4123

Guarded input circuit.

Figure Q2(c)

Transducer oranalog sign&l

Amplificaiiori of transformer-coupled signal with shield driver. (Courtesy of Burr-Brown under copyright 1993 Burr-Brown Corporation)

Figure Q2(d)

7

Refer to Figure Q3(a), Q3(b) and Q3(c).

SEP4123

A Medical ECG Monitor Circuit

Figure Q3(a)

The letter G at the amplifier blocks of the diagram denotes the gain or amplification of

that particular amplifier block.

(a) What is the overall gain of the ECG monitor circuit? [3 marks]

(b) Calculate the value of (V3-V2) = (V+-V~) if IVtput= IV. [4 marks]

(c) What is the output voltage of the op amp AD705J if the common-mode voltage

[(l>8 + V\) / 2] = 10sinl007it mV? [4 marks]

8

The circuit for the output amplifier is shown in Figure Q3(b).

SEP4123

Rf

Figure Q3(b)

(d) If the gain of this amplifier is 143 and Ri = lkH, what is the required

value of Rf? [4 marks]

9

The circuit for the high pass filter is shown below in Figure Q3(c).

SEP4123

co v: out

Figure Q3(c)

(e) Briefly explain the function of the circuit and state where probably this circuit is

used? [2 marks]

(f) If the cut off frequency of the filter, fc = 0.03Hz and C = l|iF, calculate the value

of R? [3 marks]

10

SEP4123

Q4. Refer to Figure Q4.

4 Mat All Inputs

(Model /i ira

% H £>—■^y^r— *

J LL

4 RLMve

4-Vctaiip

Buffers

Analog CoffliiMt o=^ 47 pH

1010

DSffAMfWR*fd Gtitw = 5oftG

LeadI

Witen Mat ICft AwRA.UUX= <RA+U+LL)ft

Ut

Leicllll

01-

LeriaVL

UnUVF

-o Switch €*n»i In

WCT

WlisociQiÔsrt

ftccoHBtfiOet

Figure Q4

(a) Briefly explain the function of the circuit in Figure Q4. [3 marks]

(b) What can be achieved by incorporating the Wilson network in this circuit? [4 marks]

(c) By using RA, LA and LL as input voltages to the amplifier system, calculate the voltages

at Wilson Central Out, Lead I, Lead II, Lead III, Lead aVR, Lead aVL, Lead aVF and

Precordial 1 Out if the input voltages at RA, LA, LL and Precordial 1 In are all equal to

sin lOOut volt? [5 marks]

(d) What is the function of 47 pF capacitor in the feedback loop of RL amplifier? What

happen if this capacitor is omitted? What is the cut-off frequency of this circuit?

[4 marks]

11

SEP4123

(e) Draw the practical op amp circuits for +RA, +LA, +LL, +Prec, Lead I, Lead II, Lead III,

Lead aVR, Lead aVL, Lead aVF and Precordial 1 Out amplifiers. [4 marks]

Vi {

Vol

ts )>

12

Q5. Blood pressure measurement is very important procedure in assessing one’s health.

The following questions could clarify something regarding pressure:

(a) Calculate the force required to produce a pressure of 100 mmHg on the area of 1 mm2.

[3 marks]

(b) A barometer measures an atmospheric pressure of 500 mmHg. Convert this pressure

to atmosphere, psi, pascals and newtons per square meter. [5 marks]

(c) Explain how you classify the blood pressure into systolic and diastolic pressures.

Give one example of how these two values are recorded. [4 marks]

(d) Explain clearly with the aid of suitable diagrams (for example the diagram in Figure

Q5(a), Q5(b) and other diagram of yours) of how the indirect oscillometric blood

pressure measurement method is accomplished? State two advantages of this

method. [8 marks]

SEP4123

linefsECtndBj

Figure Q5(a)

13

SEP4123

ID 13 21 25 35

Figure Q5(b)

14

Q6. Refer to the diagrams in Figure Q6(a) and Q6(b). These two diagrams are related to the

measurement of Cardiac Output (CO) by thermodilution method.

SEP4123

WHOmmmm.

Mow TMicaiatipr J

Figure Q6(a)

15

SEP4123

M&RMKNf mINiPICWT'61INJICHON

*«!& COMPUTID' ■¥

p^MCMWiAXMI

brpok in zQwrmm *am mw to■ICIISIIIftTlOii OF INPICflTOK

Pi;«CItC»L Oil Of ION CCHIVI

(SVMISIDOILUTrOU

TUMIfcaiffiMfflftjr PII1EPT5 if SUIT m THIS MDMIMf

csijgii in mm mud- A***mm fMJtf* SHIFT

Figure Q6(b)

(a) Explain clearly with the aid of the diagrams in Figure Q(a) and Figure Q(b) of how the

the cardiac output measurement is performed. [8 marks]

(b) The cardiac output is calculated based on the area under the curve of the density indicator

versus time. Could you further elaborate this method and what are the other parameters

needed to complete the calculation. [12 marks]

16

SEP4123

Q7. (a) Refer to Figure Q7.

(i) Define the lung volumes of TV, IRV, RV and ERV.

(ii) Define the lung capacities of IC, VC and TLC.

[4 marks]

[3 marks]

6.000 rof

S.OOOnV(WSPlRXTOfiY RESERVE

VOLUME 4,000 mi 3’100 ml-

i,odOml

S.DOOfN

__ , SXMWOflY2.DOQfrt RESEHVS

VOLUME UKXJmJ

RESKKIAL .< .. VOLUME I-;;: 1,200 mi "<

Figure Q7

(b) (i) Calculate the partial pressure of oxygen, nitrogen and carbon dioxide if their

percentage volume are 20.96%, 79% and 0.04% respectively. Assume the

atmospheric pressure is equal to 760 mmHg. [6 marks]

(ii) Define respiration. [2 marks]

(iii) Explain how the exchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide occur between the

capillary and the body cell in internal respiration. [5 marks]

17

Q8. Figure Q8(a to d) may be used to explain EEG system.

(a) Draw a typical instrumentation amplifier circuit used in this EEG system. [4 marks]

(b) Calculate the CMRR of the EEG amplifier in dB if the EEG amplifier output is

1000 mV to a 100 p.V differential EEG input and the noise output is 1 mV to a 100 jaV

common-mode noise input. [4 marks]

(c) The amplifiers used in EEG system are very high gain (xlOOO) amplifiers. Give at least one

reason why such a high gain amplifiers are needed? [2 marks]

(d) What are the most critical design specifications for the Low Voltage Power Supply circuit for

the EEG system if the EEG input signal peak to peak to the system is less than 5 (J.V.

[2marks]

(e) Let assume the cranial generator voltage, e to be 100 f-iVp.p, the cranial impedance,

r to be 10 kQ, the equivalent electrode-scalp resistances, Rl and R2 to be 10 kQ each, and

the amplifier input impedance, Rjn to be 10 MQ. Let also assume the existent of common

mode noise, en0iSe to be 1 Vp-p coupled to the electrode-scalp interfaces through stray

capacitances Cl and C2 for each electrode.

(i) Draw the EEG input circuit to the instrumentation amplifier. [4 marks]

(ii) Calculate the input voltage at the differential input of the instrumentation amplifier.

[2 marks]

(iii) If EEG instrumentation amplifier gain is xlOOO and one allows only 0.1 (J.VP_P

of the common-mode signal appears at the output of the EEG amplifier,

what should be the CMRR of the EEG amplifier. [2 marks]

SEP4123

18

SEP4123

> 10% ATASION,

20%

20°/c

10%

'0-INION'

Figure Q8(a)

interface

Figure Q8(b)

19

SEP4123

Scalp

Figure Q8(c)

Figure 8(d)

CONFIDENTIAL



COURSE CODE

COURSE NAME

SEL 4743

BASIC DIGITAL VLSI

LECTURERS PROF. DR. MOHAMED KHALIL BIN MOHD HANIDR. SHAIKH NASIR BIN SHAIKH HUSIN MR. ZULKIFLI BIN MD YUSOF

PROGRAMME

SECTION

TIME

DATE

SEC / SEL / SEW / SET

0 1 - 0 2

2 HOURS 30 MINUTES

14 MAY 2011



SEL 47432

FORMULAE & PARAMETERS: Supply voltage: Vdd = 2.5 V

Drain current: w'

k T_|Kj-|Frl)Fmi,-5FL,](i+UVVmin = min( |Vgs| - |Vt|, |Vds|» |Vdsat| )

Vt = Vto + y

DS |

Standard transistor parameters:Vto (V) Y Cv ) <Pf(V) Vdsat (V) k' (|iA/V") MV'1)

NMOS 0.43 0.4 -0.3 0.63 115 0.06PMOS -0.4 -0.4 0.3 -1 -30 -0.1

Question 1

(a) Calculate the current for a pMOS transistor for the cases in Table 1. [12 marks]

Table 1W/L VGS (V) VDS (V) VBS (V)

(i) 1.35 nm/0.3 |im -1 -0.5 0(ii) 1.35 fim/0.3 n.m -1 -0.8 1(iii) 1.35 nm/0.3 -1.5 -1.4 0(iv) 4.5 pm/1.5 fim -1.6 -1.5 0

(b) Both transistors in Fig. 1 have identical size. Determine the voltage for Vx. Ignore body effect in your calculation. [13 marks]

VDD = 2.5 V

Fig. 1

(a) Refer to the circuit in Fig. 2.

(i) Write the Boolean equation for output Y.

SEL 47433

Question 2

[5 marks]

(ii) Minimize the Boolean equation such that it can be implemented using eight transistors only. [4 marks]

(iii) Draw a new schematic circuit based on your minimized Boolean equation.[6 marks]

hc[ hcJ A HIb hiz! HIa nr HI

Fig. 2

(b) (i) Draw a pseudo-nMOS circuit for 2-input NAND gate. [3 marks]

(ii) Choose the size of the nMOS transistors for your circuit to ensure the output low value Vql is below 0.2 V. Given (W/L)p = 0.9 nm/0.6 ^m. [7 marks]

SEL 47434

(a) Refer to the circuit in Fig. 3(a).

(i) The size of Ml transistor is W/L = 2.7 fim/0.3 (im. Size the other seven transistors such that the tpHL and tpLH of the gate is equivalent to an inverter with (W/L)p = 0.9 Hm/0.3 urn and (W/L)n = 0.45 |j.m/0.3 urn. [8 marks]

(ii) Draw a stick diagram corresponding to the circuit. Use the convention shown in Fig. 3(b).You should use a single active strip for both PMOS and NMOS transistors, and you must minimize the output capacitance. [7 marks]

Question 3

x

active poly metal 1 contact cut

Fig. 3(a) Fig. 3(b)

(b) Fig. 3(c) shows a layout for the pull-down network of a CMOS circuit.

(i) Draw the corresponding transistor schematic for the layout. [6 marks]

(ii) State the size (W and L) of all transistors in unit of L In Fig. 3(c), 1 grid = 1 L You can label the size next to each transistor in your schematic for part (b)(i) above. [4 marks]

SEL 47435

vss D B b a r A b a r A C b a r

ndiff

pdiff

poly

metal 1

I active I contact

Fig. 3(c)

Question 4

A chain of four inverters is shown in Fig. 4. The second and fourth inverters drive an external load, as indicated. Assume each inverter has a symmetrical VTC, and Cint = Cg (Y = 1). Equivalent input capacitance of unit-sized inverter is C.

In

s, = l s2 = ? “Jj4 C S', = 4

XT

Out

C = 16 C

Fig. 4

(a) Obtain the optimal sizing factors S2 and S4 for minimum propagation delay.[10 marks]

(b) Determine the minimum delay (in terms of tpo) for the inverter chain. [5 marks]

(c) If the 4C load does not exist, and only the output load remains, determine the lowest possible delay attainable, using unlimited number of inverters. [10 marks]

«

(a) A logic gate network is shown in Fig. 5(a). The input inverter size is (W/L)p = 4 7J2 X and (W/L)n = 3 )J2 X. The input capacitance Cin = 6 fF, while the output capacitance Cl = 256 fF. Use logical effort approach to optimize the sizes (in X unit) of inverter sO and NAND gate si to minimize delay for the logic network. Assume Cint = Cg(y = 1). The logical effort g for the NAND gate is 4/3. [10 marks]

SEL 47436

Question 5

Fig. 5(a)

(b) A similar logic gate network is shown in Fig. 5(b). The only difference is the input inverter gO now drives three similarly sized inverters sOa - sOc. Determine the new sizing for the inverters and NAND gate to achieve minimum delay. [15 marks]

Fig. 5(b)

Documents

Fke May 2011